Simulescumechanics

TECHNICAL UNIVERSITY OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
Mechanics of Materials
Student Workbook
with
Mathcad Applications
-Volume II-

Eng. Ion S. Simulescu, MPh, PhD, PE
Associate Professor

Bucharest 2007

I

PREFACE
The present textbook is the second volume from a series of textbooks, titled
Mechanics of Materials Student Workbook, intended to familiarize the students
enrolled in the first semester of their sophomore year at the Technical University of
Bucharest, School of Civil Engineering, with the practical application of the
theoretical concepts developed during the weekly lectures. This textbook has in fact a
complementary role to the theoretically orientated textbook published under the name
of Lectures in Mechanics of Materials, volume I.

A number of six chapters are covered by this textbook. Briefly, the organization is:
Chapter 5 - Pure Shear, Chapter 6 - Connections of Axially Deformed Members,
Chapter 7 - Bending of Plane Linear Beams, Chapter 8 - Bending Deflection of Linear
Beams, Chapter 9 - Torsion and Chapter 10 - Plane Stress Transformation. The
organization of the individual chapter is kept identical to the organization utilized in
the first volume. Each chapter starts with a theoretical section, named Theoretical
Background, where the most important theoretical aspects are succinctly discussed.
This section is followed by the Solved Problems section which contains a number
of representative in-depth solved problems. Finally, the last section is the Proposed
Problems section where a relatively large number of problems are proposed to the
student for private exercise.

With the intent to increase the student appetite towards using the modern capability of
the numerical computer, the problems contained in the Solved Problems sections
are solved using the MATHCAD software capabilities in parallel to the more classical
method of the manual calculation.

I can not conclude without expressing my appreciation for the help and dedication
provided during the tedious period of the text editing and figures preparation by my
students Alin Radu, Diana Ene, Irina Lazar and Dan Peticila. It is also my pleasure to
acknowledge the help that I received during the initial phase of preparation of this
textbook from my younger colleague Eng. Ovidiu Bogdan.

Finally, the author expresses his sincere gratitude to Professor Dr. Eng. Dan Cretu, the
Chairman of the Strength of Materials Department, for his encouragements and
support in the realization of this textbook.

Dr. Eng Ion S. Simulescu

Bucharest, Romania.
September, 2007.

II

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 5 Pure Shear 1

5.1 Theoretical Background
5.2 Solved Problems
5.3 Proposed Problems

Chapter 6 Connections of Axially Deformed Members 11

6.1.1 Analysis of Connections Comprised of Discrete Connectors
6.1.2 Analysis of Continuous Welded Connections
6.1.3 Analysis of Connected Parts
6.1.4 Connection Analysis. Practical Steps
6.2 Solved Problems

Chapter 7 Bending of Plane Linear Beams 67
- Stress Distribution

7.1.1 Pure Bending
7.1.2 Nonuniform Bending
7.1.3 Strength Condition
7.1.4 Built-Up Beam Connectors
7.2 Solved Problems

Chapter 8 Bending of Plane Linear Beams 193
- Deflection

8.1.1 Integration of the Moment - Curvature Differential Equation
8.1.2 Integration of the Load-Deflection Differential Equation
8.1.3 Boundary and Continuity Integration Conditions
8.1.4 Superposition Method
8.2 Solved Problems

III

Appendix 8.1 Deflection Formulae

Chapter 9 Torsion 305

9.1.1 Member with Circular Cross-Section
9.1.2 Member with Solid Rectangular Cross-Section
9.1.3 Member with Solid Elliptical Cross-Section
9.1.4 Member with Closed Thin-Wall Cross-Section
9.1.5 Member with Open Thin-Wall Cross-Section
9.2 Solved Problems

Chapter 10 Plane Stress Transformation 340

10.1.1 Plane Stress Transformation Equations
10.1.2 Principal Stresses and Directions
10.1.3 Maximum Shear Stresses and Directions
10.1.4 Mohrs Circle for Plane Stresses
10.2 Solved Problems

References 375

1

CHAPTER 5 Pure Shear

5.1. Theoretical Background

In accordance with the shear stress definitions the shear stress is defined as:
A
V
A
=
0
lim (5.1)

where V is the tangential stress vector acting on the infinitesimal area A .

If the particular case of the linear plane beam is considered, the resultant shear
forceV acting on the beam cross-section is obtained by integrating the shear stress
vector over the entire area A of the cross-section:
=
A
dA V * (5.2)

If only the shear force V is considered acting on the cross-section, the cross-section is
subjected to pure shear. The pure shear condition is more a practical desiderate than a
real condition. In general, as indicated by the differential relation (5.3),
) ( x V
dx
dM
= (5.3)

In the absence of the distributed moments ) ( x m , the existence of the shear force V on
the cross-section is related with the simultaneous existence of the bending moment
) ( x M on the same cross-section. Consequently, the pure shear is realized only if
the magnitude of the bending moment can be neglected.

In general, the distribution of shear stress is not uniform on the cross-section and,
consequently, can not be determined from the integral equation (5.2). In some cases
the average shear stress
avg
may be used in place of the true shear stress without
introducing a significant error. The average shear stress
avg
is calculated as:
A
V
avg
= (5.4)

2

The shear force V and the shear stress
avg
are illustrated in Figure 5.1.

Figure 5.1 Pure Shear
(a) Shear Force and (b) Average Shear Stress

The existence of shear stress implies the existence of shear strain, which represents
the change of the right angle. The original right angle shown in Figure 5.2.a is
modified into an acute angle
*
as depicted in Figure 5.2.b.

Figure 5.2 Shear Strain
(a) Undeformed Angle and (b) Deformed angle

The shear strain , representing the angular change, and measured in radians, is
calculated as:
*
2

= (5.5)
If the angular change is a small angle, the shear strain is approximated by its tangent:
s
s
L
= )
2
tan(
*
(5.6)

3

For the particular case of the homogeneous linear elastic material, the constitutive
low, the relation between the shear strain and stress, is described by Hooks law as:
* G = (5.7)

where G is the shear modulus characterizing the material.

The strength verification formula is:
all avg
(5.8)

where
all
is the allowable stress of the material, a value experimentally determined.

5.2. Solved Problems

The following section contains a number of practical situations which match the pure
shear assumptions presented above. The calculation of the connections subjected to
axial deformation, also involving the pure shear assumptions, is presented in the next
chapter.

Problem 5.2.1 The hole in a plate with dimensions shown in Figure 5.2.1 is punched
out by a hydraulic punch press. If the plate has a thickness of t=1.6 mm and is made
of steel with an average punching shear resistance of 262 MPa, what is the required
punching force P?

Figure 5.2.1

4

A. General Observations

A.1- The punching force P induces a constant average shear stress
avg
considered
uniformly distributed on the lateral surface located around the perimeter of the hole.

A.2 - Numerical Application

The following numerical data is provided:

Fv 262MPa :=

-

punching shear resistance of steel;
t 1.6mm :=

- hole thickness;
hr 3mm :=

- hole radius;
hl 38mm :=

- hole length.

B. Calculations

The perimeter Hp and the lateral area Ls of the hole are:

Hp 2 hl hr
( )
+ (
:= + ] 3 . 0 * 8 . 3 [ * 2 Hp 9.485cm =
Ls Hp t := 16 . 0 * 5 . 9 Ls 1.518cm
2
=

The punching force P is then calculated as:

P Ls Fv :=

Pa m
6 2 4
10 * 262 * 10 * 518 . 1 P 3.976 10
4
N =
P 39.761kN =

Problem 5.2.2 The bearing pad shown in Figure 5.2.2, consisting of two steel plates
bonded to a chloroprene elastomer, is subjected, during a static laboratory test, to a
shear force V=5.35 kN. Considering the lower steel plate rigidly attached to the base,
the relative lateral displacement of the top steel plate measured is 6 mm. What is the
shear modulus of elasticity of the chloroprene elastomer?

5

Figure 5.2.2


A1 - It is assumed that the shear force V is applied at the center of the top steel plate
and, consequently, only a lateral displacement =6 mm of the chloroprene elastomer
in X direction is induced. The undeformed and deform condition of the elastomer are
shown in the sketch below:

A2 - The plate dimensions are:
a 125mm :=

b 150mm :=

t 38mm :=

B. Calculations

The shear strain
xy
is calculated:
xy
atan

t
|
\
|
.
:=
|
.
|
\
|

8 . 3
6 . 0
tan
1
xy
0.157 =

The average shear stress
av xy _
is obtained as:
xy_av
V
A
pl
:=
2 4
3
10 * 5 . 187
10 * 35 . 5
m
N
xy_av
2.853 10
5
Pa =
where the area A
pl
a b := 15 * 5 . 12 A
pl
187.5cm
2
=

The shear modulus of elasticity is:

6

G

xy_av
xy
:=
157 . 0
10 * 853 . 2
5
Pa
G 1.822 10
6
Pa =


Problem 5.3.1 The 500 kN capacity hydraulic punch press, illustrated in Figure 5.3.1,
is used to punch a circular hole in a 10 mm thick aluminum plate. If the average
punching shear resistance of this plate is 250 MPa, what is the maximum diameter of
hole that can be punched?

Figure 5.3.1

Problem 5.3.2 The joint, shown in Figure 5.3.2, located between two concrete slabs, A
and B, is filled with a flexible epoxy. The joint has a height h = 150 mm, length
L = 2.0 m and thickness t = 12 mm. When subjected to vertical loading the slabs
displace vertically relative to each other with a distance d = 0.075 mm. Determine: (a)
the average shear strain in the epoxy and (b) the magnitude of the shear force at the
joint if the epoxy has a shear modulus of 960 GPa.

Figure 5.3.2

7

Problem 5.3.3 The flexible connection consisting of two rubber pads is bonded to
steel plates as illustrated in Figure 5.3.3. The rubber pads are 200 mm long, 150 mm
wide and 12 mm thick. Calculate: (a) the average shear strain occurring in the rubber
if the force P = 15 kN and the shear modulus for the rubber is G = 830 kPa, and (b)
the relative horizontal displacement between the interior plate and the outer plates.

Figure 5.3.3

Problem 5.3.4 The shock absorber constructed from an outer steel tube, a central steel
bar and a hollow rubber cylinder bonded to the steel components is used to support a
delicate instrument transmitting a vertical force P. The pertinent dimensions of the
shock absorber are shown in Figure 5.3.4. Calculate the following: (a) the shear stress
in the rubber at a radial distance r measured from the center of the steel supporting bar
and (b) the vertical displacement of the central steel bar, assuming that the shear
modulus of the rubber is known and the steel components are rigid elements.

Figure 5.3.4

8

Problem 5.3.5 A reinforcing bar is casted in concrete, as shown in Figure 5.3.5, with
the intent to conduct a pull-out capacity test. Assuming that the rebar has a diameter
d = 12 mm, an embedment length L = 30 cm and is subjected to a tensile force P =
17.5 kN determine: (a) the average shear stress, the bond stress, developed between
the concrete and the steel if the uniform distribution is considered and (b) the
maximum shear stress if the following distribution of the shear bond is accepted as
) * 6 * * 9 * 4 ( *
* 4
3 2 3
3
max
x x L L
L
+ =

, where x is measured from the interior end
of the bar toward the concrete surface.

Figure 5.3.5

Problem 5.3.6 A rectangular plate made of plastic, pictured in the undeformed
position with dashed lines, is uniformly deformed into the shape of the parallelogram,
marked in Figure 5.3.6 as a shaded surface. Calculate the average shear strain and
stress in the plate after the deformation considering a shear modulus of elasticity of
G=1GPa.

Figure 5.3.6

9

Problem 5.3.7 The shear stress applied on the edges of a rectangular plate, shown
in Figure 5.3.7, induces a shear strain 0012 . 0 = . Determine the horizontal
displacement
A
and the corresponding shear stress , if the shear modulus of
elasticity of the material is G=10GPa.

Figure 5.3.7

Problem 5.3.8 The horizontal plate, pictured in Figure 5.3.8, is subjected to an axial
load P=250 kN. The plate is mounted into a C shaped lug using two rubber pads. If
the dimensions of the rubber pads are b=50mm, h= 25mm and w=80mm, respectively,
calculate: (a) the average shear stress
avg
in the rubber pads, (b) the average shear
strain
avg
in the rubber pads considering a shear modulus of elasticity for the rubber
G=0.8MPA, and (c) the relative horizontal displacement between the lugs and the
horizontal plate.

Figure 5.3.8

Problem 5.3.9 The pair of players, pictured in Figure 5.3.9, are held together by a
central bolt with a diameter d = 60mm and made of steel with an allowable shear

10

stress MPa
shear bolt all
80
_ _
= . A rigid part C is pressed between the players jaws by
applying simultaneously a pair of forces P at location A. Determine the maximum
force which can be applied to part C.

Figure 5.3.9

11

CHAPTER 6 Connections of Axially
Deformed Members


This chapter presents the most important aspects of the analysis of the connections of
the axially deformed members. A detailed theoretical presentation is made in Chapter
6 of the book titled Lectures in Mechanics of Materials - Volume I, and only the
most important results, necessary to assist the problem solving process, are reprinted.
The connections are grouped in two main categories: (a) connections with discrete
connectors and (b) connections with continuous connectors. The first category refers
to connections realized with bolts, rivets or nails, while the second category includes
welded or glued connections. In engineering practice one can encounter mixed
connections, but those are not the subject of this chapter.

6.1.1 Analysis of Connections Comprised of Discrete Connectors

In general, a connection is realized from a single connector or from a multitude of
single connectors (multiple connectors). The single connector is a small cylindrical
deformable solid characterized by a tiny cross-section by comparison with its length.
Both types of connections can be treated in a universal way if the following
assumption is accepted:

Assumption 1: It is commonly assumed, when the geometry of the connection is
symmetrical and the load passes through the connections centroid, that
the load is equally shared by all connectors.

The mathematical transposition of the above assumption is:
conn
member
conn gle
n
F
P =
_ sin
(6.1)

where:
conn gle
P
_ sin
is the axial force transmitted trough the single connector;

member
F is the axial force in the member;

12

conn
n is the number of single connectors participating in the axial force
of the member.

The axial force pertinent to the single connector,
conn gle
P
_ sin
, must be less or equal than
the capable force characterizing the single connector
conn gle
Pcap
_ sin
:
conn gle gle_conn
Pcap P
_ sin sin
(6.2)

The capable force
conn gle
Pcap
_ sin
developed by a single connector is obtained
considering two failure scenarios: (1) bearing failure and (2) shearing failure.

Failure Scenario 1 (Bearing Failure):

The capable force resulting from bearing failure,
conn gle
bear Pcap
_ sin
_ , is calculated
as:
bear all part parts b conn gle
t t d bear Pcap
_ _ sin
* ) , min( * _

= (6.3)

where:
b
d is the diameter of the connector;
part parts
t t , are the sum of the thicknesses of the parts moving in
opposite directions assuming the rupture of the connector;
bear all _
is the allowable bearing stress of the material.

Observations: (1) the bearing takes place at the curved surface of contact between the
bolt and the axially deformed member. Due to the difficulties related
with the exact calculation of the contact area and the variation of the
bearing normal stress on this area a simpler expression,
) , min( *
part parts b
t t d , is adopted in the calculation contained in the
above formula (6.3);
(2) the allowable bearing stress
bear all _
, determined from laboratory
tests, is supposed to be known in the calculations and is considered
uniformly distributed on the contact area.

13

(3) the error introduced by using the simpler expression of the contact
area and a uniformly distributed bearing stress is considered during the
evaluation of the allowable bearing stress
bear all _
value assigned by
the codes.

Failure Scenario 2 (Shearing Failure):

The capable force resulting from shearing failure,
conn gle
shear Pcap
_ sin
_ , is obtained
as:
shear all
b
shear conn gle
d
n shear Pcap
_
2
_ sin
*
4
*
* _
= (6.4)

where:
shear
n is the number of the shearing surfaces of the connector and is
equal to the number of the interfaces of the connected components;
b
d is the diameter of the connector;
shear all _
is the allowable shearing stress of the connectors material.

Observations: (1) the formula (6.4) is not an exact formula, but for its simplicity is
adopted by all international codes;
(2) the shear stress
shear all _
, acting in the shearing cross-section of the
connector, is considered uniformly distributed and is obtained from
laboratory tests;
(3) the error induced by the usage of the formula (6.4) is considered at
the evaluation of the
shear all _
value assigned by the codes.

The capable force developed by the individual connector,
conn gle
Pcap
_ sin
, is calculated
as:
) _ , _ min(
_ sin _ sin _ sin conn gle conn gle conn gle
shear Pcap bear Pcap Pcap = (6.5)

14

6.1.2 Analysis of Continuous Welded Connections

In the Manual of Steel Construction Allowable Stress Design, published by the
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), the welds are categorized in four
basic groups: groove, fillet, slot and plug welds. These categories are illustrated in
Figure 6.1. In engineering practice, the fillet weld is the most commonly used type of
weld, due to its facile fabrication.

The allowable stress on various types of welds is dependent upon the effective area
of the weld. The effective area of the groove or fillet weld is calculated as the product
of the effective throat dimension
e
t and the length of the weld. For fillet welds the
effective throat dimension is defined as the shortest dimension measured from the
weld root to the face of the weld. Assuming that the weld has equal legs of length a
the effective throat is equal to
2
a
.

Figure 6.1 Basic Weld Types

The calculation of the effective throat, accordingly to AISC, is shown in Figure 6.2.

15

Figure 6.2 Effective Throat Dimension for Fillet Welds
(a) Equal Legs and (b) Unequal Legs

For full penetration groove welds, the AISC defines the effective throat as a function
of the thickness of the parts joined in the connection as pictured in Figures 6.3.a and
6.3.b. In the case of partial penetration welds, the effective throat is a function of the
depth of the preparation as shown in Figures 6.3.c and 6.3.d.

Assumption 2: It is commonly assumed that an individual weld fails in shearing along
the effective area.

The capable force developed by a single weld,
weld cap
P
_
, is calculated:

weld all eff weld weld cap
t l P
_ _
* * = (6.6)

where:
weld
l ,
eff
t are the effective lengths and throats of the weld;
weld all _
is the allowable shear stress in the weld.

Observations: (1) the failure surface presumed in formula (6.6) is justified by
laboratory tests;
(2) the allowable bearing stress
weld all _
, determined from laboratory
tests, is supposed known in the calculations and is considered
uniformly distributed on the contact area.
(3) the error introduced by using the simpler expression of the contact
area and an uniformly distributed shearing stress is considered during
the evaluation of the allowable bearing stress
weld all _
value assign by
the codes.

16

Figure 6.3 Groove Weld Effective Throat

The capable force developed by a single weld,
weld cap
P
_
, must be greater or equal to
the axial force corresponding to the specific weld:
weld weld cap
F P
_
(6.7)

If all the welds comprising a welded connection are geometrically identical, parallel
and equidistant to the longitudinal axis of the member, the axial force of the member
member
F is considered equally distributed to each weld:
weld
member
weld
n
F
F = (6.8)

where:
weld
n is the number of welds existing in the connection.

Note: Special cases of eccentrically welds and combination of groove and fillet welds
are presented in the next section.

6.1.3 Analysis of Connected Parts

The axial load existing in the axially deformed member is transferred between the
parts of the connections through the connectors. The regular verification described in
Chapter 4 titled Axial Deformation applies. This verification is summarized with
the following equation:

17

all
critical
member t crit corres
member t critical
A
F
=
_ sec _ _
_ sec _
(6.9)

where:
member t critical _ sec _
is the normal stress in any critical cross-section;

critical
A is the effective area of the critical cross-section;

member t crit corres
F
_ sec _ _
is the corresponding axial force acting in the critical
cross-section considered;

all
is the allowable normal stress of the material.

6.4 Connection Analysis. Practical Steps

The practical analysis of a connection subjected to axial force is conducted
considering the following main steps:
(1) disregard the existence of the connection and calculate the axial force acting
on the member related with the connection;
(2) identify the connecting parts and the connection type;
(3) draw the transmission diagram. This diagram indicates the transfer of the
axial force between the parts comprised in the connection. The transmission
diagram is the most suggestive for the connections realized from multiple
discrete connectors. For connections realized with a single bolt or for welded
connections the transmission diagram becomes trivial;
(4) Verify the member and all other constituent parts of the connection
considering all critical cross-sections and their corresponding axial forces as
described in section 6.4;
(5) Verify the connections capacity.
(6) The capacity of the connection is represented by the minimum capacity of the
parts and of the connection.

These steps are exemplified in the next section.

18


Problem 6.2.1 The flat bar illustrated in Figure 6.2.1 has a width b = 50 mm and
thickness t =6 mm, and is loaded in tension by a force P.

Figure 6.2.1
The bar is attached to a support by a pin of diameter d that passes through a hole of
the same size in the bar. The distance between the hole and the end of the bar is h =
25 mm. The allowable tensile stress on the net cross section of the bar, along the
planes a-b and c-d, is 112 MPa. The allowable shear stress in the pin is 64 MPa, while
the allowable shear stress in the bar along planes e-b and f-c is 43 MPa. Calculate: (a)
the pin diameter for which the load P will be maximum and (b) the corresponding
maximum value of the load.


A.1 The system contains two structural elements: (a) the axially deformed flat bar
and (b) the bolt with an unknown diameter d . Four failure scenarios are emphasized
and
sys
P together with its corresponding bolt diameter are identified.


all_shear_bolt
64 MPa := -

allowable shear stress for the bolt;
all_shear_bar
43 MPa := allowable shear stress of the bar;

19

all
112 MPa := - allowable tensile stress in the bar;
b 50 mm := - dimensions of the flat bars cross-section;

t 6 mm :=
h 25 mm := - edge distance.

B. Calculations

B.1 Flat Bar Capacity Calculation

B.1.a - Scenario 1 Material failure on cd ab cross-section
P
1
d ( ) t b d ( )
all
:= N d
6 4
10 * 112 * 10 * ) 5 ( * 6 . 0

B.1.b - Scenario 2 Material failure on fc eb cross-sections
P
2
d ( ) 2 t h
d
2
+
|
\
|
.

all_shear_bar
(
(
:= N
d
(
+
6 4
10 * 43 * 10 * )
2
5 . 2 ( * 6 . 0 * 2

B.2 Bolt Capacity Calculation

B.2.a - Scenario 3 - Shear failure of the bolt
P
3
d ( ) 2
d
2
4

all_shear_bolt
\
|
.
:= N
d
) 10 * 64 * 10 *
4
*
( * 2
6 4
2

B.2.b - Scenario 4 - Bearing failure of the bolt
P
4
d ( ) d t 1.6
all
:= N d
6 4
10 * 112 * 6 . 1 * 10 * 6 . 0 *

B.3 Calculation of the Capacity of the System
P
min
d ( ) min P
1
d ( ) P
2
d ( ) , P
3
d ( ) , P
4
d ( ) , ( ) :=

The four previously calculated capacities ) ( ), ( ), (
3 2 1
d P d P d P

and ) (
4
d P
,
dependent
on the bolt diameter d , are plotted in the graphs shown below. The bolt diameter

d ,
varies from 1 cm to 4 cm.

20

0.01 0.015 0.02 0.025 0.03 0.035
0
5
.
10
4
1
.
10
5
1.5
.
10
5
2
.
10
5
P
1
d ( )
P
2
d ( )
P
3
d ( )
P
4
d ( )
d

The second graph pictures the capacities ) ( ), ( ), (
3 2 1
d P d P d P

and ) (
4
d P together with
the minimum envelope function ) (
min
d P .
0.01 0.015 0.02 0.025 0.03 0.035
0
5
.
10
4
1
.
10
5
1.5
.
10
5
2
.
10
5
P
1
d ( )
P
2
d ( )
P
3
d ( )
P
4
d ( )
P
min
d ( )
d

The third graph contains only the variation of the ) (
min
d P . Consequently, the
maximum value of the axial force characterizing the system is identified
as N P
sys
18635 = . Its corresponding bolt diameter is cm d 245 . 2 = .

21

0.01 0.013 0.016 0.019 0.022 0.025 0.028 0.031 0.034 0.037 0.04
5000
7500
1
.
10
4
1.25
.
10
4
1.5
.
10
4
1.75
.
10
4
2
.
10
4
P
min
d ( )
d

Problem 6.2.2 Calculate the maximum axial load
cap
P which can be applied to the
lap- splice, shown in Figure 6.2.2.a, comprised of two (2) spliced bars, 1 & 2, and two
connection bars, 3 & 4, having cross-sections of 260mm x 18mm and 260mm x 8mm,
respectively. Ten bolts mm 22 = , symmetrically located relatively to the splice in
two groups, are used.

Figure 6.2.2.a

A.1 The system contains three structural elements: (a) the spliced bars 1 & 2, (b) the
connection bars 3 & 4, and (c) the bolted connection assembled from 10 bolts
mm 22 = symmetrically located in two groups relatively to the splice. The
transmission diagram of the axial force between the structural components is shown
in Figure 6.2.2.b. Three values,
sb cap
P
_
,
cb cap
P
_
and
bolt
P , corresponding to the

22

capable axial force pertinent to each of the structural components are calculated and
the minimum is retained as the capable axial force
cap
P characterizing the entire
system capacity. The transmission diagram of the axial load between the connected
parts is shown in Figure 6.2.2.b.

Figure 6.2.2.b Axial Force Transmission Diagram


all
210 MPa := - allowable stress of the material;
n
bolt
5 := - number of bolts transmitting the force between the spliced bar 1 to the
connection plates and from the connection plates 3 & 4 to the spliced bar
2;
d
bolt
22 mm := - bolt diameter;
n
con_bar
2 :=

- number of connection bars;
l
con
260 mm := - width of the connection bars 3 & 4;
t
con
8 mm :=

- thickness of the connection bars 3 & 4;
l
plate
260 mm := - width of the spliced bars 1 & 2;
t
plate
18 mm := - thickness of the spliced bars 1 & 2;

23

B. Calculations

B.1 Calculation of the Capacity of the Spliced Bars 1 & 2 (see Figure 6.2.2.a)

The area of the spliced bars 1 & 2 critical cross-sections 1-1, 2-2 and 3-3,
respectively, are calculated as:

A
sb1_1
l
plate
t
plate
2 d
bolt
t
plate
:= ] 8 . 1 * 2 . 2 * 2 8 . 1 * 26 [

A
sb1_1
38.88cm
2
=

A
sb2_2
l
plate
t
plate
d
bolt
t
plate
:= ] 8 . 1 * 2 . 2 8 . 1 * 26 [ A
sb2_2
42.84cm
2
=

A
sb3_3
A
sb1_1
:= A
sb3_3
38.88cm
2
=

The axial force diagram, shown in Figure 6.2.2.b, indicates that only a fraction of the
total axial force

cap
P

corresponds to each one of the cross-sections. Consequently, the
following equations are obtained:

P
cap_sb1_1
A
sb1_1

all

3
5
P
cap_sb2_2
A
sb2_2

all

2
5
P
cap_sb3_3
A
sb3_3

all

The axial capable force in each cross-section is:
P
cap_sb1_1
A
sb1_1

all
:=
6 4
10 * 210 * 10 * 88 . 38

P
cap_sb1_1
8.165 10
5
N =

P
cap_sb2_2
5
3
A
sb2_2

all
:=
6 4
10 * 210 * 10 * 84 . 42 *
3
5

P
cap_sb2_2
1.499 10
6
N =

24

P
cap_sb3_3
5
2
A
sb3_3

all
:=
6 4
10 * 210 * 10 * 88 . 38 *
2
5

P
cap_sb3_3
2.041 10
6
N =

The capable axial force
sb cap
P
_
carried by the spliced bars 1 & 2 is calculated as the
minimum of the values of the axial forces calculated above:

P
cap_sb
min P
cap_sb1_1
P
cap_sb2_2
, P
cap_sb3_3
,
( )
:= P
cap_sb
8.165 10
5
N =

B.2 Calculation of the Capacity of the Connection Bars 3 & 4 (see Figure 6.2.2.a)

The area of the cross-sections of the each connection bar is obtained as:
A
cb1_1
l
con
t
con
2 d
bolt
t
con
:= 8 . 0 * 2 . 2 * 2 8 . 0 * 26 A
cb1_1
17.28cm
2
=

A
cb2_2
l
con
t
con
d
bolt
t
con
:= 8 . 0 * 2 . 2 8 . 0 * 26 A
cb2_2
19.04cm
2
=

A
cb3_3
l
con
t
con
2 d
bolt
t
con
:= 8 . 0 * 2 . 2 * 2 8 . 0 * 26 A
cb3_3
17.28cm
2
=

From the axial force diagram, shown in Figure 6.2.2.b each of the cross-sections are
subjected to the following fraction of the total axial force as indicated by the
equations written below:

2
5
P
cap_cb1_1
n
con_bar
A
cb1_1

all

3
5
P
cap_cb2_2
n
con_bar
A
cb2_2

all

P
cap_cb3_3
n
con_bar
A
cb3_3

all

where n
con_bar
2 :=

is the number of connection plates used.

Consequently, these forces are calculated as:

25

P
cap_cb1_1
5
2
n
con_bar
A
cb1_1

all
:=
6 4
10 * 210 * 10 * 28 . 17 * 2 *
2
5

P
cap_cb1_1
1.814 10
6
N =

P
cap_cb2_2
5
3
n
con_bar
A
cb2_2

all
:=
6 4
10 * 210 * 10 * 04 . 19 * 2 *
3
5

P
cap_cb2_2
1.333 10
6
N =

P
cap_cb3_3
n
con_bar
A
cb3_3

all
:=
6 4
10 * 210 * 10 * 28 . 17 * 2

P
cap_cb3_3
7.258 10
5
N =

The capable axial force

cb cap
P
_

characterizing the connection plates is obtained as
follows:
P
cap_cb
min P
cap_cb1_1
P
cap_cb2_2
, P
cap_cb3_3
,
( )
:= P
cap_cb
7.258 10
5
N =

B.3 Calculation of the Capacity of the Multiple-Bolt Connection

B.3.a Calculation of the Individual Bolt Capacity

B.3.a.1 Calculation of the Bearing Capacity

The allowable bearing stress used in the calculation is obtained:
all_bearing
1.6
all
:=
6
10 * 210 * 6 . 1
all_bearing
3.36 10
8
Pa =

The bearing capacity of the bolt

bear bolt
P
_

is calculated as:
P
bolt_bear
d
bolt
min 2 t
con
t
plate
,
( )

all_bearing
:=

( )
8
10 * 36 . 3 * 018 . 0 , 008 . 0 * 2 min * 022 . 0 P
bolt_bear
1.183 10
5
N =

B.3.a.2 Calculation of the Shear Capacity

The allowable shear stress used in the calculation is obtained:
all_shear
0.6
all
:=
6
10 * 210 * 6 . 0
all_shear
1.26 10
8
Pa =

26

The shear capacity of the bolt
shear bolt
P
_
is calculated considering two (2)
2 =
f
n shearing sections:
n
f
2 :=

P
bolt_shear
n
f
d
bolt
2
4

all_shear
:=
8
2
10 * 26 . 1 *
4
022 . 0 *
* 2

P
bolt_shear
9.579 10
4
N =

The capacity of the bolt

bolt
P

is obtained:
P
bolt
min P
bolt_bear
P
bolt_shear
,
( )
:= ( )
4 5
10 * 579 . 9 , 10 * 183 . 1 min

P
bolt
9.579 10
4
N =

B.3.b Multiple-Bolt Capacity

The transfer of the axial force from the spliced bar 1 to the connection bars 3 & 4 and
from the connection bars 3 & 4 to the spliced bar 2 is realized by a group of

bolt
n

bolts. The total axial force

con bolt
P
_

carried through the bolts group is:

n
bolt
5 :=

P
bolt_con
n
bolt
P
bolt
:=
4
10 * 579 . 9 * 5 P
bolt_con
4.79 10
5
N =

B.4 Calculation of the Connection Capacity

The capacity of the entire connection

cap
P

is calculated as the minimum value of the
capable axial forces calculated above for the splice bars, connection bars and
multiple-bolt connection, respectively.

P
cap
min P
cap_sb
P
cap_cb
, P
bolt_con
,
( )
:= P
cap
4.79 10
5
N =

27

Problem 6.2.3 A detail of the hanger to ceiling connection is shown in Figure 6.2.3.a.
The hanger is fabricated from 2U20 structural steel shapes and is attached to a gusset
plate 260mm x 18mm by a bolted connection composed of eight (8) bolts mm 16 = .
Assuming that the hanger is subjected to an axial tensile force kN P 400 = , verify the
strength of the detail.


A.1 - The detail proposed for investigation is composed from three structural
elements: (a) the gusset plate, (b) the hanger and (c) the bolted connection. The first
step of the verification consists in the identification of the critical cross-sections
characterizing each structural component.

From the axial force transmission diagram, shown in Figure 6.2.3.b, the axial forces
pertinent to each critical cross-section is identified and, consequently, the normal
stresses are calculated. For the system to be safe the calculation must conclude that
the maximum axial stress induced by the axial force in all structural components must
be limited to the value of the allowable stress MPa
all
200 = .

Figure 6.2.3.a
.
A.2 Numerical Data

P 400 10
3
N :=

- the force acting on the hanger;

28

all
210 MPa :=

- the allowable normal stress of the material;

d
bolt
16 mm := - diameter of the bolts;

n
bolt_1_1
3 :=

- number of bolts in section 1-1 (see Figure 6.2.3);
n
bolt_2_2
3 := - number of bolts in section 2-2 (see Figure 6.2.3);
n
bolt_3_3
2 := - number of bolts in section 3-3 (see Figure 6.2.3);
n
bolt
n
bolt_1_1
n
bolt_2_2
+ n
bolt_3_3
+ :=

n
bolt
8 = - total number of bolts;

U shape data
A
U
32.2 cm
2
:=

- area;
t
U
8.5 mm :=

- web thickness;

Gusset Plate data
l
plate
260 mm :=

- width;
t
plate
18 mm :=

- thickness;

B. Calculations

The transmission diagram of the axial force trough the connection is shown in
Figure 6.2.3.b.

Figure 6.2.3.b Axial Force Transmission Diagram

29

B.1. Verification of the Gusset Plate

Note: The verification of the gusset plate must conclude that the maximum axial
stress induced by the axial force in the gusset plate is limited to the value of the
allowable stress MPa
all
210 =

The areas of the critical cross-sections characterizing the gusset plate are calculated
as:

A
gp_1_1
l
plate
t
plate
3 d
bolt
t
plate
:= 8 . 1 * 6 . 1 * 3 8 . 1 * 26

A
gp_1_1
38.16cm
2
=

A
gp_2_2
l
plate
t
plate
3d
bolt
t
plate
:= 8 . 1 * 6 . 1 * 3 8 . 1 * 26

A
gp_2_2
38.16cm
2
=

A
gp_3_3
l
plate
t
plate
2d
bolt
t
plate
:= 8 . 1 * 6 . 1 * 2 8 . 1 * 26

A
gp_3_3
41.04cm
2
=

Accordingly to the axial force diagram shown in Figure 6.2.3.b, the axial forces
pertinent to the above cross-sections are:

P
gp_1_1
P := P
gp_1_1
4 10
5
N =

P
gp_2_2
n
bolt
n
bolt_1_1
n
bolt
P :=
3
10 * 400 *
8
3 8
P
gp_2_2
2.5 10
5
N =

P
gp_3_3
n
bolt
n
bolt_1_1
n
bolt_2_2
n
bolt
P :=

3
10 * 400 *
8
3 3 8

P
gp_3_3
1 10
5
N =

The normal stress induced in the characteristic cross-sections is calculated as:

30

gp_1_1
P
gp_1_1
A
gp_1_1
:=

6
2 4
5
10 *
10 * 16 . 38
10 * 4
m
N
gp_1_1
104.822MPa =

if
gp_1_1

all
"ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =
gp_2_2
P
gp_2_2
A
gp_2_2
:=

6
2 4
5
10 *
10 * 16 . 38
10 * 5 . 2
m
N
gp_2_2
65.514MPa =

if
gp_2_2

all
"ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =
gp_3_3
P
gp_3_3
A
gp_3_3
:=

6
2 4
5
10 *
10 * 04 . 41
10 * 1
m
N
gp_3_3
24.366MPa =
if
gp_3_3

all
"ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =

Conclusion: The maximum normal stress induced in the gusset plate is

MPa 822 . 104
a value less than

MPa
all
210 = < .

B.2. Verification of the 2U shape member

The hanger is composed from two U20 ( n
U_bar
2 := ) steel shapes. The area of the
critical cross-sections characterizing the hanger is calculated as:

A
U_1_1
n
U_bar
A
U
n
bolt_1_1
d
bolt
t
U

( )
:= ( ) 85 . 0 * 6 . 1 * 3 2 . 32 * 2

A
U_1_1
56.24cm
2
=

A
U_2_2
n
U_bar
A
U
n
bolt_2_2
d
bolt
t
U

( )
:= ( ) 85 . 0 * 6 . 1 * 3 2 . 32 * 2
A
U_2_2
56.24cm
2
=

A
U_3_3
n
U_bar
A
U
n
bolt_3_3
d
bolt
t
U

( )
:= ( ) 85 . 0 * 6 . 1 * 2 2 . 32 * 2
A
U_3_3
58.96cm
2
=

Accordingly to the axial force diagram shown in Figure 6.2.3.b, the axial forces
pertinent to the above cross-sections are:

31

P
U_1_1
n
bolt_1_1
n
bolt
P :=
3
10 * 400 *
8
3
P
U_1_1
1.5 10
5
N =

P
U_2_2
n
bolt_1_1
n
bolt_2_2
+
n
bolt
P :=
+
3
10 * 400 *
8
3 3
P
U_2_2
3 10
5
N =

P
U_3_3
P :=
3
10 * 400 P
U_3_3
4 10
5
N =

The normal stress induced in the characteristic cross-sections is calculated as:

U_1_1
P
U_1_1
A
U_1_1
:=

6
2 4
5
10 *
10 * 24 . 56
10 * 5 . 1
m
N
U_1_1
26.671MPa =

if
U_1_1

all
"ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =

U_2_2
P
U_2_2
A
U_2_2
:=

6
2 4
5
10 *
10 * 24 . 56
10 * 3
m
N
U_2_2
53.343MPa =

if
U_2_2

all
"ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =

U_3_3
P
U_3_3
A
U_3_3
:=

6
2 4
5
10 *
10 * 96 . 58
10 * 4
m
N
U_3_3
67.843MPa =

if
U_3_3

all
"ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =

Conclusion: The maximum normal stress induced in the gusset plate is MPa 843 . 67 , a
value less than

MPa
all
210 = <

B.3. Verification of the Bolt connection

The bolted connection is realized with eight bolts mm 16 = .

B.3.1 Capacity of Individual Bolt

B.3.1.a Bearing Capacity

32

The allowable bearing stress is calculated as:

all_bearing
1.6
all
:=
6
10 * 210 * 6 . 1
all_bearing
3.36 10
8
Pa =

and, consequently, the shearing capacity of the bolt is:

P
bolt_bear
d
bolt
min 2 t
U
t
plate
,
( )

all_bearing
:=
( )
8
10 * 36 . 3 * 018 . 0 , 0085 . 0 * 2 min * 016 . 0 P
bolt_bear
9.139 10
4
N =

B.3.1.b Shearing Capacity

The shear force is equally distributed on two ( n
f
2 := ) shearing surfaces. The
allowable shear stress of the bolt material is calculated as:

all_shear
0.6
all
:=
6
10 * 210 * 6 . 0
all_shear
1.26 10
8
Pa =

and, consequently, the shear capacity of the bolt is:

P
bolt_shear
n
f
d
bolt
2
4

all_shear
:=
8
2
10 * 26 . 1 *
4
016 . 0 *
* 2

P
bolt_shear
5.067 10
4
N =

The capacity of the bolt is obtained:
P
bolt
min P
bolt_bear
P
bolt_shear
,
( )
:= ( )
4 4
10 * 067 . 5 , 10 * 139 . 9 min

P
bolt
5.067 10
4
N =

3.2 Multiple Bolt Capacity

P
bolt_con
n
bolt
P
bolt
:=
4
10 * 067 . 5 * 8 P
bolt_con
4.053 10
5
N =

if P
bolt_con
P "ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =

33

Conclusion: The system composed of gusset plate, hanger (2U20 steel shapes) and
bolted connection is able to carry the axial force of kN P 400 = . The individual
verification of the system components indicates that the bolted connection is the
weakest link of the system, characterized by the smallest capacity.

Problem 6.2.4 Determine the size and the length of the fillet weld necessary to realize
the lap-splice connection shown in Figures 6.2.4.a and 6.2.4.b assuming that an axial
force kN P 180 = acts along the axis described by the centroid of the L shape.

Figure 6.2.4


A.1 Numerical Data

P 180 kN :=

- the axial force;
all
210 MPa := - allowable normal stress of the material;
all_weld
0.7
all
:=
all_weld
147MPa = - allowable shear stress of the weld;

L70x70x7

Shape Data (data is extracted from tables)
A
L
9.4 cm
2
:= - area;

34

l
L
70 mm :=

- flange width;
t
L
7 mm :=

- flange thickness;
e
L
19.7 mm :=

- eccentricity;

Gusset Plate Data
l
gp
l
L
2 60 mm + := + 60 * 2 70 l
gp
190mm =

- minimum width of the gusset
t
gp
10 mm :=

- thickness of the gusset

B. Calculations

B.1 - Gusset Plate Verification

A
gp
l
gp
t
gp
:= 1 * 19 A
gp
19cm
2
=

gp
P
A
gp
:=

6
2 4
3
10 *
10 * 19
10 * 180
m
N
gp
94.737MPa =

if
gp

all
"ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =

B.2 L shape Verification

ls
P
A
L
:=

6
2 4
3
10 *
10 * 4 . 9
10 * 180
m
N
ls
191.489MPa =

if
ls

all
"ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =

B.3 Welds Sizing

B.3.a - Two fillet welded connection (see Figure 6.2.4.c)

The free-body diagram of the L shape is pictured in Figure 6.2.4.c. The equations of
equilibrium are written as:

35

F
1a
50.66kN =

F
2a
129.3kN =
The length of the weld1 is obtained:
a
weld1a
0.707 t
L
:= 7 * 707 . 0 a
weld1a
4.949mm =

l
weld1a
F
1a
a
weld1a

all_weld
( )
:=

2
6 3
4
10 *
10 * 147 * 10 * 949 . 4
10 * 066 . 5
Pa m
N

l
weld1a
6.964cm =

The length of the weld2 is calculated:
a
weld2a
a
weld1a
:= a
weld2a
4.949mm =

l
weld2a
F
2a
a
weld2a

all_weld
( )
:=

2
6 3
5
10 *
10 * 147 * 10 * 949 . 4
10 * 293 . 1
Pa m
N

l
weld2a
17.773cm =

Conclusion: The following effective dimensions are chosen for weld1 and weld2,
respectively: mm a
a weld
5
1
= , mm a
a weld
5
2
= ,

mm l
a weld
70
1
=

and

mm l
a weld
180
2
= .

B.3.b - Three fillet welded connection (see Figure 6.2.4.d)

The capacity of the weld3, the weld normal to the longitudinal axis of the L shape, is
calculated as:
a
weld3b
0.707 t
L
:= 7 * 707 . 0 a
weld3b
4.949mm =

F
3b
a
weld3b
l
L

all_weld
:=
3 6 2 3
10 * 10 * 147 * 10 * 7 * 10 * 949 . 4 Pa m m

F
3b
50.925kN =

36

The free-body diagram of the L shape is pictured in Figure 6.2.4.d. The equations of
equilibrium are written as:

F
1b
25.2kN =
F
2b
103.84kN =

The length of the weld1 is obtained:
a
weld1b
a
weld1a
:= a
weld1b
4.949mm =

l
weld1b
F
1b
a
weld1b

all_weld
( )
:=

2
6 3
3
10 *
10 * 147 * 10 * 949 . 4
10 * 2 . 25
Pa m
N

l
weld1b
3.464cm =

The length of the weld2 is calculated:
a
weld2b
a
weld2a
:= a
weld2b
4.949mm =

l
weld2b
F
2b
a
weld2b

all_weld
( )
:=

2
6 3
3
10 *
10 * 147 * 10 * 949 . 4
10 * 84 . 103
Pa m
N

l
weld2b
14.273cm =

Conclusion: The following effective dimensions are chosen for weld1 and weld2,
respectively: mm a
b weld
5
1
= , mm a
b weld
5
2
= ,

mm l
b weld
40
1
=

and

mm l
b weld
150
2
= .

Problem 6.2.5 The rigid beam, shown in Figure 6.2.5.a, is subjected by vertical
concentrated force kN P 50 = acting on the tip of the cantilever at point C. The rigid

37

beam is supported at point A by a hinge and at point B, located at distance m b 2 =
from the cantilevers tip, by a hanger. The Detail A, pictured in Figure 6.2.5.b,
representing the hinge detailing has 2 gusset plates of 100mm x 8mm. The hanger,
made of two rounded bars, shown in Figure 6.2.5.b, welded in Detail B to the gusset
1. The two gusset plates contained in Detail B, gusset 1 and gusset 2, have each cross-
sectional dimensions of 100mm x 10mm. Calculate: (a) the diameter of the hangers
rounded bars, (b) the diameter of the bolt used in Detail B and verify the gusset plates,
(c) size the length of the welds between the rounded bars and gusset 1 considering the
effective thickness of the weld mm t
B weld
5
_
= , (d) the bolt diameter used, verify the
attachment gusset plates and the welds of Detail A considering an effective thickness
mm t
A weld
5
_
= .

Figure 6.2.5.a

38

Figure 6.2.5.b


A.1 Numerical Data

P 50 kN :=

- the acting force;
a 4 m :=

b 2 m :=

- beam lengths;
all
210 MPa :=

- allowable stress of the material;
all_shear
0.6
all
:=
all_shear
126MPa =

- allowable shear of the material;
all_bearing
1.6
all
:=
all_bearing
336MPa =

- allowable stresses for the bolt;

Detail A
n
gusset_A
2 :=

- two similar gussets;

l
gusset_A
100 mm := - length of the gusset plates;
t
gusset_A
8 mm := - width of the gusset plates;
t
web
12 mm := - presumed thickness of the rigid beam web;

Detail B

39

n
hang
2 := - two rounded bars welded to the Gusset 1;
n
gusset_B
2 := - two similar gussets (Gusset1 and Gusset2);
l
gusset_B
100 mm := - length of the gusset plates;

t
guss_B
10 mm := - width of the gusset plates;
t
gusset1
t
guss_B
:= - width of the Gusset 1;
t
gusset2
t
guss_B
:= - width of the Gusset 2;

Welds
n
welds_A
2 :=

- number of welds in Detail A;
t
eff_weld_A
5 mm := - effective thickness of the welds in Detail A;
l
weld_A_eff
l
gusset_A
:= - effective length of the welds in Detail A;

n
welds_B
4 := - number of welds in Detail B;
t
eff_weld_B
5 mm := - effective thickness of the welds in Detail B;
shear_weld
0.7
all
:=

-allowable stresses of the weld

B. Calculations

B.1 Sizing of the Hanger (2 rounded bars n
hang
2 := )

Solving the equilibrium equation (1), expressed below, the axial force in the hanger is
obtained:
(1)

F
hang
75000 N :=

The necessary area of the rounded bar is then calculated:
A
hang_nec
F
hang
n
hang

all
:=
4
6
10 *
10 * 210 * 2
75000
Pa
N
A
hang_nec
1.786cm
2
=

P a b + ( ) F
hang
a 0 solve F
hang
, 75000 N

40

The resulting diameter of the rounded bar is:
d
hang_nec
4
A
hang_nec
:= 786 . 1 *
4
d
hang_nec
1.508cm =

The diameter of the rounded bar is chosen to be a rounded value of the previously
calculated value:
d
hang_eff
1.6 cm :=

Consequently, the effective area of each rounded bars comprising the hanger is
calculated as:
A
hang_eff
d
hang_eff
2
4
:=
4
6 . 1 *
2
A
hang_eff
2.011cm
2
=

The normal stress existing in the rounded bars comprising the hanger must be
checked:

hang_eff
F
hang
n
hang
A
hang_eff
:=
2 4
10 * 011 . 2 * 2
75000
m
N
hang_eff
1.865 10
8
Pa =
if
hang_eff

all
< "ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =

B.2 Sizing of the bolt located in Detail B

B.2.a Failure in shearing

The bolts capacity in shear is equal to the axial force of the hanger:
P
cap_bolt_shear
F
hang

The capacity of the bolt in shear is calculated considering only one shearing surface,

( n
shear_sect_B
1 := ), located at the contact between the two gusset plates.

P
cap_bolt_shear
n
shear_sect_B
A
shear_bolt_nec

all_shear

From the above equation one can calculate the required area of the bolt:

41

A
shear_bolt_nec
F
hang
n
shear_sect_B

all_shear
( )
:=
4
6
10 *
10 * 126 * 1
75000
Pa
N

A
shear_bolt_nec
5.952cm
2
=

The corresponding diameter is:
d
shear_bolt_B_nec
4
A
shear_bolt_nec
:= 952 . 5 *
4

d
shear_bolt_B_nec
2.753cm =

B.2.b Failure in bearing

The bolts capacity in bearing is equal to the axial force of the hanger:
P
cap_bolt_bear
F
hang

The bearing capacity of the bolt is obtained as:
P
cap_bolt_bear
d
bear_bolt_B_nec
min t
guss1
t
guss2
,
( )

all_bearing

Consequently, the corresponding bolt diameter is:
d
bear_bolt_B_nec
F
hang
min t
guss1
t
guss2
,
( )

all_bearing
( )
:=

4
6 4
10 *
10 * 336 * 10 * 1
75000
Pa
N
d
bear_bolt_B_nec
2.232cm =

B.2.c - The final diameter of the bolt

The final diameter of the bolt is obtained by choosing the maximum value between
the two diameters calculated for the shearing and bearing failure:
d
bolt_B_nec
max d
shear_bolt_B_nec
d
bear_bolt_B_nec
,
( )
:=

d
bolt_B_nec
2.753cm =

42

An effective diameter of the bolt is chosen to be:
d
bolt_B_eff
28 mm :=

B.2.d - Verification of the bolt

The capacities of the bolt in shearing and bearing are:
F
shear_cap_bolt_B
n
shear_sect_B
d
bolt_B_eff
2
4

all_shear
:=

Pa m
6 2 4
2
10 * 126 * 10 *
4
8 . 2 *
* 1

F
shear_cap_bolt_B
7.758 10
4
N =

F
bear_cap_bolt_B
d
bolt_B_eff
min t
guss1
t
guss2
,
( )

all_bearing
:=

Pa m
6 2 4
10 * 336 * 10 * 1 * 8 . 2 F
bear_cap_bolt_B
9.408 10
4
N =

The bolts capacity is:
F
cap_bolt_B
min F
shear_cap_bolt_B
F
bear_cap_bolt_B
,
( )
:=

F
cap_bolt_B
7.758 10
4
N =

The capacity of the bolt is checked:
if F
hang
F
cap_bolt_B
( )
"ok" =

B.3 - Verification of the gusset plates located in Detail B

The area of the gusset plates cross-section (both gussets are similar) is calculated:
A
gusset_B
l
gusset
t
gusset
d
bolt_B_eff
t
gusset
:= 1 * 8 . 2 1 * 10

A
gusset_B
7.2cm
2
=

The normal stress in the gusset plate is obtained:
gusset_B
F
hang
A
gusset_B
:=
2 4
10 * 2 . 7
75000
m
N
gusset_B
1.042 10
8
Pa =

43

Note: The axial force is transmitted through one gusset at the time.
if
gusset_B

all
( )
"ok" =

B.4 Calculation of the length of the welds connecting the hanger bars to the gusset
plates.

There are four (4) fillet welds, n
welds_B
4 := ,

connecting the hanger bars to the
gusset plates. The length of the weld is calculated as:
l
weld_B_nec
F
hang
n
welds_B
t
eff_weld_B

shear_weld
:=

Pa m
N
* 10 * 147 * 10 * 5 . 0 * 4
75000
6 2 2
l
weld_B_nec
2.551cm =

An effective length is chosen by rounding the above obtained value:
l
weld_B_eff
2.6 cm :=

Finally, the verification of the welds is conducted as:
P
cap_weld_B
n
welds_B
t
eff_weld_B
l
weld_B_eff

shear_weld
:=

Pa m * 10 * 147 * 10 * 6 . 2 * 5 . 0 * 4
6 2 4
P
cap_weld_B
7.644 10
4
N =

if P
cap_weld_B
F
hang
"ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =

B.5 Sizing the diameter of the bolt located in Detail A

From the equilibrium equation (2) the vertical reaction at point A is calculated:
P b V
A
a 0 solve V
A
, 25000 N V
A
25000 N := (2)

B.5.a Failure in shearing

The bolts capacity in shear is equal to the vertical reaction at point A:
P
cap_bolt_shear
V
A

44

The capacity of the bolt in shear is calculated considering two shearing surface
( n
shear_sect_A
2 := )

located at the contact between the two gusset plates and the web
of the beam:

P
cap_bolt_shear
n
shear_sect_A
A
shear_bolt_nec

all_shear

From the above equation the required area of the bolt is calculated:
A
shear_bolt_nec
V
A
n
shear_sect_A

all_shear
( )
:=
4
6
10 *
10 * 126 * 2
25000
Pa
N

A
shear_bolt_nec
0.992cm
2
=

The corresponding diameter is:

d
shear_bolt_A_nec
4
A
shear_bolt_nec
:= 992 . 0 *
4

d
shear_bolt_A_nec
1.124cm =

B.5.b Failure in bearing

The bolts capacity in bearing is equal to the axial force of the hanger:
P
cap_bolt_bear
V
A

The bearing capacity of the bolt is obtained as:
P
cap_bolt_bear
d
bear_bolt_A_nec
min 2t
gusset_A
t
web
,
( )

all_bearing

Considering that the gusset plates and webs thicknesses are

t
gusset_A
8 mm :=

andt
web
12 mm := , respectively, the bolts necessary diameter is obtained:

45

d
bear_bolt_A_nec
V
A
min 2t
gusset_A
t
web
,
( )

all_bearing
( )
:=

4
6 4
10 *
10 * 336 * 10 * 2 . 1
25000
Pa
N

d
bear_bolt_A_nec
0.62cm =

B.5.c - The final diameter of the bolt

The final bolt diameter is obtained by choosing the maximum value between the
diameter calculated for the shearing and bearing failure:
d
bolt_A_nec
max d
shear_bolt_A_nec
d
bear_bolt_A_nec
,
( )
:=

d
bolt_A_nec
1.124cm =

Consequently, the effective diameter of the bolt is chosen to be:
d
bolt_A_eff
12 mm :=

B.5.d - Verification of the bolt

The capacities of the bolt in shearing and bearing are:
F
shear_cap_bolt_A
n
shear_sect_A
d
bolt_A_eff
2
4

all_shear
:=

Pa m
6 2 4
2
10 * 126 * 10 *
4
2 . 1 *
* 2

F
shear_cap_bolt_A
2.85 10
4
N =

F
bear_cap_bolt_A
d
bolt_A_eff
min 2t
gusset_A
t
web
,
( )

all_bearing
:=

Pa m
6 2 4
10 * 336 * 10 * 2 . 1 * 2 . 1 F
bear_cap_bolt_A
4.838 10
4
N =

The bolts capacity is:
F
cap_bolt_A
min F
shear_cap_bolt_A
F
bear_cap_bolt_A
,
( )
:=

F
cap_bolt_A
2.85 10
4
N =

46

The verification is checked as:
if V
A
F
cap_bolt_A
( )
"ok" =

B.6 - Verification of the gusset plates located in Detail A

The two (2) gusset plates,

n
gusset_A
2 := , are subjected to single-shear (the entire
cross-section is used) and double-shear (just half of the cross-section) failures by the
reaction force
A
V . The shear stress resulting from single-shear failure is calculated as:

A
gusset_A_s_shear
n
gusset_A
l
gusset_A
t
gusset_A
d
bolt_A_eff
t
gusset_A

( )
:=
) 8 . 0 * 2 . 1 8 . 0 * 10 ( * 2 A
gusset_A_s_shear
14.08cm
2
=

gusset_A_s_shear
V
A
A
gusset_A_s_shear
:=
2 4
10 * 08 . 14
25000
m
N

gusset_A_s_shear
1.776 10
7
Pa =
The shear stress resulting from double-shear failure is obtained as:
A
gusset_A_d_shear
n
gusset_A
2
l
gusset_A
2
t
gusset_A
\
|
.
:= ) 8 . 0 *
2
10
* 2 ( * 2
A
gusset_A_d_shear
16cm
2
=
gusset_A_d_shear
V
A
A
gusset_A_d_shear
:=
2 4
10 * 16
25000
m
N

gusset_A_d_shear
1.563 10
7
Pa =

The maximum shear stress in the gusset plates is:
gusset_A_shear
max
gusset_A_s_shear
gusset_A_d_shear
,
( )
:=
gusset_A_shear
1.776 10
7
Pa =

The stress verification is conducted:
if
gusset_A_shear

all_shear
( )
"ok" =

47

B.7 Verification of the welds in Detail A

There are two welds, n
welds
2 := , connecting the gusset plates to the rigid element.
The welds capacity is calculated:

P
cap_weld_A
n
welds_A
t
eff_weld_A
l
weld_A_eff

shear_weld
:=

Pa m
6 2 4
10 * 147 * 10 * 10 * 5 . 0 * 2 P
cap_weld_A
1.47 10
5
N =

Finally, the welds verification is conducted:
if P
cap_weld_A
V
A
"ok" , "no good" ,
( )
"ok" =

Problem 6.2.6 The system, shown in Figure 6.2.6.a, is comprised from two identical
hangers equally inclined with an angle from the vertical axis OY . The system is
subjected to a vertical load kN P 270 = . The hangers are fabricated from U8 steel
shapes and are lap-spliced as indicated in Details A and B, respectively. Detail A
represents a bolted connection realized in two alternatives from four bolts with a
diameter mm 20 = . The Detail B is a welded connection with the leg thickness of
mm t
weld
5 = .

Figure 6.2.6.a

48

Assuming that the gusset plates have a cross-section of 120mm x 10mm and the
allowable stress of the steel is MPa
all
210 = calculate: (a) the angle , (b) the
length of the welds contained in Detail B, Figure 6.2.6.b, and (c) plot the variation of
the capable load P function of the angle variation.

Figure 6.2.6.b


A.1 General Observations

The truss shown in Figure 6.2.6.a is comprised from two U8 steel shapes. The
equilibrium equations written around point O indicate that the axial force in the two
hangers is equal. Consequently, it can be determined calculating the capacity of the
Detail A. Once determined, the axial force in the hanger is used to size the length of
the welds of Detail B.

A.2 Numerical Data

P 270 kN :=

- acting force;
all
210 MPa :=

- the allowable normal stress for steel ;

U8 Shape

49

t
web
6 mm :=

- web thickness;
A
U
11 cm
2
:=

- area;

Gusset Plates
t
guss
10 mm := - thickness;
l
guss
120 mm :=

- width;

Bolted Connection
n
bolt
4 :=

- number of bolts;
d
b
20 mm :=

- bolt diameter;
all_bearing
1.6
all
:=
all_bearing
336MPa = - bearing allowable stress;

all_shear
0.6
all
:=
all_shear
126MPa = - shear allowable stress;

Weld Connection
n
weld
2 := - number of welds;
t
weld
5 mm :=

- thickness of the weld;
all_weld
0.8
all
:=

all_weld
168MPa =
- shear allowable stress.

B. Calculations

B.1 Equations of equilibrium

Two projection equations of equilibrium written for the isolated point O are:
F
hang_1
sin
( )
F
hang_2
sin
( )
+ 0

- projection on Ox (1)
F
hang_1
cos
( )
F
hang_2
cos
( )
+ P 0
- projection on Oy (2)

From equation (1) results:
F
hang_1
F
hang_2
(3)

50

Using the relation (3) into equation (1) the axial force in the hanger is obtained:
F
hang_1
P
2 cos
( )
(4)

B.2 Calculation of the capacity of the multiple-bolts connection

The capacity of a single bolt in bearing is calculated as:
P
bolt_bear
d
b
min t
web
t
guss
,
( )

all_bearing
:=

Pa m
6 2 4
10 * 336 * 10 * 6 . 0 * 2

P
bolt_bear
4.032 10
4
N =

The shearing capacity of the bolt is determined considering the existence of only one
n
shear
1 := shearing cross-section:

P
bolt_shear
n
shear
d
b
2
4

all_shear
:=

Pa m
6 2 4
2
10 * 126 * 10 *
4
2 *
* 1

P
bolt_shear
3.958 10
4
N =

The capacity of a single bolt is obtained as:
P
cap_bolt
min P
bolt_shear
P
bolt_bear
,
( )
:=

P
cap_bolt
3.958 10
4
N =

The total capacity of the entire group of bolts, n
bolt
4 := , transmitting the axial force
from the U shape into the connecting plate and back is:
P
cap_conn
n
bolt
P
cap_bolt
:= N
4
10 * 958 . 3 * 4 P
cap_conn
1.583 10
5
N =

B.3 Calculation of the U shape capacity

The critical section of the Detail A, marked a a on the Figure 6.2.6, is the cross-
section with two bolt holes. This cross-section transfers the full axial force existing in
the hanger. The corresponding area is:

51

A
min_U
A
U
2 d
b
t
web
:= 6 . 0 * 2 * 2 11 A
min_U
8.6cm
2
=

The U shapes capacity is obtained as:
P
cap_U
A
min_U

all
:=

Pa m
6 2 4
10 * 210 * 10 * 6 . 8 P
cap_U
1.806 10
5
N =

B.4 Calculation of the gusset plates capacity

The gusset plate has two possible critical cross-sections. The capable axial force
characterizing

the cross-section a a (2 bolt holes) is calculated as:
A
guss_a_a
l
guss
t
guss
2 d
b
t
guss
:= 1 * 2 * 2 1 * 12 A
guss_a_a
8cm
2
=

P
cap_guss_a_a
A
guss_a_a

all
:=

Pa m
6 2 4
10 * 210 * 10 * 8

P
cap_guss_a_a
1.68 10
5
N =

Considering the cross-section

b b (one bolt hole) a similar calculation conducts to:

A
guss_b_b
l
guss
t
guss
d
b
t
guss
:= 1 * 2 1 * 12 A
guss_b_b
10cm
2
=

P
cap_guss_b_b
A
guss_b_b

all
:=

Pa m
6 2 4
10 * 210 * 10 * 10

P
cap_guss_b_b
2.1 10
5
N =

The capacity of the gusset plate is obtained:
P
cap_guss
min P
cap_guss_a_a
P
cap_guss_b_b
,
( )
:=

P
cap_guss
1.68 10
5
N =

B.5 - The axial force transmitted by the hanger

F
cap_hang
min P
cap_U
P
cap_conn
, P
cap_guss
,
( )
:=

F
cap_hang
1.583 10
5
N =

The angle is obtained using formula (4):

52

acos
P
2 F
cap_hang
\
|
.
:=
|
|
.
|
\
|
N
N
5
3
10 * 583 . 1 * 2
10 * 270
arccos 31.503deg =

B.5 Sizing the welds of Detail B

The weld must be able to transfer the axial force existing in the hanger and,
consequently, the following equality is written:

P
cap_weld
F
cap_hang

where the weld capacity is expressed as:
P
cap_weld
2 l
weld
t
eff_weld

all_weld

The length of the welds is calculated as:
t
eff_weld
0.707 t
weld
:=

t
eff_weld
3.535mm =

l
weld
F
cap_hang
n
weld
t
eff_weld

all_weld
:=

Pa m
N
6 2 3
5
10 * 168 * 10 * 535 . 3 * 2
10 * 583 . 1

l
weld
13.331cm =

The effective length of the welds is chosen:
l
weld
14 cm :=

B-6 The variation of the angle and force P

A series of twelve values, varying from 0 to 50 degrees, is assumed for the angle
and the corresponding value of the force P is calculated, tabulated and plotted in the
sketch shown below.
i 0 11 .. :=

angle
i
5 i :=

P
i
2 cos
i
( ) F
cap_hang
:=
i
5

180
i :=

53

P
cap
i
270 kN :=

angle
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
=

P
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
316.673
315.468
311.862
305.882
297.575
287.003
274.246
259.403
242.585
223.921
203.553
181.636
kN =

Note: The sketch can be used to verify the numerically obtained result indicating that
the force kN P 270 = corresponds to an angle deg 31 .
0 8.33 16.67 25 33.33 41.67 50
1.5
.
10
5
1.9
.
10
5
2.3
.
10
5
2.7
.
10
5
3.1
.
10
5
3.5
.
10
5
P
P
cap
angle


Problem 6.3.1 Determine the maximum allowable tensile load of the bolted
connection shown in Figure 6.3.1 assuming that all the components are made of steel,

54

the holes correspond to 22 mm diameter bolts and the U30 shape is fastened to a 12
mm thick gusset plate.

Figure 6.3.1

Problem 6.3.2 Two flat bars loaded in tension by forces P are spliced, as shown in
Figure 6.3.2, using two rectangular splice plates and two 13 mm diameter rivets. The
bars, except at the splice where they are wider, are 24 mm x 10 mm and are made of
steel with an ultimate stress in tension of 415 MPa. The ultimate stresses in shear and
bearing for the rivet steel are 207 MPa and 552 MPa, respectively. Calculate the
dimension of the wider section of the connection and then determine the connections
allowable axial load considering that a safety factor of 2.5 is desired with respect to
the ultimate load.

Figure 6.3.2

Problem 6.3.3 Figure 6.3.3 illustrates the bolted connection between a vertical column
and a diagonal brace. The compressive load P carried by the brace is 25 kN. The
connection is built from three 16mm bolts that join together two 8 mm plates and a

55

gusset plate welded to the column. An end plate is welded to the brace. Calculate: (a)
the average shear stress in each bolt and (b) the average bearing stress between the
bolt and the plates.

Figure 6.3.3
Problem 6.3.4 Two bars of rectangular cross-section and thickness t = 8 mm are
connected by a bolt in the manner shown in Figure 6.3.4. The allowable shear and
bearing stresses in the bolt are 83 MPa and 138 MPa, respectively. What is the
minimum required diameter of the bolt assuming a tensile load P = 8 kN? Size the
connecting parts of the connection considering for the material an allowable tensile
stress of 100 MPa.

Figure 6.3.4

56

Problem 6.3.5 A bar with rectangular cross-section is subjected to an axial load P as
shown in Figure 6.3.5. The bar has a width b = 60 mm and thickness t = 10 mm. A
hole of diameter d is drilled through the bar to provide a pin support. The allowable
tensile stress of the bars material is 140 MPa, while the allowable shear stress in the
pin and bar is 80 MPa. Considering a bearing stress of 220 MPa calculate the
necessary diameter of the pin for which the load P will be a maximum.

Figure 6.3.5
Problem 6.3.6 Two bolts are used to connect, as shown in Figure 6.3.6, three
rectangular bars in tension. The thickness of the middle bar is 60 mm. Calculate: (a)
the required diameter of the bolts if the average shear and bearing stresses for the
bolts are 140 MPa and 336 MPA, respectively, (b) size the exterior connecting bars
considering 210 MPa allowable tensile stress for the material and the bolt diameter
previously determined, and (c) verify the middle bar.

Figure 6.3.6

Problem 6.3.7 Three steel plates with 16 mm equal thickness are joined together, as
shown in Figure 6.3.7, by two 13 mm diameter rivets. Calculate: (a) the largest

57

bearing stress acting on the rivets if the tensile load is P = 45 kN, (b) the force P
required to cause the shear failure of the rivets, considering that the ultimate shear
stress for the rivets is 220 MPa and the safety factor is 2.5, (c) the capable axial force
carried by the rivets connection, and (d) size the steel plates considering that the axial
force P is equal to the capable force carried by the rivets.

Figure 6.3.7
Problem 6.3.8 The connection shown in Figure 6.3.8 consists of five steel plates, each
5 mm thick, joined by a single 6 mm diameter bolt. The total load transferred between
the plates is 6000 N and is distributed among the plates as shown in the figure.
Calculate: (a) the largest shear stress in the bolt, disregarding the friction between the
plates, (b) the largest bearing stress acting against the bolt, and (c) size the steel plates
considering for steel an allowable tensile stress of 210 MPa.

Figure 6.3.8

Problem 6.3.9 A contractor constructs a long tension member from two wood boards
with a cross-section of 50x100 mm. The connection is realized, as shown in Figure
6.3.9, employing four 10 mm diameter bolts and two steel splice plates. Calculate: (a)
the axial force carried by the bolted connection if the only possible failure scenario is

58

the shearing failure of the bolts (the allowable shear stress for the bolts of 17.25
MPa), (b) the tensile load P carried by the wood boards if the allowable tensile stress
in the wood is 30 MPa, and (c) size the splice steel plates considering an allowable
tensile steel stress of 180 MPa.

Figure 6.3.9

Problem 6.3.10 Considering a tensile load of P=6.7 kN and the fact that the
contractor uses glue to attach the two steel splice plates to the wood boards instead of
using the bolted connection as described in Problem 6.3.9, what is the value of the
average direct shear stress in the glued joints if the slice plates are 200 mm long?

Problem 6.3.11 An angle bracket having a thickness t = 12 mm is attached to the
flange of a column by two 15 mm diameter bolts, as shown in Figure 6.3.11. A
uniformly distributed load p = 2.0 MPa acts on the top face of the bracket. The top
face of the bracket has a length and width of L = 150 mm and b=60 mm, respectively.
Determine: (a) the average bearing pressure between the angle bracket and the bolts
and (b) the average shear stress the bolts.

59

Figure 6.3.11

Problem 6.3.12 An L150x90x12 steel shape used as a tension member carrying a
tensile load of 300 kN is attached to a gusset plate as shown in Figure 6.3.12.
Calculate: (a) the bolts diameter necessary to carry the load if the shear and bearing
allowable stresses are 126 MPa and 336 MPa, respectively, and (b) verify the
connection members if the tensile allowable stress for steel is 210 MPA, the distance
s=60mm, the angle deg 15 = , and the gusset thickness is 14 mm.

Figure 6.3.12

Problem 6.3.13 Two 13 mm nylon rods are spliced together, as shown in Figure
6.3.14, by gluing a 50 mm section of plastic pipe over the ends of the rods. If a tensile

60

force of P = 3 kN is applied to the spliced nylon rod, what is the average shear stress
occurring in the glue in the joint between the pipe and the rods? Considering that the
allowable tensile stress in the rods and plastic pipe is 20 MPa verify the rods and
calculate the required thickness of the plastic pipe.

Figure 6.3.13

Problem 6.3.14 Determine the size and the length of the necessary fillet weld to
realize the connection on the lap splice show in Figure 6.3.14, by considering first
only the welds A, and secondly, the welds A and B. The allowable shear stress in the
welds is 168 MPa. Verify the steel bars and the gusset plate if the allowable tensile
stress is 210 MPa.

Figure 6.3.14

Problem 6.3.15 The high-wire illustrated in Figure 6.3.15 is attached to a vertical
beam AC and is kept tensioned by the cable BD. At point C, the beam AC is attached
by a 10 mm diameter bolt to the bracket shown in view a-a. Determine the average
shear stress in the bolt at C if the tension in the high-wire is 5 kN, assuming that the
high-wire is horizontal and neglecting the weight of AC. Calculate the area of the

61

cables cross-sections if they are made of steel with an allowable tensile stress of 300
MPA.

Figure 6.3.15

Problem 6.3.16 A hollow box beam ABC, illustrated in Figure 6.3.16, has a length L
and is supported at end A by a 22 mm diameter pin, which passes through the beam
and its supporting pedestals. The roller support at B is located at distance 0.3L from
the end A. Determine: (a) the average shear stress in the pin due to a load P equal to
15 kN and (b) the average bearing stress between the pin and the box beam if the wall
thicknesses of the beam and supporting pedestals are equal to 14 mm.

62

Figure 6.3.16

Problem 6.3.17 A special-purpose hexagonal head bolt of diameter d = 12 mm, shown
in Figure 6.3.17, passes through a hole drilled in a steel plate and bears directly
against the steel plate. The hexagonal head has a radius of the circumscribed circle
equal to r = 10 mm (which means that each side of the hexagon has a length of 10
mm) and the thickness t = 6 mm. Considering that the tensile force P in the bolt is
9kN, determine: (a) the average bearing stress between the hexagonal head of the bolt
and the plate and (b) the average shear stress head of the bolt.

Figure 6.3.17

Problem 6.3.18 The 250x125x10 cm steel plate is hoisted by a cable as illustrated in
Figure 6.3.18. The pins holding the cables are 18 mm in diameter and are located 200
cm apart. Considering for the steel a specific weight of 77 kN/m
3
calculate: (a) the
axial forces in the cables, (b) size the cables considering an allowable tension stress of
300 MPa, (d) the elongation of the cable and the vertical displacement of the steel
plate, (d) the average shear stress in the pins and (e) the average bearing stress
between the steel plate and the pins.

63

Figure 6.3.18

Problem 6.3.19 A reinforcing bar is casted in concrete, as shown in Figure 6.3.19,
with the intent to conduct a pull-out test capacity test. Assuming that the rebar has a
diameter d = 12 mm, an embedment length L = 30 cm and is subjected to a tensile
force P = 17.5 kN determine: (a) the normal stress in the reinforced bar, (b) the
average shear stress, the bond stress, developed between the concrete and the steel if
the uniform distribution is considered and (c) the maximum shear stress if the
following distribution of the shear bond is accepted as
) * 6 * * 9 * 4 ( *
* 4
3 2 3
3
max
x x L L
L
+ =

, where x is measured from the interior end of
the bar towards the concrete surface.

Figure 6.3.19

64

Problem 6.3.20 The system, shown in Figure 6.3.20, comprised of two hangers with
equal circular cross-sections, EC and AF, and a rigid beam AD, is subjected to a
vertical force kN P 50 = .

Figure 6.3.20
Assuming that the length is m l 4 = , all gusset plates ( mm t
guss
8 = ) and the hangers
are fabricated from steel characterized by an allowable normal stress MPa
all
210 =
size the following elements: (a) all hangers, (b) all bolts, (c) all welds, (d) all gusset
plates. Calculate the vertical displacements at points A, C and D ( GPA E
steel
200 = ).
Typical details, AA, BB and CC, for the connections are pictured below.

65

Usage of the following allowable stresses is considered: MPa
bearing bolt all
330
_ _
= ,
MPa
shear bolt all
140
_ _
= and MPa
weld all
100
_
= .

Problem 6.3.21 The system, shown in Figure 6.3.21, comprised of two 30 mm
diameter hangers, AF and CG, and a rigid beam AD, is subjected to two vertical
forces kN P 25 = acting at points B and E, respectively.

Figure 6.3.21
Assuming the following data: the length is m l 2 = , the typical 100x8 mm gusset plates
used and the hangers are fabricated from steel with an allowable normal stress
MPa
all
210 = and MPa
all
120 = , the 28 mm bolts are characterized by
MPa
bearing bolt all
330
_ _
= and MPa
shear bolt all
140
_ _
= ., and the typical 3mm weld
has MPa
weld all
100
_
= , determine: (a) the force P carried by the system, (b) the
length of the welds and (c) the vertical displacements at points A, B, C and E
( GPA E
steel
200 = ). Typical details, AA, BB and CC, for the connections are pictured
below.

66

Problem 6.3.22 A tied-down of a fiberglass sailboat is shown in Figure 6.3.22. The
bend bar with diameter 10mm is attached to a 12mm thick fiberglass board using a
washer with a diameter of 22mm.

Figure 6.3.22

Calculate the maximum force P allowed in the cable considering the following
material data: the allowable shear stresses in the fiberglass board is 4MPa, the bend
bar is made of steel with an allowable tensile stress of 180MPa, and the allowable
bearing stress between the washer and the fiberglass is 20 MPA.

67

CHAPTER 7 Bending of Plane Linear
Beams Stress Distribution


The problems comprised in this chapter are exclusively concerned with the
investigation of the stress distribution on the cross-section of the plane linear beam
subjected to bending. By definition, bending is a deformation induced into a plane
linear beam by transversal acting loads.

A number of important assumptions are made:
(a) the beam has a constant cross-section along its entire length;
(b) the material is isotropic along the entire length of the beam;
(c) the cross-section is characterized by an axis of symmetry;
(d) the transversal loads are acting in the plane of symmetry;
(e) the cross-sections remain plane and perpendicular to the deflection curve after
the deformation (the Bernoulli-Euler hypothesis).

Note: These assumptions are restricting somehow the generality of the theoretical
frame, but the majority of the beams encountered in the structural engineering practice
are complying with these limitations. The above mentioned assumptions must be
always verified in order to validate the calculation results.

Consider a local coordinate system Oxyz attached to the left end point of the beam and
the axis Oy as the symmetry axis of the cross-section. The transversal loads, acting on
the vertical plan of symmetry Oxy induce onto the cross-section of the beam, located at
distance x from the origin of the coordinate system, only two cross-sectional resultants:
the vertical shear force V
y
(x) and the bending moment M
z
(x). The bending moment
M
z
(x) and the shear force V
y
(x) conduct to the existence on the cross-section of two
type of stresses: the normal stress
x
and the shear stress
xy.
In general both cross-
sectional resultants, V
y
(x) and M
z
(x), are simultaneous present on the cross-section. The

68

cross-sectional resultants are related to the stresses through the following integral
relations:
dA y x x V
A
xy y
* ) , ( ) (

= (7.1)
dA y x x M
A
x z
* ) , ( ) (

= (7.2)

They are not independent functions and are interrelated through the differential relation
expressed in Chapter 3 of the volume I. The cross-section is then subjected to non-
uniform bending. If the shear force V
y
(x) is absent from the cross-section (V
y
(x)=0),
then, the bending moment is constant (M
z
(x)=constant) and the cross-section is
subjected to pure bending.

Due to the symmetry against the vertical plane Oxy imposed on the beam and the
existence of only transversally acting loads, the beam deflects only in the vertical plane
Oxy with some of its longitudinal fibers shortening and others lengthening.
Consequently, there are a number of fibers which conserve their length. These fibers
constitute the neutral plane and its intersection with the plane of symmetry Oxy defines
the deflection curve.

A complete theoretical discussion of the phenomena induced by bending is found in
the Chapter 7 of the textbook entitled Lectures in Mechanics of Materials, volume I. In
this chapter only the practical aspect of the application of the formulae related to the
normal stress
x
and the shear stress
xy
distributions on the cross-section of linear
planar beams is discussed.

7.1.1 Pure Bending

As discussed above, for the case of pure bending remains only one nonzero cross-
sectional resultant, the bending moment M
z
(x). Consequently, the cross-section is
subjected only to a normal stress
x.

69

7.1.1.a Distribution of the Normal Stress (the Naviers formula)

If the local coordinate system Oxyz is coincidental with the centroidal coordinate
system Cxyz, the normal stress
x
in a point P(y,z) located on the cross-section x of a
linear planar beam is calculated using the most famous formula universally known as
the Naviers formula:
y
I
x M
y x
z
z
x
*
) (
) , (
'
= (7.3)

where M
z
(x) is the bending moment pertinent to cross-section x;

z
I is the moment of inertia against the centroidal axis Cz of the cross-section x;
y is the coordinate of the point of calculation measured on the centroidal axis
Cy of the cross-section x.

Note: Equation (7.3), the Naviers formula, indicates that the normal stress
x
is a
function of only two independent variables, x and y, varies linearly on variable y and is
independent of the variable z.

By definition the neutral axis of the cross-section is the axis where the normal stress
x

is zero.

Note: In the case of pure bending, the neutral axis passes through the centroid of the
cross-section and it is parallel to Cz axis.

The linearity of the normal stress
x
function on variable y required two values for the
distribution on the cross-section to be identified. Those values are, for practical
reasons, the maximum normal stresses in tension and compression,
max sup_ _ x
and
max inf_ _ x
, which are obtained at the extreme locations positioned from the centroid C.
The ratio obtained by dividing the moment of inertia
z
I by the distance y measured
from the centroid C of the cross-section to the extreme fiber is called section modulus.
The variation of the normal stress for positive and negative bending moments is
illustrated in Figure 7.1.1.

70

Figure 7.1.1 Normal Stress Distributions

If the cross-section has only one axis of symmetry two section moduli can be
defined:
) (
) (
) (
inf
inf
'
x y
x I
x W
z
= (7.4)
sup
sup
) (
) (
'
y
x I
x W
z
= (7.5)

For a bending moment assumed positive, 0 ) ( x M
z
, as illustrated in Figure 7.1.1.a, the
maximum tensile and compressive stresses are obtained as:
0
) (
) (
) (
sup
max sup_ _
< =
x W
x M
x
z
x
compression (7.6)
0
)) (
) (
) (
inf
max inf_ _
> =
x W
x M
x
z
x
tension (7.7)

For a bending moment assumed negative, 0 ) ( x M
z
, the maximum stresses are as
shown in Figure 7.1.1.b:
0
) (
) (
) (
max sup_ _
> =
x W
x M
x
bottom
z
x
tension (7.8)
0
) (
) (
) (
max inf_ _
< =
x W
x M
x
top
z
x
compression (7.9)

If the cross-section has two axes of symmetry the section moduli are equal and,
consequently, the magnitudes of the maximum normal stresses are equal. The

71

compressive and tensile areas corresponding to positive and negative bending
moments remain as discussed above and pictured in Figure 7.1.1.

7.1.2 Nonuniform Bending

As discussed above, for the case of nonuniform bending the cross-section is
characterized by the existence of both cross-sectional resultants, the bending moment
M
z
(x) and the shear force V
y
(x). Consequently, the cross-section is subjected to normal
and shear stresses,
x
and
xy
, respectively.

7.1.2.a Distribution of the Normal Stress (the Naviers formula)

The finding that during nonuniform bending the cross-sections of the beam does not
remain plane after the deformation contradicts the basic kinematic assumption (e) of
pure bending. However, detailed investigation using advanced methods of the Theory
of Elasticity indicate that the warping of the cross-section due to the shear stress is
insignificant and does not affect the longitudinal strain when the ratio of the cross-
sections height to the length of the beam is small. This is the case for most ordinary
structural members.

To extend the usage of the distribution of the normal stress
) , ( y x
x
derived for the

case of pure bending, formula 7.3, in the case of a beam subjected to nonuniform
bending, a supplementary assumption must be made: the distribution of the normal
stress
) , ( y x
x
in a given cross-section is independent of the shear stress induced

deformation. As a direct consequence of imposing the above stated assumption, the
pure bending strain-displacement relation remains valid and the influence of the
angular deformations on the longitudinal strain is neglected and the Naviers formula
can be also used for the case of nonuniform bending.

7.1.2.b Distribution of the Shear Stress (the Jurawskis formula)

The distribution of the shear stress is obtained from equilibrium considerations. The
procedure is applied first to a beam characterized by a rectangular cross-section and

72

later extended to the general case of beams with the cross-section composed from a
multitude of rectangular shapes.

7.1.2.b.1 Rectangular Cross-Section

Figure 7.1.2 illustrates the procedure for the case of the singular rectangular cross-
section with height h and width b.

Figure 7.1.2 Stress Resultants and Stresses
(a) Cross-section Resultants, (b) Stresses and (c) Free-body Diagram

The main steps are:

1. An infinitesimal volume of length dx is obtained by sectioning the beam at cross-
sections x and x+dx with vertical planes parallel to the centroidal plane Cyz. The
equilibrium condition of the infinitesimal obtained volume is pictured in Figure
7.1.2.a, where the cross-sectional resultants M
z
(x) and V
y
(x) and M
z
(x+dx) and
V
y
(x+dx) pertinent to x and x+dx cross-sections are indicated. The distribution of the
normal stress
) , ( y x
x
on both cross-sections is illustrated in Figure 7.1.2.b;

2. A second cut is made this time with a horizontal plane parallel to the centroidal
horizontal plane Cxz and passing through the point P(y,z) where the shear stress is
sought. Two infinitesimal volumes are obtained. The upper infinitesimal volume is
pictured in Figure 7.1.2.c together with the forces realizing the equilibrium. The two
horizontal forces
x
F and
x x
F
+
, generated by the existence of the normal stress
) , ( y x
x
on the remaining vertical areas

'
A initially belonging to the cross-sections x
and x+x, must be in equilibrium with the longitudinal force H acting on the newly

73

created horizontal section ab characterized by a length dx and width b.. The horizontal
force H represents the resultant force of the longitudinal shear stresses ) , , ( z y x
yx
.

3. The equilibrium equation for the newly created body is:
x x x
F F H =
+
(7.10)

After algebraic manipulations in-detail explained in the textbook one obtains:
) ( *
'
y S
I
M
H
A
z
z
z
= (7.11)

where ) (
'
y S
A
z
and
z
I are the static moment of the section
'
A and the moment of inertia
of the entire cross-section with respect to the neutral axis, respectively. The distance y
is measured from the centroid of the cross-section to the horizontal cut ab.

The increase of the bending moment from ) ( x M
z
to ) ( x x M
z
+ is expressed as:
x x V x M x x M M
y z z z
= + = * ) ( ) ( ) ( (7.12)

and can be positive or negative function of the shear forces ) ( x V
y
sign.

The shear flow ) , ( y x q represents the shear force per unit length and is found by
taking the limit of the expression (7.11):
z
A
z y
x
I
y S x V
x
H
y x q
) ( * ) (
lim ) , (
'
0
=
=

(7.13)

In the absence of the shear stress distribution on the cut cross-section, the average
shear stress ) , (
_
y x
avr yx
is used:
b I
y S x V
b x
H
y x
z
A
z y
x avr yx
*
) ( * ) (
*
lim ) , (
'
0 _
=
=

(7.14)

Note: It has to be emphasized that the real distribution of the shear stress is not known
and it is approximated by an average shear stress uniformly distributed across the

74

horizontal section ab. For the approximation to approach the real distribution, the
width of the rectangular cross-section b must be narrow. This finding is reinforced by
other theoretical investigations.

4. Due to the shear stress duality principle:
) , , ( ) , , ( z y x z y x
xy yx
= (7.14)

it results that the average shear stress in point P(y,z) is obtained:
t I
y S x V
y x y x
z
A
z y
avr yx avr xy
*
) ( * ) (
) , ( ) , (
'
_ _
= = (7.15)

This formula is known in the technical literature as Jurawskis formula. After algebraic
manipulations the distribution of the average shear stress ) , (
_
y x
avr xy
on the
rectangular cross-section is calculated:
]
* 4
1 [ *
* 2
) ( * 3
) , (
2
2
_
h
y
A
x V
y x
y
avr xy
= (7.16)

where A is the area of the entire cross-section. The distribution of the shear stress on
the cross-section is illustrated in Figure 7.1.3.b.

Figure 7.1.3 Shear Stress Distribution for a Rectangular Cross-Section

75

Note: (a) On a particular cross-section (x=constant) the shear stress is mathematically
represented by a second order parabola depending only on the variable y. The extreme
values, zero and maximum, are attended on the contour and at the neutral axis,
respectively. The maximum shear stress is:
A
x V
y x
y
avr xy
) (
* 5 . 1 ) 0 , (
max
_
= = (7.17)

(b) The direction of the shear flow and average shear stress are coincidental to that of
the shear force V
y
(x) direction pertinent to the cross-section investigated. The value of
the shear force and its direction are obtained from the shear force diagram.

7.1.2.b.2 Thin-Wall Cross-Sections

The majority of beams used in steel structures are classified as beams with thin-wall
cross-sections. The thin-wall cross-section is categorized in (a) open and (b) closed
cross-sections as illustrated in Figures 7.1.4.a and 7.1.4.b, respectively.

Figure 7.1.4 Thin-Wall Cross-Sections

The reduced thickness of the wall of the cross-section facilitates the introduction of
two important assumptions:
(a) the shear flow is always tangent to the local centerline of the cross-section;
(b) the shear stress is constant in the thickness of the cross-section.

These two assumptions mimic the situation described in the case of the rectangular
cross-section.

The shear flow ) , ( s x q and the shear stress ) , ( s x characteristic to a thin-wall cross-
section are shown in Figure 7.1.5

76

Figure 7.1.5 Shear Flow and Shear Stress in Thin-Wall Cross-Section
(a) Shear Flow and (b) Shear Stress

They are related through the following formula:

) , (
) , (
) , (
s x t
s x q
s x = (7.18)

7.1.2.b.2.a Open Thin-Wall Cross Section

To obtain the shear stress distribution for a cross-section composed from multiple
rectangular narrow shapes, the case in point for the majority of beams employed in
the structural analysis, the above explained procedure is entirely followed. The
complexity of the procedure is increased due to the fact that the second cut can be
either horizontally orientated parallel to the plane Cxz or vertically orientated parallel
to the plane Cxy, function of the positioning of the rectangular shape in the general
arrangement of the cross-section. It has to be emphasized that the shape of the cut is
always a rectangular shape.. This situation indicates that on the composed cross-
section concomitantly appear ) , , ( z y x
xy
and ) , , ( z y x
xz
shear stresses. Their values
are also calculated employing Jurawskis formula (7.15) where the area
'
A and the
width of the cut t, replacing the dimension b previously used in formula (7.14), vary
function of the employed cuts location and direction (vertical or horizontal). The static
moment ) (
'
y S
A
z
is calculated:
'
0
'
* ) (
'
y A y S
A
z
= (7.19)

where
'
0
y is the distance from the centroid of the area
'
A to the neutral axis of the
cross-section.

77

It has to be emphasized that the area
'
A is the area obtained from sectioning the entire
cross-section above or below the cut for the case of a horizontal cut or to the left or the
right of the cut in the case of a vertical cut. The maximum shear stress is obtained
when the static moment ) (
'
y S
A
z
reaches its maximum value. This is the case when the
horizontal cut coincides with the neutral axis Cz.

Due to the imposed restriction on the width t of the rectangular shape where the cut is
made to be narrow, the only significant cut direction is that parallel to the width of the
rectangular shape considered. Examples of horizontal and vertical cuts are shown in
Figure 7.1.6: a, a, b, b, f , f, g and g are vertical cuts, while c, d and e are horizontal
cuts. A
1
, A
2
, A
3
and A
4
are the compounding shapes of the cross-section.

Figure 7.1.6 Example of Cuts

Taking a broad view, if the rectangular shape investigated is located with its length
vertically, parallel to Cy axis, the significant cut is horizontal, parallel to Cz axis (the
neutral axis). The shear flow ) , ( y x q and the corresponding shear stress ) , , ( z y x
xy

are both orientated parallel to the Cy axis and are characterized by second-order
parabolic variations relatively to variable y. If the rectangular shape investigated is
located with its length horizontally, parallel to Cz axis, the significant cut is vertical,
parallel to Cy axis (the symmetry axis). The shear flow ) , ( y x q and the shear stress
) , , ( z y x
xz
are both orientated parallel to the Cz axis and are characterized by linear
variations relatively to variable y.

78

The value and orientation of the flow ) , ( y x q and shear stresses, ) , , ( z y x
xy
or
) , , ( z y x
xz
, are established and only their senses remain to be decided. The correct
sense of the shear stresses is judged following the mathematical rational explained
below function of the sign of the bending moment M
z
(x) and shear force V
y
(x) acting
on the particular cross-section x. Consequently, the cross-sectional resultants M
z
(x) and
V
y
(x) pertinent to the investigated cross-section x are extracted from the diagrams and
plotted on the cross-section with the positive normal x>0. The mathematical rational is
accompanied by graphical representations, the Figures 7.1.7 through 7.1.10. For
generality and clarity, in those figures representing the general case of a composed
cross-section assembled from rectangular shapes, only the last rectangular shape of the
area
'
A , through where the cut is made, is illustrated. The following cases are
analyzed:

(1) if 0 ) ( > x M
z
and 0 ) ( > x V
y
(see Figure 7.1.7)

0 * ) ( > = x x V M
y z

0 ) ( ) ( > + = +
z z z
M x M x x M
) ( ) ( x M x x M
z z
> +
x x x
F F >
+

for A located above the neutral axis (NA) and left to Cy axis (symmetry axis)

0 >
x
F (compression and parallel to x>0)
0 <
+ x x
F (compression and parallel to x<0)

It results that:

0 > H (parallel to x>0)
0 > q (parallel to x>0)
0
_
>
avr zx
0
_
<
avr xz
(parallel to z<0) - vertical cut (Figure 7.1.7.a)
0
_
>
avr yx
0
_
<
avr xy
(parallel to y<0) - horizontal cut (Figure 7.1.7.b)

79

Figure 7.1.7 M
z
(x)>0 and V
y
(x)>0

for A located below the neutral axis (NA) and left to Cy axis (symmetry axis)

0 <
x
F (tension and parallel to x<0)
0 >
+ x x
F (tension and parallel to x>0)

It results that:

0 < H (parallel to x<0)
0 < q (parallel to x<0)
0
_
<
avr zx
0
_
>
avr xz
(parallel to z>0) - vertical cut (Figure 7.1.7c)

80

0
_
<
avr yx
0
_
<
avr xy
(parallel to y<0) - horizontal cut (Figure 7.1.7.d)

(2) if 0 ) ( > x M
z
and 0 ) ( < x V
y
(see Figure 7.1.8)

0 * ) ( < = x x V M
y z

z z z
M x M x x M + = + ) ( ) (
) ( ) ( x M x x M
z z
< +
x x x
F F <
+


0 >
x
0 <
+ x x

It results that:

0
_
<
avr zx
0
_
>
avr xz
(parallel to z>0) - vertical cut (Figure 7.1.8.a)
0
_
<
avr yx
0
_
>
avr xy
(parallel to y>0) - horizontal cut (Figure 7.1.8.b)


0 <
x
0 >
+ x x

It results that:


81

0
_
>
avr zx
0
_
<
avr xz
(parallel to z<0) - vertical cut (Figure 7.1.8.c)
0
_
>
avr yx
0
_
>
avr xy
(parallel to y>0) - horizontal cut (Figure 7.1.8.d)

Figure 7.1.8 M
z
(x)>0 and V
y
(x)<0

(3) if 0 ) ( < x M
z
and 0 ) ( > x V
y
(see Figure 7.1.9)

0 * ) ( < = x x V M
y z

z z z
M x M x x M + = + ) ( ) (
) ( ) ( x M x x M
z z
< +
x x x
F F <
+

82


0 <
x
0 >
+ x x

It results that:

0
_
>
avr zx
0
_
<
avr xz
(parallel to z<0) - vertical cut (Figure 7.1.9.a)
0
_
>
avr yx
0
_
<
avr xy
(parallel to y<0) - horizontal cut (Figure 7.1.9.b)

Figure 7.1.9 M
z
(x)<0 and V
y
(x)>0

83


0 >
x
0 <
+ x x

It results that:

0
_
<
avr zx
0
_
>
avr xz
(parallel to z>0) - vertical cut (Figure 7.1.9.c)
0
_
<
avr yx
0
_
<
avr xy
(parallel to y<0) - horizontal cut (Figure 7.1.9.d)

(4) if 0 ) ( < x M
z
and 0 ) ( < x V
y
(see Figure 7.1.10)

0 * ) ( < = x x V M
y z

0 ) ( ) ( < + = +
z z z
M x M x x M
) ( ) ( x M x x M
z z
> +
x x x
F F >
+


0 <
x
0 >
+ x x

It results that:

0
_
<
avr zx
0
_
>
avr xz
(parallel to z>0) - vertical cut (Figure 7.1.10.a)
0
_
<
avr yx
0
_
>
avr xy
(parallel to y>0) - horizontal cut (Figure 7.1.10.b)

84


0 >
x
0 <
+ x x

It results that:

0
_
>
avr zx
0
_
<
avr xz
(parallel to z<0) - vertical cut (Figure 7.1.10.c)
0
_
>
avr yx
0
_
>
avr xy
(parallel to y>0) - horizontal cut (Figure 7.1.10.d)

Figure 7.1.10 M
z
(x)<0 and V
y
(x)<0

85

7.1.2.b.2.b Closed Thin-Wall Cross-Section

The most commonly used closed thin-wall cross-sections are the box and tubular cross-
sections. The analysis of the distribution of shear stress for a closed thin-wall cross-
section is conducted in a similar manner with the theoretical development employed
for open cross-sections. A thin slice of length x is isolated from the body of the
closed thin-wall beam. As illustrated in Figure 7.1.11 the beam has the longitudinal
vertical plane as a plane of symmetry. The shear flow shown in Figure 7.1.11 must be
directed in such a manner that the resultant is equal to the vertical shear force acting on
the cross-section.

Figure 7.1.11 Closed Thin-Wall Cross-Section

The main problem arising in the evaluation of shear stress of the closed thin-wall
members is how to position the second cutting plane. If the vertical cutting plane
passing through the axis of symmetry Cy is used, the beam is separated in two
symmetric halves. The shear flow q is tangent to the centerline of the cross-section.
Thus, for example, in Figure 7.1.11.c it is obviously that the shear flow is horizontal at
ends a andb . The shear flow must be zero in the plane of symmetry and as a
consequence of the duality principle the shear flow in the cross-section at these
locations is also zero. Since the shear flow is zero at the cross-section points
intersecting the axis of symmetryCy , the general distribution is obtained by using
cutting planes symmetrical to this axis and writing the horizontal equilibrium for the
beam segment contained between these planes.

86

7.1.3 Strength Condition

7.1.3.a Material with Different Tension and Compression Allowable Normal Stresses

if the maximum absolute bending moment is positive 0 M
max
z
>
then
0
max sup_ _
<
x
(compression)
0
max inf_ _
>
x
(tension)

and the strength conditions are:
comp all x _ max sup_ _
(7.20)

tens all x _ max inf_ _
(7.21).

all xy

max _
(7.22)
where
comp all _
,
tens all _
and
all
are the allowable normal stress in compression, in
tension and shear, respectively.

if the maximum absolute bending moment is negative 0 M
max
z
<
then
0
max sup_ _
>
x
(tension)
0
max inf_ _
<
x
(compression)

and the strength conditions are:
tens all x _ max sup_ _
(7.23)
comp all x _ max inf_ _
(7.24)
all xy

max _
(7.25)

7.1.3.b Material with Equal Tension and Compression Allowable Normal Stresses

0
max sup_ _
<
x
(compression)

87

0
max inf_ _
>
x
(tension)
and the strength condition is:
all x x
) , max(
max inf_ _ max sup_ _
(7.26)
all xy

max _
(7.27)

where
all
is the allowable normal stress.

7.1.4 Built-Up Beam Connectors

The beams made from continuous material without any interruptions are called
homogeneous cross-sections. In general, the industrial steel buildings are subjected to
heavy loads and the most commonly used cross-sections, such as the wide-flange and
closed thin-wall, are fabricated from parts joined together by connectors. These types
of beams are called build-up members. Glue (adhesives) and nails are connectors
proper to be used in the wood built-up members, while welds, rivets and bolts are
commonly used for the steel built-up members. Examples of build-up members are

Figure 7.1.12 Built-Up Beams
(a) Glued Wood Beam, (b) Box Wood Beam, (c) Welded Steel Beam and
(d) Reinforced Steel Beam

The shear flow induced by nonuniform bending must be transferred in-between the
adjoining parts comprising the beams cross-section. This shear transfer is realized in
three ways: (a) by shear distributed over the interface areas, (b) by shear distributed
along a connector line and (c) by discrete shear connectors. The shear transfer type (a)
is common for the laminated wood beams composed of multiple pieces as shown in

88

Figure 7.1.12.a. The linear transfer, type (b), is proper to the welded beams as pictured
in Figure 7.1.12.c, while the discrete type shear transfer, shown in Figures 7.1.12.b and
7.1.12.d, are pertinent to bolt or nail connectors. There are special cases where welds
are discontinuously applied, referred to as stitch welds.

The shear flow determined using equation (7.13) is employed to calculate the required
shear flow
rec
q , which represents the shear force per unit length that is transferred from
one part of the cross-section to the adjacent part under the given loading condition.
The required shear is calculated as:

z
y
z
A
z y
rec
I
y A V
I
S V
q
'* * *
max _ max _
= = (7.28)

where ' A is the area of the connected part,
max _ y
V is the maximum shear force acting
on the beam and y is the distance measured from the neutral axis to the centroid of the
connected part.

7.1.4.a Linear Shear Connectors

The required shear flow calculated with equation (7.28) determines the actual
necessary force per unit length which must be transmitted by the welded connection.
The shear capacity of the weld
weld
q must be larger than the required shear flow:

weld req
q q (7.29)

The weld capacity is calculated as:

weld all welds weld
eff t n q
_
* . * = (7.30)

where
welds
n ,
ff
e t. and
weld all _
are the number of the welds connecting the part, the
effective thickness of the weld and the allowable shear stress of the weld material,
respectively. The allowable shear stress of the weld material is determined from
laboratory test data.

89

7.1.4.b Discrete Shear Connectors

The discrete connectors have a shear capacity
connector
Q , also established by laboratory
testing, and are assumed to be spaced at a equal distance s . For the discrete
connector to transfer the shear the following relation must be maintained:

connector req
Q s q * (7.31)

Equation (7.31) is applied in different zones of the beams, considering in the
calculation the maximum value of the vertical shear force in the particular zone. This
way, the distance between the connectors may be increased or decreased within the
various zones of the beam in accordance with the total shear flow requirement for the
zone.


Problem 7.2.1 The cantilever beam, shown in Figure 7.2.1, is subjected to a
concentrated moment m kN M = 20
0
acting at the free end. The cross-section has a
square shape with an edge length d = 120 mm and length L = 5 m. Calculate: (a) the
cross-sectional resultants diagrams and (b) the strain and stress distribution.

Figure 7.2.1

90

A.1 The cantilever is subjected to pure bending conditions and, consequently, the
Naviers Formula (7.3) is applied.

A.2 Numerical Application

M
0
20 kN m := - the bending moment
L 5 m :=

- cantilever length
d 120 mm :=

- edge length
E 200 GPa :=

- modulus of elasticity

B. Calculations

B.1 Reactions Calculation (see Figure 7.2.1.a)

The reactions,
A
V and
A
M , are obtained using the following two equilibrium
equations:
=
A
M 0

M
A
M
0
0

=
B
M 0

V
A
L M
A
+ M
0
0

Figure 7.2.1.a
Solving the above equilibrium equations the reactions are obtained as:
M
A
M
0
:=

91

V
A
0 kN :=

B.2 Calculation of the Cross-Sectional Resultants (see Figure 7.2.1.a)

The cross-sectional resultants, the shear force ) ( x V
y
and bending moment ) ( x M
z
,
acting on a particular cross-section located at distance x from end A, representing the
origin of the coordinate system, are:
V
y
x ( ) 0
M
z
x ( ) M
0
M
z
2 10
4
N m =

The moment diagram, the only diagram different than zero, is illustrated in Figure
7.2.1.a

B.3 The Stress and Strain Distributions (see Figure 7.2.1.b)

The stress distribution is obtained using the Naviers Formula (7.3). The distribution of
the normal stress identical on all cross-sections is linear and, consequently, only the
values at the extreme points,
2
sup
d
y y = =

or
2
inf
d
y y = = ,

are necessary to be
calculated. The maximum normal stresses

max sup_ _ x

and

max inf_ _ x

are obtained as:
y
sup
d
2
:= y
sup
6cm =

y
inf
d
2
:= y
inf
6 cm =
x_sup_max
M
0
I
zc
y
sup
:=

m
m
m N
2
4 8
3
10 * 6 *
10 * 1728
* 10 * 20

x_sup_max
6.944 10
7
Pa =

x_inf_max
M
0
I
zc
y
inf
:=

m
m
m N
) 10 * 6 ( *
10 * 1728
* 10 * 20
2
4 8
3

x_inf_max
6.944 10
7
Pa =

92

Figure 7.2.1.b

Note: (a) It is obvious that the maximum normal stresses,

max sup_ _ x

and

max inf_ _ x
,
illustrated in Figure 7.2.1.b, are

equal in absolute value due to the fact that they
are located at equal distance from the cross-sections centroid. It can be
concluded that when the cross-section is also symmetrical against the Zc axis
only one value is necessary to be calculated;

(b) the area above and below the neutral axis CZc are in compression and
tension, respectively.

The linear strain distribution, shown in Figure 7.2.1.b, is calculated as:
x_sup_max

x_sup_max
E
:=
Pa
Pa
9
7
10 * 200
10 * 944 . 6
x_sup_max
3.472 10
4
=

x_inf_max

x_inf_max
E
:=
Pa
Pa
9
7
10 * 200
10 * 944 . 6
x_inf_max
3.472 10
4
=

Problem 7.2.2 The aluminum part with a cross-section as illustrated in Figure 7.2.2 is
subjected to pure bending. Conduct the following tasks: (a) calculate the maximum
bending moment
cap
M applied to the member if the allowable flexural stresses in
tension and compression are
all_tens
= 200 MPa and
all_compr
= 100 MPa, respectively,
and (b) draw the flexural stress and strain distributions on the cross-section
corresponding to the bending moment determined at point (a).

93

Figure 7.2.2


A.1 The cross-section is subjected to pure bending, but a special attention should be
given to the fact that the material has different normal allowable stresses for tension
and compression.


material data
all_tens
200 MPa :=

- allowable normal tensile stress
all_compr
100 MPa := - allowable compressive stress
E 200 GPa :=


cross-sectional dimensions
h
w
80 mm := - web height
t
w
20 mm := - web thickness
b
f
160 mm := - flange width
t
f
20 mm := - flange thickness

94

a
w
80 mm := - interior distance between webs

B. Calculations

B.1 Calculation of Cross-section Geometrical Characteristics (see Figure 7.2.2.a)

Figure 7.2.2.a

Note: All dimensions shown on Figure 7.2.2.a are in cm.

The cross-section is considered composed from three individual shapes: two webs and
a flange. The areas of the webs, flange and the total area of the cross-section are
calculated as:
A
w
t
w
h
w
:= 8 * 2 A
w
16cm
2
=

- the web area
A
f
t
f
b
f
:= 16 * 2 A
f
32cm
2
=

- the flange area
A
total
2 A
w
A
f
+ := + 32 16 * 2 A
total
64cm
2
=

The centroid C is located on the axis of symmetry and consequently, only the vertical
position of it is necessary to be calculated. The initial coordinate system OYZ is
considered located at the level of the centroid of the webs. The vertical position

C
y of
the cross-sectional centroid is obtained:

95

y
C
2 A
w
y
C_w
A
f
y
C_f
+
A
total
:=
+
64
) 5 ( * 32 0 * 16 * 2
y
C
2.5 cm =
where
y
C_w
0 cm :=

- distance from O to the web centroid
y
C_f
h
w
2
t
f
2
+
|
\
|
.
:=
|
.
|
\
|
+
2
2
2
8
y
C_f
5 cm = - distance from O to the flange
centroid

The moment of inertia of the entire cross-section against the CZ
c
axis
zC
I is obtained:
I
zc
2
t
w
h
w
3
12
A
w
y
C_w
2
+
|
\
|
.
b
f
t
f
3
12
A
f
y
C_f
2
+
|
\
|
.
+ :=
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ +
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
2
3
2
3
) 5 . 2 ( * 32
12
2 * 16
5 . 2 * 16
12
8 * 2
* 2 I
zc
581.333cm
4
=

where:
y
C_w
y
C_w
y
C
:= ) 5 . 2 ( 0 y
C_w
2.5cm = - distance from C to the web
centroid
y
C_f
y
C_f
y
C
:=
) 5 . 2 ( 5
y
C_f
2.5 cm =
- distance from C to the flange
centroid

The section modulus W is calculated as follows:
W min W
sup
W
inf
,
( )
:=

where:
W
sup
I
zc
y
sup
:=
3
5 . 6
333 . 581
cm W
sup
89.436cm
3
=

- for the superior fiber
y
sup
y
C_w
h
w
2
+ := +
2
8
5 . 2 y
sup
6.5cm =

W
inf
I
zc
y
inf
:=
3
5 . 6
333 . 581
cm W
inf
166.095cm
3
=

- for the inferior fiber

96

y
inf
y
C_f
t
f
2
:=
2
2
5 . 2 y
inf
3.5 cm =
W min W
sup
W
inf
,
( )
:= ) 095 . 166 , 436 . 89 min( W 89.436cm
3
=

B.2 Calculation of the Capable Bending Moment

Due to the fact that the material considered is characterized by different allowable
normal stress in tension and compression the calculation has to identify the maximum
tensile and compressive normal stress existing on the cross-section. The bending
moment M, indicated in Figure 7.2.2, is negative and consequently, the area located
above the neutral axis (CZ
c
axis) is in tension, while the area located below is in
compression.

The verification formulae are:
x_sup
M
0
I
zc
y
sup
M
0
W
sup

all_tens
-for normal tensile stress area
x_inf
M
0
I
zc
y
inf
M
0
W
inf

all_compr

-for normal compressive stress area

The unknown values of the corresponding bending moments are at limite:
M
0_sup
W
sup

all_tens

Pa m
6 3 6
10 * 200 * 10 * 436 . 89

M
0_sup
1.789 10
4
N m =
M
0_inf
W
inf

all_compr
:=

Pa m
6 3 6
10 * 100 * 10 * 095 . 166

M
0_inf
1.661 10
4
N m =

The capable bending moment
cap O
M
_
characterizing the entire cross-section is:
M
0_cap
min M
0_sup
M
0_inf
,
( )
:= M
0_cap
1.661 10
4
N m =

B.3 Normal Stress and Strain Diagrams (see Figure 7.2.2.a)

97

The linear distribution of the normal stress on the cross-section corresponding to the
capable bending moment
cap O
M
_
is obtained:
x_sup
M
0_cap
I
zc
y
sup
:=
m
m N
2
8
4
10 * 5 . 6 *
10 * 333 . 581
* 10 * 661 . 1

x_sup
1.857 10
8
Pa =
x_inf
M
0_cap
I
zc
y
inf
:=
m
m N
2
8
4
10 * ) 5 . 3 ( *
10 * 333 . 581
* 10 * 661 . 1

x_inf
1 10
8
Pa =

Note: All true that the maximum normal stress is located at the superior extreme fiber,
the strength limit (the allowable normal compressive stress) is firstly reached at the
inferior fiber.

The corresponding linear distributed normal strains are calculated as:
x_sup

x_sup
E
:=
Pa
Pa
9
8
10 * 200
10 * 857 . 1
x_sup
9.286 10
4
=

x_inf

x_inf
E
:=
Pa
Pa
9
8
10 * 200
10 * 000 . 1
x_inf
5 10
4
=

The final stress and strain distributions are plotted in Figure 7.2.2.a.

Problem 7.2.3 The timber beam made of four planks tied together with screws to form
a box section, as shown in Figure 7.2.3, is subjected to pure bending. If the flexural
stress at point B of the cross-section is a 6.2 MPa tensional stress, determine (a) the
bending stress and strain distribution on the cross-section, (b) the bending moment
carried by the cross-section, (c) the flexural stresses at points A and D of the cross-
section, (d) the axial force acting on the top and bottom planks and (e) the capable
bending moment of the cross-section considering that the wood has allowable flexural
stresses in tension and compression
all_tens
=30 MPa and
all_compr
=20 MPa.

98

Figure 7.2.3


A.1 The cross-section is subjected to pure bending, but a special attention should be
given to the fact that the material has different normal allowable stresses.


material data
all_tens
30 MPa :=

- allowable normal tensile stress
all_compr
20 MPa := - allowable compressive stress
E 30 GPa :=


h
w
20 cm := - web height
t
w
4 cm := - web thickness
b
f
18 cm := - flange width
t
f_s
2 cm := - top flange thickness
t
f_i
4 cm := - bottom flange thickness

99

point B and D
d
B
6 cm := - distance measured from the bottom of the box beam
x_B
6.2 MPa := - effective normal stress at point B
d
D
1 cm := - distance measured from the bottom of the box beam

B. Calculations

B.1 Calculation of the Cross- Section Geometrical Characteristics (see Figure 7.2.3.a)

Figure 7.2.3.a
The cross- section is composed from four rectangles: top flange, two webs and bottom
flange. The corresponding areas of the components and the total area of the cross-
section are calculated:

Note: All dimensions used in the calculations of the cross-section geometrical
characteristics are in cm.

A
w
t
w
h
w
:= 20 * 4 A
w
80cm
2
= - area of the web
A
f_s
t
f_s
b
f
:= 18 * 2 A
f_s
36cm
2
= - area of the top flange
A
f_i
t
f_i
b
f
:= 18 * 4 A
f_i
72cm
2
= - area of the bottom flange
A
total
2 A
w
A
f_s
+ A
f_i
+ := + + 72 36 80 * 2 A
total
268cm
2
= - total area

100

The cross- section is symmetric against the vertical axis OYc and consequently, only
the vertical position of the cross- section centroid is required to be calculated. The
general coordinate system OYcZ is anchored in the centroid of the webs.

y
C_w
0 cm := - distance from the point O to the web centroid.
y
C_f_s
h
w
2
t
f_s
2
+ := +
2
2
2
20
y
C_f_s
11cm =

- distance from the point O to the
top flange centroid.
y
C_f_i
h
w
2
t
f_i
2
+
|
\
|
.
:=
|
.
|
\
|
+
2
4
2
20
y
C_f_i
12 cm =

- distance from the point O
to the botom flange
centroid
y
C
2 A
w
y
C_w
A
f_s
y
C_f_s
+ A
f_i
y
C_f_i
+
A
total
:=

+ +
268
) 12 ( * 72 11 * 36 0 * 80 * 2
y
C
1.746 cm =

- the vertical position of the centroid
Note: The neutral axis, NA, is identical to the central horizontal axis of the coordinate
system CYcZc.

The new coordinate system CYcZc is moved in the centroid C of the cross- section.
The moment of inertia, Izc, of the entire cross-section calculated against the axis CZc is
obtained:

y
C_w
y
C_w
y
C
:= ) 746 . 1 ( 0 y
C_w
1.746cm =

- distance from the point C
to the web centroid.
y
C_f_s
y
C_f_s
y
C
:= ) 746 . 1 ( 11 y
C_f_s
12.746cm =

- distance from the
point C to the top
flange centroid.
y
C_f_i
y
C_f_i
y
C
:= ) 746 . 1 ( 12 y
C_f_i
10.254 cm =

- distance from the point C to the botom flange centroid

101

I
zc
2
t
w
h
w
3
12
A
w
y
C_w
2
+
|
\
|
.
b
f
t
f_s
3
12
A
f_s
y
C_f_s
2
+
|
\
|
.
+
b
f
t
f_i
3
12
A
f_i
y
C_f_i
2
+
|
\
|
.
+
... :=
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ +
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ +
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
2
3
2
3
2
3
) 254 . 10 ( * 72
12
4 * 18
746 . 12 * 36
12
2 * 18
746 . 1 * 80
12
20 * 4
* 2
I
zc
1.935 10
4
cm
4
= - cross- section moment of inertia

The section modulus W is obtained:
y
sup
y
C_f_s
t
f_s
2
+ := +
2
2
746 . 12 y
sup
13.746cm =

- distance from NA to the
upper edge of the top
flange
y
inf
y
C_f_i
t
f_i
2
:=
2
4
254 . 10 y
inf
12.254 cm =

lower edge of the bottom
flange
W
sup
I
zc
y
sup
:=
746 . 13
10 * 935 . 1
4
W
sup
1.408 10
3
cm
3
=
W
inf
I
zc
y
inf
:=
254 . 12
10 * 935 . 1
4
W
inf
1.579 10
3
cm
3
=

W min W
sup
W
inf
,
( )
:= ) 10 * 579 . 1 , 10 * 408 . 1 min(
3 3
W 1.408 10
3
cm
3
=

- sectional modulus

B.2 Normal Stress and Strain Diagrams

According to Naviers Formula the normal stress distribution on the cross- section is
linear. To draw the diagram, two point are necessary: the first point is the centroid and
the second is the given normal stress
x_B
6.5 MPa

at point B. The resulting
diagram of the normal stress is shown in Figure 7.2.3.a. The maximum values of the

102

normal stresses,
t x max_ _
and
c x max_ _
, corresponding to the upper edge of the top
flange and the lower edge of the bottom flange, respectively, are calculated using
simple geometrical proportions.
x_max_t

x_B
y
inf
y
B
:=
m
m
Pa
2
2
6
10 * 254 . 6
10 * 254 . 12
* 10 * 5 . 6

x_max_t
1.215 10
7
Pa =
x_max_c

x_max_t
y
sup
y
inf
:=
m
m
Pa
2
2
7
10 * 254 . 12
10 * 746 . 13
* 10 * 215 . 1

x_max_c
1.363 10
7
Pa =
where
B
y is the distance measured from the neutral axis, NA, to point B.
y
B
h
w
2
t
f_i
+ d
B
\
|
.
y
C
:=
|
.
|
\
|
+ ) 746 . 1 ( 6 4
2
20
y
B
6.254 cm =

The corresponding maximum strains,
t x max_ _
and
c x max_ _
calculated at the upper
edge of the top flange and the lower edge of the bottom flange, respectively, are
obtained as:
x_sup

x_max_t
E
:=
Pa
Pa
9
7
10 * 30
10 * 215 . 1
x_sup
4.049 10
4
=
x_inf

x_max_c
E
:=
Pa
Pa
9
7
10 * 30
10 * 363 . 1
x_inf
4.543 10
4
=
Note: The values of the obtained maximum normal stresses and corresponding strains
indicate that the area above the neutral axis is in compression, while the area below
the neutral axis is in tension.

B.3 Calculation of the Bending Moment

The bending moment, Mo, acting on the CZc axis and corresponding to the normal
stress distribution calculated in section B.2 is obtained:

103

M
0
I
zc
y
B

x_B
:=
Pa
m
m
6
2
4 8 4
10 * 5 . 6 *
10 * 254 . 6
10 * 10 * 935 . 1
M
0
1.918 10
4
N m =

Note: Due to the rounding to the third decimal of the numbers used in the manual
calculation an insignificant numerical error appears in comparison with similar
Mathcad results.

To verify the maximum values of the normal stresses diagram, calculated in section
B.2, these values are recalculated using the moment Mo and Naviers Formula:
x_max_t
M
0
I
zc
y
inf
:=

) 10 * 254 . 12 ( *
10 * 10 * 935 . 1
* 10 * 918 . 1
2
4 8 4
4
m
m
m N

x_max_t
1.215 10
7
Pa =
x_max_c
M
0
I
zc
y
sup
:=

) 10 * 746 . 13 ( *
10 * 10 * 935 . 1
* 10 * 918 . 1
2
4 8 4
4
m
m
m N

x_max_c
1.363 10
7
Pa =

B.4 Calculation of Normal Stress at points A and D

The normal stresses at points A and D can be calculated using two methods: (a)
Naviers Formula or (b) geometrical proportions of the linear diagram shown in Figure
7.2.3.a.

(a) using Naviers Formula
x_A
M
0
I
zc
y
A
:=

) 10 * 746 . 13 ( *
10 * 10 * 935 . 1
* 10 * 918 . 1
2
4 8 4
4
m
m
m N

x_A
1.363 10
7
Pa =

x_D
M
0
I
zc
y
D
:=

) 10 * 254 . 11 ( *
10 * 10 * 935 . 1
* 10 * 918 . 1
2
4 8 4
4
m
m
m N

x_D
1.116 10
7
Pa =

104

where: y
A
y
C_f_s
t
f_s
2
+ := +
2
2
746 . 12 y
A
13.746cm =

y
D
y
C_f_i
d
D
:= 1 254 . 10 y
D
11.254 cm =

(b) using the Geometrical Method
x_A

x_max_c
:=
x_A
1.363 10
7
Pa =
x_D

x_B
y
D
y
B
:=
m
m
Pa
2
2
6
10 * 254 . 6
10 * 254 . 11
* 10 * 5 . 6
x_D
1.116 10
7
Pa =

B.5 Calculation of the Axial Forces of the Flanges

The axial forces in the flanges are obtained using the normal stress diagram shown in
Figure 7.2.3.b.

(a) The axial force on the top flange
x_f_s_top

x_max_c
:=
x_f_s_top
1.363 10
7
Pa =

y
f_s_bot
y
A
t
f_s
:= 2 746 . 13 y
f_s_bot
11.746cm =
x_f_s_bot
M
0
I
zc
y
f_s_bot
:=

) 10 * 746 . 11 ( *
10 * 10 * 935 . 1
* 10 * 918 . 1
2
4 8 4
4
m
m
m N

x_f_s_bot
1.165 10
7
Pa =

F
f_s
1
2
t
f_s

x_f_s_top

x_f_s_bot
+
( )
b
f
:=

( )

m Pa Pa m
2 7 7 2
10 * 18 * 10 * 165 . 1 10 * 363 . 1 10 * 2 *
2
1

F
f_s
4.549 10
4
N =

(b) The axial force on the bottom flange
y
f_i_top
y
inf
t
f_i
+ := + 4 254 . 12 y
f_i_top
8.254 cm =
x_f_i_top
M
0
I
zc
y
f_i_top
:=

) 10 * 254 . 8 ( *
10 * 10 * 935 . 1
* 10 * 918 . 1
2
4 8 4
4
m
m
m N

105

x_f_i_top
8.183 10
6
Pa =
x_f_i_bot

x_max_t
:=
x_f_i_bot
1.215 10
7
Pa =

F
f_i
1
2

x_f_i_top

x_f_i_bot
+
( )
b
f
t
f_i
:=
( ) +

m Pa Pa m
2 7 6 2
10 * 18 * 10 * 215 . 1 10 * 183 . 8 10 * 4 *
2
1

F
f_i
7.319 10
4
N =

Figure 7.2.3.b.

B.6 Calculation of the Capable Bending Moment

In the previous sections the sign of the bending moment Mo is positive, as shown in
Figure 7.2.3.b. The sign of the bending moment is established by the sign of the
normal stress
B x _
imposed at point B. The calculation of the capable bending
moment pertinent to the cross-section, due to the asymmetry of the cross-section
against the centroidal axis CZ
c
and material allowable stresses for compression and
tension, requires the examination of both conditions: the positive and negative
directions of the centroidal acting bending moment.

(a) If M
0_cap
>0

The verification formulas corresponding to the extreme fibers are:

106

x_max_c
M
0_cap
I
zc
y
sup
M
0_cap
W
sup

all_compr

x_max_t
M
0_cap
I
zc
y
inf
M
0_cap
W
inf

all_tens

The capable bending moment calculated under the assumption that the bending
moment is positive, a vector parallel with the positive CZc axis, is:
M
0_cap_poz
min
all_compr
W
sup

all_tens
W
inf
,
( )
:=

) 10 * 10 * 579 . 1 * 10 * 30 , 10 * 10 * 408 . 1 * 10 * 20 min(
3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6
m Pa m Pa
M
0_cap_poz
2.815 10
4
N m =

(b) If M
0_cap
<0

The verification formulae corresponding to the extreme fibers are:
x_max_c
M
0_cap
I
zc
y
sup
M
0_cap
W
sup

all_tens

x_max_t
M
0_cap
I
zc
y
inf
M
0_cap
W
inf

all_compr

The capable bending moment calculated under the assumption that the bending
moment is negative, a vector parallel with the negative CZc axis, is:
M
0_cap_neg
min
all_tens
W
sup

all_compr
W
inf
,
( )
:=

) 10 * 10 * 579 . 1 * 10 * 20 , 10 * 10 * 408 . 1 * 10 * 30 min(
3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6
m Pa m Pa
M
0_cap_neg
3.158 10
4
N m =

Finally, the capable bending moment pertinent to the cross-section is obtained:
M
0_cap
if M
0_cap_poz
M
0_cap_neg
> M
0_cap_neg
, M
0_cap_poz
,
( )
:=
M
0_cap
min W
inf
W
sup
,
( )
min
all_compr
all_tens
,
( )
:=
M
0_cap
W min
all_compr
all_tens
,
( )
:=

M
0_cap
2.815 10
4
N m =

107

Problem 7.2.4 The cross- section shown in Figure 7.2.4 is considered subjected to non-
uniform bending characterized by a bending moment Mo=55 kNm and shear force
Vo=10 kN,. Conduct the following tasks: (a) calculate the normal stress distribution on
the cross- section, (b) calculate the shear stress distribution on the cross- section and
(c) verify the cross- section, considering MPa
all
210 = and MPa
all
120 = .

Figure 7.2.4


A.1 The cross-section is subjected to non-uniform bending. Both Naviers and
Jourawskis Formulas are applicable. The beam is made of steel and consequently, the
allowable bending stress has an equal value for both tensile and compressive normal
stress.

cross- sectional resultants
M
0
55kN m :=

- bending moment
V
0
10 kN :=

- shear force

material data
all
210MPa :=

- allowable normal tensile and compressive stress
all
120MPa := - allowable shear stress

108

E 200GPa :=


t 1 cm :=
1
1.5 :=
2
1.2 :=
20 :=
1
15 :=
2
10 :=
h
sect
t := h
sect
20cm =

- section height
t
web
t := t
web
1cm =

- web thickness
b
f_s

1
t := b
f_s
15cm =

- top flange width
b
f_i

2
t := b
f_i
10cm =

- bottom flange width
t
f_s

1
t := t
f_s
1.5cm =

- top flange thickness
t
f_i

2
t := t
f_i
1.2cm =

- bottom flange thickness
h
web
h
sect
t
f_s
t
f_i
:=

2 . 1 5 . 1 20 h
web
17.3cm = - web height

B. Calculations

B.1 Calculation of the Cross- Section Geometrical Characteristics (see Figure 7.2.4.a)

The cross- section consists on three individual rectangular areas: upper and lower
flanges and the web. The corresponding areas are calculated:
A
f_s
b
f_s
t
f_s
:= 5 . 1 * 15 A
f_s
22.5cm
2
= - area of the top flange
A
f_i
b
f_i
t
f_i
:= 2 . 1 * 10 A
f_i
12cm
2
= - area of the bottom flange
A
web
h
web
t
web
:= 1 * 3 . 17 A
web
17.3cm
2
= - area of the web

109

A
total
A
web
A
f_s
+ A
f_i
+ := + + 12 5 . 22 3 . 17 A
total
51.8cm
2
= - total area

Figure 7.2.4.a

The initial coordinate system OYcZ passes through the centroid of the web. The
distances from point O to the lower and upper flange centroids are obtained:
y
C_web
0 cm :=
y
C_f_s
h
web
2
t
f_s
2
+ := +
2
5 . 1
2
3 . 17
y
C_f_s
9.4cm = distance from the point O to
the upper flange centroid.
y
C_f_i
h
web
2
t
f_i
2
+
|
\
|
.
:=
|
.
|
\
|
+
2
2 . 1
2
3 . 17
y
C_f_i
9.25 cm = distance from the
point O to the lower flange
centroid.
y
C
A
web
y
C_web
A
f_s
y
C_f_s
+ A
f_i
y
C_f_i
+
A
total
:=
+ +
8 . 51
) 25 . 9 ( * 12 4 . 9 * 5 . 22 0 * 3 . 17

y
C
1.94cm =

system CY
c
Z
c
.

110

The new coordinate system CY
c
Z
c
is moved in the centroid C of the cross-section. The
moment of inertia, Izc, of the entire cross-section calculated against the axis CZ
c
is
obtained:
y
C_web
y
C
:= y
C_web
1.94 cm =
y
C_f_s
h
web
2
t
f_s
2
+
|
\
|
.
y
C
:=
|
.
|
\
|
+ 94 . 1
2
5 . 1
2
3 . 17
y
C_f_s
7.46cm =
y
C_f_i
h
web
2
t
f_i
2
+
|
\
|
.
y
C
:=
|
.
|
\
|
+ 94 . 1
2
2 . 1
2
3 . 17
y
C_f_i
11.19 cm =

I
z_C
b
f_s
t
f_s
3
12
A
f_s
y
C_f_s
2
+
|
\
|
.
t
web
h
web
3
12
A
web
y
C_web
2
+
|
\
|
.
+
b
f_i
t
f_i
3
12
A
f_i
y
C_f_i
2
+
|
\
|
.
+
... :=
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ +
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ +
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
2
3
2
3
2
3
) 19 . 11 ( * 12
12
2 . 1 * 10
) 94 . 1 ( * 3 . 17
12
3 . 17 * 1
46 . 7 * 5 . 22
12
5 . 1 * 15

I
z_C
3.257 10
3
cm
4
=

The sectional modulus of the cross- section is obtained as:
y
sup
y
C_f_s
t
f_s
2
+ := +
2
5 . 1
46 . 7 y
sup
8.21cm =

- distance from NA to the upper
edge of the top flange
y
inf
y
C_f_i
t
f_i
2
:=
2
2 . 1
19 . 11 y
inf
11.79 cm =

lower edge of the bottom
flange
W
sup
I
z_C
y
sup
:=
21 . 8
10 * 257 . 3
3
W
sup
396.719cm
3
=
W
inf
I
z_C
y
inf
:=
79 . 11
10 * 257 . 3
3
W
inf
276.247cm
3
=
W min W
sup
W
inf
,
( )
:= ) 247 . 276 , 719 . 396 min( W 276.247cm
3
=

-sectional modulus

111

B.2 Calculation of the Normal Stress Distribution (
x
Diagram)

The stress distribution is obtained using the following formula (Naviers Formula).
The maximum values of the normal stresses,
t x max_ _
and
c x max_ _
, corresponding to
the upper edge of the top flange and the lower edge of the bottom flange, respectively,
are calculated:
x_max_t
M
0
I
z_C
y
inf
:=

) * 10 * 79 . 11 ( *
* 10 * 10 * 257 . 3
* * 10 * 55
2
4 8 3
3
m
m
m N

x_max_t
1.991 10
8
Pa =

x_max_c
M
0
I
z_C
y
sup
:=

m
m
m N
* 10 * 21 . 8 *
* 10 * 10 * 257 . 3
* * 10 * 55
2
4 8 3
3

x_max_c
1.386 10
8
Pa =

The corresponding strains are obtained:

x_max_t

x_max_t
E
:=
Pa
Pa
9
8
10 * 200
10 * 991 . 1
x_max_t
9.955 10
4
=

x_max_c

x_max_c
E
:=
Pa
Pa
9
8
10 * 200
10 * 386 . 1
x_max_c
6.932 10
4
=

The stress and strain distributions are shown in Figure 7.2.4.b.

Figure 7.2.4.b

112

B.3 Calculation of Shear Stress Distribution ( Diagram)

The shear flow and stress diagram is calculated employing the Jurawskis Formula.
The cross-section is divided, as shown in Figure 7.2.4.c, into four distinct rectangular
areas: A1 through A4. Each area is delineated by two cuts (A1:a-b or a-b, A2:c-d or
c-d, A3:e-f and A4:g-f or g-f). The variation of the corresponding shear stress is
calculated on each of the four areas.

Figure 7.2.4.c

B.3.a Upper Flange (
xz
shear stress)

The horizontal cut 1-1 is made, as shown in Figure 7.2.4.d, at distance s1 measured
from a and increasing towards b.

Figure 7.2.4.d

113

Theoretical rational:

0
_
>
x z
M 0 >
x
F (area located above the NA is in compression).
0
_
>
x y
V 0 *
_ _
> = x V M
S y x z
0
_ _ _
> + =
+ x z x z x x z
M M M 0 <
+ x x
F
x z x x z
M M
_ _
>
+

x x x
F F >
+
0 > H
0 > H 0
_
>
avr zx
q 0
_
>
avr zx
0
_
<
avr xz

Numerical calculations:

t
ab
t
f_s
:=

t
ab
1.5cm = - thickness of the cut at s1

S
Zc_ab
s1 ( ) s1 t
f_s
y
sup
t
f_s
2
\
|
.
:= - static moment about the neutral axis
q
zx_ab
s1 ( )
V
0
S
Zc_ab
s1 ( )
I
z_C
:= - shear flow on the cut area
zx_ab_avg
s1 ( )
q
zx_ab
s1 ( )
t
ab
:= - shear stress on the cut area

The above functions are particularized for the two limiting cuts of the segment ab.
Only two values are sufficient because the variation of the shear stress ) 1 (s
zx
is
linear.
cut a
s1 0 cm :=
S
Zc_ab
s1 ( ) 0cm
3
=
q
zx_ab
s1 ( ) 0
kN
m
=
zx_ab_avg
s1 ( ) 0MPa =
xz_ab_avg
s1 ( )
zx_ab_avg
s1 ( ) :=

xz_ab_avg
s1 ( ) 0MPa =

- shear stress at the face of the flange

114

cut b
s1
b
f_s
2
t
web
2
:=
2
1
2
15
s1 7cm =
S
Zc_ab
s1 ( ) 78.328cm
3
=
q
zx_ab
s1 ( ) 24.049
kN
m
=
zx_ab_avg
s1 ( ) 1.603MPa =
xz_ab_avg
s1 ( )
zx_ab_avg
s1 ( ) :=

xz_ab_avg
s1 ( ) 1.603 MPa =

- shear stress at the face of the web

The above calculations refer only to the left area of the upper flange. Due to the
symmetry exhibited by the upper flange against the CYc axis, the shear stress ) 1 (s
xz

calculated for the left side of the upper flange is symmetric with the shear stress on the
right side.

B.3.b Lower Flange (
xz
shear stress)

The calculation of the shear stress ) 3 (s
xz
corresponding to the lower flange is
conducted in a similar manner with the calculation developed in section B.3.a. The
horizontal cut 3-3 is made, as shown in Figure 7.2.4.e, at distance s3 measured from g
and increasing towards f.

0
_
>
x z
M 0 <
x
F (area below the NA is in tension)
0
_
>
x y
V 0 *
_ _
> = x V M
x y S z
0
_ _ _
> + =
+ x z x z x x z
M M M 0 >
+ x x
F
x z x x z
M M
_ _
>
+

x x x
F F >
+
0 < H
0 < H 0
_
<
avr zx
q 0
_
<
avr zx
0
_
>
avr xz

t
gf
t
f_i
:=

t
gf

115

S
Zc_gf
s3 ( ) s3 t
f_i
y
inf
t
f_i
2
+
|
\
|
.
q
zx_gf
s3 ( )
V
0
S
Zc_gf
s3 ( )
I
z_C
zx_gf_avg
s3 ( )
q
zx_gf
s3 ( )
t
gf

Figure 7.2.4.e

The above functions are particularized for the two limiting cuts of the segment gf. Only
two values are sufficient because the variation of the shear stress ) 3 (s
zx
is linear.
cut g
s3 0 cm :=
S
Zc_gf
s3 ( ) 0cm
3
=
q
zx_gf
s3 ( ) 0
kN
m
=
zx_gf_avg
s3 ( ) 0MPa =
xz_gf_avg
s3 ( )
zx_gf_avg
s3 ( ) :=
xz_gf_avg
s3 ( ) 0MPa =

- shear stress at the face of the flange

116

cut f
s3
b
f_i
2
t
web
2
:=
2
1
2
10
s3 4.5cm =
S
Zc_gf
s3 ( ) 60.427 cm
3
=
q
zx_gf
s3 ( ) 18.553
kN
m
=
zx_gf_avg
s3 ( ) 1.546 MPa =
xz_gf_avg
s3 ( )
zx_gf_avg
s3 ( ) :=
xz_gf_avg
s3 ( ) 1.546MPa =
- shear stress at the face of the web

The above calculations refer only to the left area of the upper flange. Due to the
symmetry exhibited by the upper flange against the CYc axis, the shear stress ) 3 (s
xz

calculated for the left side of the lower flange is symmetric with the shear stress on the
right side.

B.3.c Web (
xy
shear stress)
The calculation of the shear stress ) 2 (s
xy
on the area of the web located above the
neutral axis, area A2, is conducted by considering the equilibrium of the infinitesimal
three-dimensional body as shown in Figure 7.2.4.f. The horizontal cut 2-2 is made at
distance s2 measured from c and increasing towards d.

0
_
>
x z
M 0 >
x
F (area above the NA is in compression).
0
_
>
x y
V 0 *
_ _
> = x V M
x y x z
0
_ _ _
> + =
+ x z x z x x z
M M M 0 <
+ x x
F
x z x x z
M M
_ _
>
+

x x x
F F >
+
0 > H
0 > H 0
_
>
avr yx
q 0
_
>
avr yx
0
_
<
avr xy

t
cd
t
web
:=

t
cd
1cm = - thickness of the cut at s3

117

S
Zc_cd
s2 ( ) b
f_s
t
f_s
y
sup
t
f_s
2
\
|
.
s2 t
web
y
sup
t
f_s
s2
2
\
|
.
+ :=

- static moment about the neutral axis
q
yx_cd
s2 ( )
V
0
S
Zc_cd
s2 ( )
I
z_C
yx_cd_avg
s2 ( )
q
yx_cd
s2 ( )
t
cd

Figure 7.2.4.f

The variation of the shear stress is a second- order parabola. Only two values of the
shear stress are necessary and they are calculated at the location of the junction
between the upper flange and the web and at the neutral axis location.
cut c
s2 0 cm :=
S
Zc_cd
s2 ( ) 167.847cm
3
=
q
yx_cd
s2 ( ) 51.534
kN
m
=
yx_cd_avg
s2 ( ) 5.153MPa =
xy_cd_avg
s2 ( )
yx_cd_avg
s2 ( ) :=

xy_cd_avg
s2 ( ) 5.153 MPa =

118

- shear stress at the junction between upper flange and web
cut d
s2 y
sup
t
f_s
:=

s2 6.71cm =
S
Zc_cd
s2 ( ) 190.358cm
3
=
q
yx_cd
s2 ( ) 58.446
kN
m
=
yx_cd_avg
s2 ( ) 5.845MPa =
xy_cd_avg
s2 ( )
yx_cd_avg
s2 ( ) :=

xy_cd_avg
s2 ( ) 5.845 MPa =
- shear stress at the neutral axis
The variation of the shear stress ) 4 (s
xy
on the area below the neutral axis, shown in
Figure 7.2.4.g, is parametrically calculated using the following rational:

0
_
>
x z
M 0 <
x
F (area below the NA is in tension).
0
_
>
x y
V 0 *
_ _
> = x V M
x y x z
0
_ _ _
> + =
+ x z x z x x z
M M M 0 >
+ x x
F
x z x x z
M M
_ _
>
+

x x x
F F >
+
0 < H
0 < H 0
_
<
avr yx
q 0
_
<
avr yx
0
_
<
avr xy

Figure 7.2.4.g

119


t
ed
t
web
:=

t
ed
S
Zc_ed
s4 ( ) b
f_i
t
f_i
y
inf
t
f_i
2
+
|
\
|
.
s4 t
web
y
inf
t
f_i
+
s4
2
+
|
\
|
.
+ :=

q
yx_ed
s4 ( )
V
0
S
Zc_ed
s4 ( )
I
z_C
yx_ed_avg
s4 ( )
q
yx_ed
s4 ( )
t
ed
The variation of the shear stress is a second-order parabola. Only two values of the
shear stress are necessary to be calculated and they are expressed at the location of the
junction between the lower flange and the web and at the neutral axis location.
cut e
s4 0 cm :=
S
Zc_ed
s4 ( ) 134.282 cm
3
=
q
yx_ed
s4 ( ) 41.229
kN
m
=

yx_ed_avg
s4 ( ) 4.123 MPa =
xy_ed_avg
s4 ( )
yx_ed_avg
s4 ( ) :=

xy_ed_avg
s4 ( ) 4.123 MPa =

- shear stress at the junction between lower flange and web
cut d
s4 y
inf
t
f_i
+ :=

s4 10.59cm =
S
Zc_ed
s4 ( ) 190.358 cm
3
=
q
yx_ed
s4 ( ) 58.446
kN
m
=
yx_ed_avg
s4 ( ) 5.845 MPa =

120

xy_ed_avg
s4 ( )
yx_ed_avg
s4 ( ) :=

xy_ed_avg
s4 ( ) 5.845 MPa =

- shear stress at the neutral axis

The shear stress distribution on the entire cross-section, calculated above, is shown in
Figure 7.2.4.h.

Figure 7.2.4.h

B.4 Verification of the Cross-Section

B.4.a Verification of the Normal Stress

The verification of the cross-section is conducted considering the following formula:
x_max
max
x_max_c

x_max_t
,
( )

all
:=
) 10 * 991 . 1 , 10 * 386 . 1 max(
8 8
Pa Pa MPa MPa 210 10 * 991 . 1
2
<

if max
x_max_c

x_max_t
,
( )

all
"OK" , "NG" ,
( )
"OK" =

B.4.b Verification of the Maximum Shear Stress

The verification of the cross-section is conducted considering the following formula:
xy_max

all

where:

xy_max

xy_ed_avg
s4 ( ) :=

xy_max
5.845 10
6
Pa = MPa 120 <

- maximum shear stress on the web

121

if
xy_max

all
"OK" , "NG" ,
( )
"OK" =

B.5 The Web Shear Force

The shear force carried by the web is obtained by integrating on the web thickness the
xy
shear stress diagram pictured in Figure 7.2.4.h:
V
web

xy_min_u
y
sup
t
f_s
( )

2
3

xy_max

xy_min_u
( )
y
sup
t
f_s
( )
(
(
+
...
xy_min_l
y
inf
t
f_i
( )

+
...
2
3

xy_max

xy_min_l
( )
y
inf
t
f_i
( )
(
(
+
...
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
t
web
:=

( ) | |
( ) ( )
( ) | |
( ) ( )

(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
+
+
(

m
m Pa
m Pa
m Pa
m Pa
2
2 2 6 6
2 2 6
2 2 6 6
2 2 6
10 * 1 *
10 * 2 . 1 10 * 79 . 11 * 10 * 123 . 4 10 * 845 . 5
3
2
10 * 2 . 1 10 * 79 . 11 * 10 * 123 . 4
10 * 5 . 1 10 * 21 . 8 * 10 * 153 . 5 10 * 845 . 5
3
2
10 * 5 . 1 10 * 21 . 8 * 10 * 153 . 5

V
web
9.349 10
3
N =

- the shear force in the web of the cross- section
where:
xy_min_u

xy_cd_avg
0 cm ( ) :=

xy_min_u
5.153 MPa =
xy_min_l

xy_ed_avg
0 cm ( ) :=

xy_min_l
4.123MPa =

The ratio between the web shear force and the total shear force acting on the cross-
section is:
=
4
3
0
_
10
10 * 349 . 9
V
V
l web
V
web
V
0
0.935 =

The ratio indicates that the web transfers 93% of the total shear force acting on the
cross-section. For this reason the codes employed for the calculations of steel
structures are imposing that the entire shear force is transferred only to the web.

122

Then, the average shear stress in the web is:
av_web
V
0
h
sect
t
web
:= =

m m
N
2 2
4
10 * 1 * 10 * 20
10
av_web
5 10
6
Pa =

Problem 7.2.5 The cross-section shown in Figure 7.2.5 (all dimensions in mm) is
subjected to non-uniform bending condition: bending moment Mo>0 and shear force
Vo=50 kN. Calculate: (a) the bending capacity, (b) the normal stress distribution on the
cross- section, (c) the maximum shear stress and verify the cross-section, and (d) the
shear flow in the welds considering MPa
all
210 = and MPa
all
120 = .

Figure 7.2.5

Jourawskis Formulae are applicable. The beam is made of steel and
consequently, the allowable bending stress has an equal value for both tensile and
compressive normal stress.

The shear stress induced by the existence of the shear force Vo is calculated using
the observation that for a thin- wall closed cross- section the shear flow is null in
the axis of symmetry of the cross- section.

123


cross- sectional resultants
V
0
50 kN :=

- shear force
material data
all
210MPa :=

all
120MPa := - allowable shear stress
E 200GPa :=


b
rs
200 mm :=

- tubular cross- section width
h
rs
300 mm :=

- tubular cross- section height
t
rs
10 mm :=

- tubular cross- section thickness
f
Ls
80 mm :=

- equal legs L shape width
t
Ls
10 mm :=

- L shape thickness
d
Ls
140 mm := - position of the L shape (see Figure 7.2.5)

B. Calculations

B.1 Calculation of the Cross- Section Geometrical Characteristics

The cross-section consists of three individual areas: a tubular cross-section and two
equal L shaped legs. Their corresponding geometrical characteristics are calculated as
shown below.

B.1.1 Calculation of the L Shape Geometrical Characteristics (see fig. 7.2.5.a)

A
L_1
f
Ls
t
Ls
( )
t
Ls
:= ( ) 1 * 1 8 A
L_1
7cm
2
=
A
L_2
f
Ls
t
Ls
:= 1 * 8 A
L_2
8cm
2
=

124

A
Ls
A
L_1
A
L_2
+ := + 8 7 A
Ls
15cm
2
= - area of the L shape

Figure 7.2.5.a

y
C_l_l
f
Ls
2
t
Ls
2
:=
2
1
2
8
y
C_l_l
3.5cm = - distance from the point O to the
upper flange centroid.
y
C_l_2
0 cm := - distance from the point O to the lateral flange centroid.
y
C_l
A
L_1
y
C_l_l
A
L_2
y
C_l_2
+
A
Ls
:=
+
15
0 * 8 5 . 3 * 7
y
C_l
1.633cm =

y
C_l_l
y
C_l_l
y
C_l
:= 633 . 1 5 . 3 y
C_l_l
1.867cm = - distance from the point
C to the upper flange centroid.
y
C_l_2
y
C_l_2
y
C_l
:= 633 . 1 0 y
C_l_2
1.633 cm = - distance from the point
C to the upper flange centroid.
I
z_L
t
Ls
3
f
Ls
t
Ls
( )
12
A
L_1
y
C_l_l
2
+
(
(
t
Ls
f
Ls
3
12
A
L_2
y
C_l_2
2
+
|
\
|
.
+ :=
( )
( )
(
+
(
2
3
2
3
633 . 1 * 8
12
8 * 1
867 . 1 * 7
12
1 8 * 1
I
z_L
88.983cm
4
=

-
moment of inertia of the L shape computed with respect to its local centroid
e
1
y
C_l_l
t
Ls
2
+ := +
2
1
867 . 1 e
1
2.367cm = - eccentricity of the L shape
e
2
f
Ls
e
1
:= 367 . 2 8 e
2
5.633cm =

125

B.1.2 Calculation of the Tubular Cross- Section Geometrical Characteristics (see fig.
7.2.5.b)

Figure 7.2.5.b

A
ext
h
rs
b
rs
:= 20 * 30 A
ext
600cm
2
= - area of the exterior rectangle
A
int
h
rs
2t
rs
( )
b
rs
2t
rs
( )
:= ( )( ) 1 * 2 20 1 * 2 30 A
int
504cm
2
= - area of the
exterior rectangle
A
rs
A
ext
A
int
:= 504 600 A
rs
96cm
2
= - area of the tubular cross- section
I
z_rs
h
rs
3
b
rs
12
h
rs
2t
rs
( )
3
b
rs
2t
rs
( )
12
:=
( ) ( )

12
1 * 2 20 * 1 * 2 30
12
20 * 30
3 3
I
z_rs
12072cm
4
=
- moment of inertia of the tubular cross- section

B.1.3 Calculation of the Cross- Section Geometrical Characteristics (see fig. 7.2.5.c)

A
tot
2 A
Ls
A
rs
+ := + 96 15 * 2 A
tot
126cm
2
= - total area

The initial coordinate system OY
c
Z passes through the centroid of the web. The
distances from point O to the lower and upper flange centroids are obtained:
y
O_rs
0cm :=

126

y
O_L
d
Ls
f
Ls
2
y
C_l
+ := + 633 . 1
2
8
14 y
O_L
11.633cm = - distance from the
point O to the center of the L
shape
y
C
2 A
Ls
y
O_L
A
rs
y
O_rs
+
A
tot
:=
+
126
0 * 96 633 . 11 * 15 * 2
y
C
2.77cm = -
centroid of the cross- section

system CY
c
Z
c
.

Figure 7.2.5.c

The new coordinate system CY
c
Z
c
is moved in the centroid C of the cross- section. The
moment of inertia, I
zc
, of the entire cross-section calculated against the axis CZc is
obtained:
y
C_rs
y
O_rs
y
C
:= 77 . 2 0 y
C_rs
2.77 cm = - distance from the point C to
the centroid of the tubular cross- section
y
C_L
y
O_L
y
C
:= 77 . 2 633 . 11 y
C_L
8.863cm = - distance from the point C
to the centroid of the L shape
I
z_C
2 I
z_L
A
Ls
y
C_L
2
+
( )
I
z_rs
A
rs
y
C_rs
2
+
( )
+ :=
( ) ( ) + + +
2 2
) 77 . 2 ( * 96 12072 863 . 8 * 15 983 . 88 2 I
z_C
15343.325cm
4
=

127

The sectional modulus of the cross-section is obtained as:
y
sup
h
rs
2
y
C
:= 77 . 2
2
30
y
sup
12.23cm =

- distance from NA to the upper
edge of cross- section
y
inf
h
rs
2
y
C
+
:=
+ 77 . 2
2
30
y
inf
17.77 cm =

lower edge of the cross- section
W
sup
I
z_C
y
sup
:=
23 . 12
325 . 15343
W
sup
1254.548cm
3
=
W
inf
I
z_C
y
inf
:=
77 . 17
325 . 15343
W
inf
863.448cm
3
=
W min W
sup
W
inf
,
( )
:= ) 448 . 863 , 548 . 1254 min( W 863.448cm
3
=

-sectional modulus

B.2 Calculation of Bending Capacity and Normal Stress Diagram (see fig. 7.2.5.d)

The capable moment is obtained:
M
z_cap
W
all
:=

m
N
m * 10 * 210 * * 10 * 448 . 863
6 6
M
z_cap
181.324kN m =

The stress distribution is obtained using the Naviers Formula:

Figure 7.2.5.d

128

The maximum values of the normal stresses,
sup max_ _ x
and
inf max_ _ x
, corresponding
to the upper edge of the top flange and the lower edge of the bottom flange,
respectively, are calculated:
x_max_sup
M
z_cap
I
z_C
y
sup
:=

m
m
m N
* 10 * 23 . 12 *
* 10 * 325 . 15343
* * 10 * 324 . 181
2
4 8
3

x_max_sup
144.533 MPa =

x_max_inf
M
z_cap
I
z_C
y
inf
:= ( )

m
m
m N
* 10 * 77 . 17 *
* 10 * 325 . 15343
* * 10 * 324 . 181
2
4 8
3

x_max_inf
210MPa =

B.3 Calculation of Maximum Shear Stress and Verification

The maximum shear stress on the cross-section is calculated employing the Jurawskis
Formula. Due to the vertical symmetry of the cross-section, symmetry against the CY
c

axis, the shear flow at the symmetry axis CY
c
locations is zero. Consequently, the
calculation of the shear flow is conducted only on the left half of the cross-section. The
maximum static moment used in the Jurawskis Formula represents the static moment
of the half-area located above the neutral axis (NA) and is calculated as:
S
z_C_max
A
Ls
y
C_L
b
rs
2
t
rs
y
sup
t
rs
2
+ y
sup
t
rs
( )
t
rs
y
sup
t
rs
( )
2
+ :=
S
z_C_max
313.312cm
3
=

The maximum shear stress located at the neutral axis position is obtained:
xy_max
V
0
S
z_C_max
I
z_C
t
rs
:=

m m
m N
* 01 . 0 * * 10 * 325 . 15343
10 * 312 . 313 * * 10 * 50
4 8
3 6 3

xy_max
10.21MPa =

The strength verification:
if
xy_max

all
"OK" , "NoGood" ,
( )
"OK" =

129

B.4 Shear Flows in the Welds(see Figure 7.2.5.e )

The total shear in the L shape is calculated as:
q
L_max
V
0
S
z_C_L
I
z_C
:=

4 8
3 6 3
* 10 * 325 . 15343
* 10 * 952 . 132 * * 10 * 50
m
m N

q
L_max
43.326
kN
m
=

where

S
z_C_L
A
Ls
y
C_L
:= 863 . 8 * 15 S
z_C_L
132.952cm
3
=

Figure 7.2.5.e

To calculate the shear flow in the welds two equilibrium equations are used:

x
F
0
- projections on x axis
C
L
M
z
0- moment about z axis passing through the L shape centroid

Explicitly the two equations, containing the shear flow in the welds as unknown
quantities are written as:
q
weld_1
q
weld_2
+ q
L_max

q
weld_1
e
1
q
weld_2
e
2
0

130

Find q
weld_1
q
weld_2
,
( )
58981000
1933259
N
mm
349000
27229
N
mm
float 3 ,
30.5
N
mm
12.8
N
mm

The solutions, representing the shear flow in each weld, are:
q
weld_1
30.5
kN
m
:=
q
weld_2
12.8
kN
m
:=

Problem 7.2.6 The longitudinal view and the cross-section of the structural steel bridge
beam are shown in Figure 7.2.6. The upper and lower bolts are of 10 mm and 12 mm
diameter, respectively, while the steel is characterized by the following allowable
stresses: MPa
all
210 = and MPa
all
126 = . Calculate: (a) the geometrical
characteristics of the cross-section with and without the bolts existence, (b) the capable
bending moment and shear force of the cross-section with and without considering the
bolt existence, (c) the necessary spacing between the bolts ( MPa
bear all
336
_
= and
MPa
shear all
126
_
= ) and (d) if the bolted connection is replaced by a welded
connection, the effective thickness of the welds ( MPa
weld all
147
_
= ). For the
calculations required at point (d) consider a shear force equal to half of the capable
shear force of the cross-section.

Figure 7.2.6

131


Jourawskis Formulas are applicable. The beam is made of steel and
consequently, the allowable bending stress has an equal value for both tensile
and compressive normal stress. Usually the existence of the bolts, which are
reducing the effective area of the cross-section, is neglected when the cross-
sectional geometrical properties are calculated. The error introduced by
neglecting the bolt existence is negligible and is covered by the safety factor
used in determining the allowable stresses of the material.

The calculation required at (a) evaluates the geometrical characteristics for both
cases: a full cross-section and a reduced cross-section. A comparison is made.
In engineering practice this dilemma is solved by placing the full-section in the
cross-section of maximum moment. As it is concluded in a previous problem
the shear force is primarily carried by the web, area little affected by the
reduction.


material data
all
210 MPa :=

all
126MPa = - allowable shear stress

t
f_s_1
1.2 cm :=

- thickness of the first part of the upper flange
b
f_s_1
16 cm :=

-width of the first part of the upper flange
t
f_s_2
1.5 cm :=

- thickness of the second part of the upper flange
b
f_s_2
20 cm :=

-width of the second part of the upper flange
t
web
1 cm :=

- web thickness

132

h
web
65 cm := - web height
t
f_i
2 cm :=

- thickness of the first part of the lower flange
b
f_i
15 cm :=

- web of the first part of the lower flange
b
angle
6 cm :=

- length of the angle
t
angle
6 mm :=

- thickness of the angle
ecc
angle
1.69 cm :=

- eccentricity of the angle
A
angle
6.91 cm
2
:=

- area of the angle
I
z_angle
22.8 cm
4
:=

- moment of inertia of the angle

bolts
all_shear
all_bear
336MPa = - allowable bearing stress
n
bolt_sup
2 := - number of bolts used to connect the parts of the upper flange

bolt_sup
10 mm :=

- diameter of the upper bolts
h
bolt_sup
t
f_s_1
t
f_s_2
+ := h
bolt_sup
2.7cm =

- length of the upper bolts

n
bolt_inf
1 := - number of bolts used to connect the parts of the lower flange
bolt_inf
12 mm := - diameter of the lower bolts

h
bolt_inf
2 t
angle
t
web
+ := h
bolt_inf
2.2cm = - length of the upper bolts
pos
bolt_inf
30 mm :=

- position of the lower bolts

weld
all_weld

133

B. Calculations

B.1 Calculation of the Cross- Section Geometrical Characteristics

Note: the calculations are conducted using cm as unit.

B.1.a Full Cross-section (see Figure 7.2.6.a)

The area of the component parts and the total area of the cross-section, calculated
under the assumption that the bolt holes are neglected, are:
A
f_s_1
b
f_s_1
t
f_s_1
:= 2 . 1 * 16 A
f_s_1
19.2cm
2
=

- area of the first part of the upper flange
A
f_s_2
b
f_s_2
t
f_s_2
:= 5 . 1 * 20 A
f_s_2
30cm
2
=

- area of the second part of the upper flange
A
web
h
web
t
web
:= 1 * 65 A
web
65cm
2
= - area of the web
A
angle
6.91cm
2
= - area of the angle

A
f_i
b
f_i
t
f_i
:= 2 * 15 A
f_i
30cm
2
= - area of the first part of the lower flange
A
total
A
f_s_1
A
f_s_2
+ A
web
+ 2 A
angle
+ A
f_i
+ :=
+ + + + 30 91 . 6 * 2 65 30 2 . 19 A
total
158.02cm
2
= - total area

The cross-section is symmetric against the vertical axis OYc and, consequently, only
the vertical position of the centroid is necessary to be calculated. The origin of the
coordinate system OYcZ coincides with the centroid of the web. The distances from the
origin O to the centriods of the parts are:
y
C_f_s_1
h
web
2
t
f_s_2
+
t
f_s_1
2
+ := + +
2
2 . 1
5 . 1
2
65
y
C_f_s_1
34.6cm =
y
C_f_s_2
h
web
2
t
f_s_2
2
+ := +
2
5 . 1
2
65
y
C_f_s_2
33.25cm =
y
C_angle
h
web
2
ecc
angle
:= ) 69 . 1
2
65
( y
C_angle
30.81 cm =

134

y
C_f_i
h
web
2
t
f_i
2
+
:= + )
2
2
2
65
( y
C_f_i
33.5 cm =

Calculation of the static moment of inertia about the axis CZ:

S
z
A
f_s_1
y
C_f_s_1
A
f_s_2
y
C_f_s_2
+ A
web
y
C_web
+
A
f_i
y
C_f_i
2 A
angle
y
C_angle
+ +
... :=

+ + + + ) 5 . 33 ( * 30 ) 81 . 30 ( * 91 . 6 * 2 0 * 65 25 . 33 * 30 6 . 34 * 2 . 19

S
z
231.026cm
3
= - static moment
y
C
S
z
A
total
:=
02 . 158
026 . 231
y
C
1.462cm =
- centroid position

The coordinate system is moved in the centroid C (the new coordinate system CYcZc)
and the distances to the centroid of the parts are accordingly adjusted:

y
C_web
y
C
:= y
C_web
1.462 cm =

y
C_f_s_1
y
C_f_s_1
y
C
:= 462 . 1 6 . 34 y
C_f_s_1
33.138cm =

y
C_f_s_2
y
C_f_s_2
y
C
:= 462 . 1 25 . 33 y
C_f_s_2
31.788cm =

y
C_angle
y
C_angle
y
C
:= 462 . 1 81 . 30 y
C_angle
32.272 cm =

y
C_f_i
y
C_f_i
y
C
:= 462 . 1 5 . 33 y
C_f_i
34.962 cm =

The centroidal moment of inertia about the axis CZc is obtained:

I
z_C
b
f_s_1
t
f_s_1
3
12
A
f_s_1
y
C_f_s_1
2
+
b
f_s_2
t
f_s_2
3
12
A
f_s_2
y
C_f_s_2
2
+
+
...
t
web
h
web
3
12
A
web
y
C_web
2
+
+
...
2 I
z_angle
A
angle
y
C_angle
2
+
( )
+
...
b
f_i
t
f_i
3
12
A
f_i
y
C_f_i
2
+
+
...
:=

135

+ + + +
+ + + + + +
) ) 962 . 34 ( * 30
12
2 * 15
( ) ) 272 . 32 ( * 91 . 6 8 . 22 ( * 2
) 462 . 1 * 65
12
65 * 1
( ) 788 . 33 * 30
12
5 . 1 * 20
( ) 138 . 33 * 2 . 19
12
2 . 1 * 16
(
2
3
2
2
3
2
3
2
3

I
z_C
1.255 10
5
cm
4
=

The section modulus considering the distances measured from the centroid to the
extreme fibers of the cross-section:
y
sup
y
C_f_s_1
t
f_s_1
2
+ := +
2
2 . 1
138 . 33 y
sup
33.738cm =
y
inf
y
C_f_i
t
f_i
2
:=
2
2
962 . 34 y
inf
35.962 cm =
W
sup
I
z_C
y
sup
:=
738 . 33
10 * 255 . 1
5
W
sup
3.721 10
3
cm
3
=
W
inf
I
z_C
y
inf
:=
738 . 33
10 * 255 . 1
5
W
inf
3.491 10
3
cm
3
=
W min W
sup
W
inf
,
( )
:= W 3.491 10
3
cm
3
=

B.1.b Effective Cross-section (see Figure 7.2.6.b)

The calculation is repeated considering the missing areas of the holes of the bolts. The
position of the holes is measured in the coordinate system OYcZ:
y
C_bolt_sup
h
web
2
h
bolt_sup
2
+ := +
2
7 . 2
2
65
y
C_bolt_sup
33.85cm =

y
C_bolt_inf
h
web
2
pos
bolt_inf
:= ) 3
2
65
( y
C_bolt_inf
29.5 cm =

The corresponding hole areas are calculated as:
A
bolt_sup

bolt_sup
h
bolt_sup
:= 7 . 2 * 1 A
bolt_sup
2.7cm
2
=

- upper bolt
A
bolt_inf

bolt_inf
h
bolt_inf
:= 2 . 2 * 2 . 1 A
bolt_inf
2.64cm
2
=

- lower bolt

136

A
total_nett
A
total
n
bolt_sup
A
bolt_sup
n
bolt_inf
A
bolt_inf
:=
64 . 2 7 . 2 * 2 02 . 158 A
total_nett
149.98cm
2
=

Note: A reduction area by 5% is calculated due the bolt existence.

The centroid of the effective area is obtained:
S
z_nett
S
z
n
bolt_sup
A
bolt_sup
( )
y
C_bolt_sup
+ n
bolt_inf
A
bolt_inf
( )
y
C_bolt_inf
+ :=

) 5 . 29 ( * 64 . 2 ) 85 . 33 ( * 7 . 2 * 2 026 . 231 S
z_nett
126.116cm
3
=

y
C_nett
S
z_nett
A
total_nett
:=
98 . 149
18 . 126
y
C_nett
0.841cm =

- position of the centroid of the effective cross-section

The new coordinate system CYcZ is located in the centroid of the effective cross-
section. After correcting the centroidal distances measured from the centroid of the
effective cross-section to the centroid of the component areas, the centroidal moment
of inertia of the effective cross-section against the axis CZc is obtained as:
y
C_web_n
y
C_nett
:= y
C_web_n
0.841 cm =
y
C_f_s_1_n
y
C_f_s_1_0
y
C_nett
:= 841 . 0 6 . 34 y
C_f_s_1_n
33.759cm =
y
C_f_s_2_n
y
C_f_s_2
y
C_nett
:= 841 . 0 25 . 33 y
C_f_s_2_n
32.409cm =

y
C_angle_n
y
C_angle
y
C_nett
:= 841 . 0 81 . 30 y
C_angle_n
31.651 cm =
y
C_f_i_n
y
C_f_i
y
C_nett
:= 841 . 0 5 . 33 y
C_f_i_n
34.341 cm =
y
C_bolt_sup
y
C_bolt_sup_0
y
C_nett
:= 841 . 0 6 . 34 y
C_bolt_sup
33.009cm =
y
C_bolt_inf
y
C_bolt_inf_0
y
C_nett
:= 841 . 0 6 . 34 y
C_bolt_inf
30.341 cm =

137

I
z_C_nett
b
f_s_1
t
f_s_1
3
12
A
f_s_1
y
C_f_s_1_n
2
+
b
f_s_2
t
f_s_2
3
12
A
f_s_2
y
C_f_s_2_n
2
+
+
...
t
web
h
web
3
12
A
web
y
C_web_n
2
+
+
...
2 I
z_angle
A
angle
y
C_angle_n
2
+
( )
+
...
b
f_i
t
f_i
3
12
A
f_i
y
C_f_i_n
2
+
+
...
2

bolt_sup
h
bolt_sup
3
12
A
bolt_inf
y
C_bolt_sup
2

+
...
bolt_inf
3
h
bolt_inf
12
A
bolt_inf
y
C_bolt_inf
2

+
...
:=
+
+ + + + + +
+ + + + + +
) ) 341 . 30 ( * 7 . 2
12
2 . 1 * 2 . 2
( * 2
) 009 . 33 * 7 . 2
12
7 . 2 * 1
( * 2 ) ) 341 . 34 ( * 30
12
2 * 15
( ) ) 651 . 31 ( * 91 . 6 8 . 22 ( * 2
) ) 841 . 0 ( * 65
12
65 * 1
( ) 409 . 32 * 30
12
5 . 1 * 20
( ) 759 . 33 * 2 . 19
12
2 . 1 * 16
(
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
2
3
2
3
2
3

I
z_C_nett
1.174 10
5
cm
4
=

Note: The ratio between the moments of inertia calculated is indicating a reduction
with 6.5% when the bolts are considered. In engineering practice the bolts are not all
staggered in the same cross-section.

I
z_C_nett
I
z_C
0.935 =

The effective section modulus is calculated as:
y
sup_n
y
C_f_s_1_n
t
f_s_1
2
+ := +
2
2 . 1
759 . 33 y
sup_n
34.359cm =
y
inf_n
y
C_f_i_n
t
f_i
2
:=
2
2
341 . 34 y
inf_n
35.341 cm =

138

W
sup_nett
I
z_C_nett
y
sup_n
:=
359 . 34
10 * 174 . 1
5
W
sup_nett
3.418 10
3
cm
3
=
W
inf_nett
I
z_C_nett
y
inf
:=
341 . 35
10 * 174 . 1
5
W
inf_nett
3.265 10
3
cm
3
=
W
nett
min W
sup_nett
W
inf_nett
,
( )
:= W
nett
3.265 10
3
cm
3
=

B.2 Calculation of Bending Capacity of the Cross-Section

B.2.a Full Cross-section

The capable bending moment of the full cross-section is obtained as:
M
cap

all
W :=
3 3 6 3 6
10 * 10 * 10 * 491 . 3 * 10 * 210 m Pa

M
cap
733.147kN m =

B.2.b Effective Cross-section

The capable bending moment of the effective cross-section is calculated in a similar
manner:
M
cap_nett

all
W
nett
:=
3 3 6 3 6
10 * 10 * 10 * 265 . 3 * 10 * 210 m Pa
M
cap_nett
685.695kN m =

The ratio of the capable bending moments is:

M
cap_nett
M
cap
0.935 =

Note: As expected, a reduction in the bending capacity of the effective cross-section is
emphasized. This reduction represents a small percentage of the bending capacity
when the bolts existence is neglected. For this reason and some other consideration

139

related to the safety factor used in the calculation of the allowable normal stress in the
engineering practice the bolts are not considered and the moment of inertia of the full
cross-section is usually used.

B.3 Calculation of Shear Capacity of the Cross-Section

B.3.a Full Cross-section

Using the Jourawskis Formula the capable shear force is calculated:
V
cap
t
web
I
z_C
S
z_C_max

all
:=

3 6
3 6 3
4 8 5 2
10 * 10 * 126 *
* 10 * 10 * 072 . 2
10 * 10 * 255 . 1 * 10 * 1
Pa
m
m m

V
cap
763.637kN =
where the maximum static moment about the neutral axis is obtained as:
S
z_C_max
A
f_s_1
y
C_f_s_1
A
f_s_2
y
C_f_s_2
+
y
sup
t
f_s_1
t
f_s_2
( )
t
web
y
sup
t
f_s_1
t
f_s_2
( )
2
+
... :=

+ +
2
) 5 . 1 2 . 1 738 . 33 (
* 1 * ) 5 . 1 2 . 1 738 . 33 ( 788 . 31 * 30 138 . 33 * 2 . 19

S
z_C_max
2.072 10
3
cm
3
=

B.3.b Effective Cross-section

The calculation of the capable shear force of the cross-section is conducted:
V
cap_nett
t
web
I
z_C_nett
S
z_C_max_nett

all
:=

3 6
3 6 3
4 8 5 2
10 * 10 * 126 *
* 10 * 10 * 943 . 1
10 * 10 * 174 . 1 * 10 * 1
Pa
m
m m
V
cap_nett
759.786kN =

S
z_C_max_nett
A
f_s_1
y
C_f_s_1_n
A
f_s_2
y
C_f_s_2_n
+
y
sup_n
t
f_s_1
t
f_s_2
( )
t
web
y
sup_n
t
f_s_1
t
f_s_2
( )
2
+
...
2 A
bolt_inf
y
C_bolt_sup
( )
+
...
:=

140

+
+

+ +
) 009 . 33 * 7 . 2 ( * 2
2
) 5 . 1 2 . 1 356 . 34 (
* 1 * ) 5 . 1 2 . 1 356 . 34 ( 409 . 32 * 30 759 . 33 * 2 . 19

S
z_C_max_nett
1.943 10
3
cm
3
=

The ratio of the capable shear forces calculated considering the full section and the
section with bolts is:

V
cap_nett
V
cap
0.997 =

Note: The reduction induced by the bolts existence is insignificant and shows that the
bolts can be excluded from the calculation involving the shear force.

B.4 Calculation of the Bolts Spacing

The shear force
cr
V required to conduct the calculation is:
V
cr
0.5 V
cap
:=
cap
V * 5 . 0 V
cr
381.819kN =

B.4.a Upper Bolts

The shear flow corresponding to the upper bolts is calculated as:
q
rec_bolt_sup
V
cr
S
z_C_f_s
I
z_C
:=

3
4 8 5
3 6 3
10 *
* 10 * 10 * 255 . 1
10 * 25 . 636 * 10 * 819 . 381
m
m N

q
rec_bolt_sup
193.495
kN
m
=

where the static moment is:

S
z_C_f_s
A
f_s_1
y
C_f_s_1
:= 138 . 33 * 2 . 19 S
z_C_f_s
636.25cm
3
=

The upper 10 mm bolt capacity is obtained calculating the minimum between the bolt
capacities in bearing and shearing:

141

n
f
1 :=

- number of shearing sections of the bolt
P
bolt_shear
n
f

bolt_sup
2
4

all_shear
:=

3 6
2 4 2
10 * 10 * 126 *
4
10 * 1 *
* 1 Pa
m
P
bolt_shear
9.896kN =

P
bolt_bear

bolt_sup
min t
f_s_1
t
f_s_2
,
( )

all_bear
:=

3 6 2 4
10 * 10 * 336 * 10 * ) 5 . 1 , 2 . 1 min( * 1 Pa m

P
bolt_bear
40.32kN =

P
bolt_sup
min P
bolt_shear
P
bolt_bear
,
( )
:= kN ) 32 . 40 , 896 . 9 min(

P
bolt_sup
9.896kN =

The spacing of the upper bolts is obtained:

s
sup
n
bolt_sup
P
bolt_sup
q
rec_bolt_sup
:=
2
10 *
/ 495 . 193
896 . 9 * 2
m kN
kN
s
sup
10.229cm =

B.4.b Lower Bolts

The shear flow corresponding to the upper bolts is calculated as:
q
rec_bolt_inf
V
cr
S
z_C_f_i
I
z_C
:=

3
4 8 5
3 6 3 3
10 *
* 10 * 10 * 255 . 1
10 * 10 * 495 . 1 * 10 * 819 . 381
m
m N

q
rec_bolt_inf
454.613
kN
m
=
where the static moment is:

S
z_C_f_i
A
f_i
y
C_f_i
2 A
angle
y
C_angle
+ :=
+ ) 272 . 32 ( * 91 . 6 * 2 ) 962 . 34 ( * 30 S
z_C_f_i
1.495 10
3
cm
3
=

142

The capacity of the 12 mm bolt is obtained calculating the minimum between the bolt
bearing and shearing capacities.
:

n
f
2 := - number of shearing sections of the bolt
P
bolt_shear
n
f

bolt_inf
2
4

all_shear
:=

3 6
2 4 2
10 * 10 * 126 *
4
10 * 2 . 1 *
* 2 Pa
m
P
bolt_shear
28.501kN =
P
bolt_bear

bolt_inf
min t
web
2t
angle
,
( )

all_bear
:=

3 6 2 4
10 * 10 * 336 * 10 * ) 6 . 0 * 2 , 1 min( * 2 . 1 Pa m P
bolt_bear
40.32kN =

P
bolt_inf
min P
bolt_shear
P
bolt_bear
,
( )
:= kN ) 32 . 40 , 501 . 28 min(
P
bolt_inf
28.501kN =

The spacing of the lower bolts is obtained:
s
inf
n
bolt_inf
P
bolt_inf
q
rec_bolt_inf
:=
2
10 *
/ 613 . 454
501 . 28 * 1
m kN
kN
s
inf
6.269cm =

The lower and upper bolts are both placed in the same cross-section as required by the
problems text. Consequently, the spacing is calculated as:

s min s
sup
s
inf
,
( )
:= ) 269 . 6 , 229 . 10 min( s
inf
6.269cm =

A rounded value is chosen to match the spacing:

s 5 cm :=

The verification of the bolts is conducted for the new spacing for exercising purposes
only:

if q
rec_bolt_sup
s n
bolt_sup
P
bolt_sup
< "OK" , "NO GOOD" ,
( )
"OK" =

143

if q
rec_bolt_inf
s n
bolt_inf
P
bolt_inf
< "OK" , "NO GOOD" ,
( )
"OK" =

B.5 Sizing of the Welds

B.5.a Upper Welds

The bolted connection is replaced by a welded connection. The shear flow in the upper
welds is calculated:
q
rec_welds_sup
V
cr
S
z_C_f_s
I
z_C
:=

3
4 8 5
3 6 3 3
10 *
* 10 * 10 * 255 . 1
10 * 10 * 59 . 1 * 10 * 819 . 381
m
m N

q
rec_welds_sup
483.513
kN
m
=
where the corresponding static moment is obtained:
S
z_C_f_s
A
f_s_1
y
C_f_s_1
A
f_s_2
y
C_f_s_2
+ := + 788 . 31 * 30 138 . 33 * 2 . 19
S
z_C_f_s
1589.889cm
3
=
The upper welds capacity is calculated:
n
fillet_welds
2 :=
P
cap_weld_sup
n
fillet_welds
t
weld_sup

all_weld

The effective thickness of the upper welds is obtained from the equation:
q
rec_welds_sup
P
cap_weld_sup

and consequently,

t
weld_sup
q
rec_welds_sup
n
fillet_welds
all_weld
:=
3
6
3
10 *
10 * 147 * 2
10 * 513 . 483
Pa
N

t
weld_sup
1.645mm =

B.5.b Lower Welds

The shear flow in the lower welds is calculated:

144

q
rec_welds_inf
V
cr
S
z_C_f_i
I
z_C
:=

3
4 8 5
3 6 3 3
10 *
* 10 * 10 * 255 . 1
10 * 10 * 049 . 1 * 10 * 819 . 381
m
m N

q
rec_welds_inf
318.977
kN
m
=

where the corresponding static moment is obtained:
S
z_C_f_i
A
f_i
y
C_f_i
:= 962 . 34 * 30 S
z_C_f_i
1.049 10
3
cm
3
=

The lower welds capacity is calculated:
n
fillet_welds
2 :=

P
cap_weld_inf
n
fillet_welds
t
weld_inf

all_weld

The effective thickness of the lower welds is obtained from the equation:

q
rec_welds_inf
P
cap_weld_inf

t
weld_inf
q
rec_welds_inf
n
fillet_welds
all_weld
:=
3
6
3
10 *
10 * 147 * 2
10 * 977 . 318
Pa
N
t
weld_inf
1.085mm =

Problem 7.2.7 Considering the steel beam shown in Figure 7.2.7 conduct the following
tasks: (a) calculate and draw the pertinent cross-sectional resultant diagrams, (b)
calculate the cross-section geometrical characteristics, (c) verify the beam for strength
employing the following allowable normal MPa
all
210 = and shear
all all
* 6 . 0 =
stresses, (d) size the welds (the effective throat) using the allowable shear stress
MPa
weld all
147
_
= , and (e) calculate and draw the normal and shear stresses in cross-
section S located at 1m right of end point of the uniform distributed load.

Figure 7.2.7

145


A.1 The loads are acting in the vertical plane and, consequently, the steel beam is
subjected to non-uniform bending. Both Naviers and Jourawskis Formulae
are applicable. The beam is made of steel and consequently, the allowable
normal stress has an equal value for both tensile and compressive normal
stress.


loading and dimensions
P 115 kN :=

q 40
kN
m
:=
a 3 m :=
b 2 m :=
c 1 m :=
material data
all
210 MPa :=

all
0.6
all
:= MPa 210 * 6 . 0
all

- Shape 1: Rectangular Web (300x10 mm)
h
pl
30 cm :=

- height
t
pl
1 cm :=

- thickness

- Shape 2: U24
h
U24
24 cm :=

- height of the shape
t
w_U24
0.95 cm :=

- thickness of the web
b
f_U24
8.5 cm :=

- length of the flange

146

t
f_U24
1.262 cm :=

- thickness of the flange
e
U24
2.23 cm :=

- eccentricity
A
U24
42.3 cm
2
:=

- area
I
z_U24
248 cm
4
:=

- moment of inertia about an axis parallel to z axis

- Shape 3: U12

h
U12
12 cm :=

- height of the shape
t
w_U12
0.70 cm :=

- thickness of the web
b
f_U12
5.5 cm :=

- length of the flange
t
f_U12
0.872 cm :=

- thickness of the flange
e
U12
1.60 cm :=

- eccentricity
A
U12
17 cm
2
:=

- area
I
z_U12
43.2 cm
4
:=

- moment of inertia about an axis parallel to z axis

welds
n
welds_sup
2 :=

- number of superior welds
n
welds_inf
2 :=

- number of inferior welds
all_weld
0.7
all
:= MPa 210 * 7 . 0
all_weld
147MPa =

- allowable shear stress

B. Calculations

B.1 Cross-Sectional Internal Resultants (see Figure 7.2.7.a)

Note: The cross-sectional internal resultants are calculated and graphically represented
as detailed explained in Chapter 3 of volume I.

147

B.1.a Calculation of the Reaction Forces

The support restrictions are replaced by the corresponding reaction forces. The reaction
forces together with the loads represent the free-body diagram of the beam. Due to the
fact that the loads and reaction forces are located in the vertical plane OXY only three
(3) global equilibrium equations are written for the entire free-body diagram of the
beam. They are:

x
F
x
0

- projection of the forces on the horizontal direction OX
1
M
z
0

- sum of moments about direction OZ in point 1
3
M
z
0

- sum of moments about direction OZ in point 3

Explicitly, the above equations are written as:
H
1
0 kN
V
1
a b + ( ) q a
a
2
b +
P c + 0 solve V
1
, 61000 N
q a
a
2
V
3
a b + ( ) P a b + c + ( ) + 0 solve V
3
, 174000 N

To verify the calculations conducted above the equilibrium on OY axis is employed:
V
1
V
3
+ q a P 0kN = = + 0 115 3 * 40 174 61 the calculations are OK

B.1.a Calculation of the Shear Force V
y

The value of the shear force at the locations indicated on Figure 7.2.7.a are obtained as:
V
1_left
0 kN :=
V
1_right
V
1_left
V
1
+ := + 61 0 V
1_right
61kN =
V
2_left
V
1_right
q a := 3 * 40 61 V
2_left
59 kN =

148

V
2_right
V
2_left
:= V
2_right
59 kN =

V
3_left
V
2_right
:= V
3_left
59 kN =
V
3_right
V
3_left
V
3
+ := + 174 59 V
3_right
115kN =
V
4_left
V
3_right
:= V
4_left
115kN =
V
4_right
V
4_left
P :=
V
4_right
0kN =

The shear force on the interval 12 changes the sign from positive to negative, and
consequently, a value of zero appears in a cross-section located at distance x from point
1. The expression of the shear force on the interval 12 is:

V
1_right
q x 0

The distance x is calculated:

x
V
1_right
q
:=
40
61
x 1.525m =

B.1.b Calculation of the Bending Moment M
z

The value of the bending moment at the locations indicated on Figure 7.2.7.a are
obtained as:
M
1
0 kN m :=
M
12_max
M
1
1
2
V
1_right
x + := + 525 . 1 * 61 *
2
1
0 M
12_max
46.513kN m =
M
2
M
1
1
2
V
1_right
x +
1
2
V
2_left
a x ( ) + :=
+ + ) 525 . 1 3 ( * 61 *
2
1
525 . 1 * 61 *
2
1
0 M
2
3kN m =
M
3
M
2
V
2_right
b + := 2 * 59 3 M
3
115 kN m =
M
4
M
3
V
3_right
c + := 1 * 115 115 M
4
0kN m =

149

Figure 7.2.7.a

B.2 Calculation of the Cross- Section Geometrical Characteristics (see Figure 7.2.7.b)

Note: The calculations are conducted using cm as unit.

The cross-section is composed from three shapes: a rectangular shape 300x10mm, U24
and U12. The area of the cross-section is calculated:

150

A
total
h
pl
t
pl
( )
A
U24
+ A
U12
+ := + + 0 . 17 3 . 42 1 * 30 A
total
89.3cm
2
=

The original coordinate system is attached to point C1, the centroid of the rectangular
shape. The distances from the origin of the coordinate system to the centroid of each
individual shape are:

y
C1
0 cm :=
y
C2
h
pl
2
t
w_U24
+ e
U24
:= + 23 . 2 95 . 0
2
30
y
C2
13.72cm =
y
C3
h
pl
2
e
U12
+
:= + ) 60 . 1
2
30
( y
C3
16.6 cm =

The position of the centroid is obtained:

y
C
h
pl
t
pl
( )
y
C1
A
U24
y
C2
+ A
U12
y
C3
+
A
total
:=
+ +
3 . 89
) 6 . 16 ( * 0 . 17 72 . 13 * 3 . 42 0 * ) 1 * 30 (
y
C
3.339cm =

z
C
0 cm := (due to the cross-section symmetry)

Figure 7.2.7.b

A new coordinate system, attached to the cross-section centroid C, is now employed.
The new positions of the centroids of each individual shape are established as:

y
C1
y
C1
y
C
:= 339 . 3 0 y
C1
3.339 cm =

151

y
C2
y
C2
y
C
:= 339 . 3 72 . 13 y
C2
10.381cm =
y
C3
y
C3
y
C
:= 339 . 3 6 . 16 y
C3
19.939 cm =

The only moment of inertia necessary to be calculated is:

I
Zc
h
pl
3
t
pl
12
h
pl
t
pl
( )
y
C1
2
+
(
(
I
z_U24
A
U24
y
C2
2
+
( )
+ I
z_U12
A
U12
y
C3
2
+
( )
+ :=
( ) | | + + + +
(
+
2 2 2
3
) 939 . 19 ( * 17 2 . 43 381 . 10 * 3 . 42 248 ) 339 . 3 ( * ) 1 * 30 (
12
1 * 30

I
Zc
14192.717cm
4
=

The distances to the extreme fibers of the cross-section are:

y
sup
y
C2
e
U24
+ := + 23 . 2 381 . 10 y
sup
12.611cm =
y
inf
y
C3
e
U12
+ b
f_U12
:= + 50 . 5 60 . 1 939 . 19 y
inf
23.839 cm =

The sectional modulus is calculated:

W
sup
I
Zc
y
sup
:=
611 . 12
717 . 14192
W
sup
1125.407cm
3
=
W
inf
I
Zc
y
inf
:=
839 . 23
717 . 14192
W
inf
595.362cm
3
=
W min W
sup
W
inf
,
( )
:= W 595.362cm
3
=

B.3 Verification of the Cross-Section for Strength

B.3.a Normal Stress Verification (
x
Verification)

The verification of the normal stress is conducted in the cross-section where the
maximum absolute bending moment is reached. This cross-section is identified by
surveying the bending moment diagram shown in Figure 7.2.7.a.

152

x_max
max
x_sup

x_inf
,
( )

all

where:
M
z_max
M
3
:= M
z_max
115 kN m =
x_sup
M
z_max
I
Zc
y
sup
:=
m
m
N
2
4 8
3
10 * 611 . 12 *
10 * 717 . 14192
10 * 115

x_sup
102.185MPa =
x_inf
M
z_max
I
Zc
y
inf
:=
m
m
N
2
4 8
3
10 * ) 839 . 23 ( *
10 * 717 . 14192
10 * 115

x_inf
193.16 MPa =
x_max
max
x_sup

x_inf
,
( )
:=
x_max
193.16MPa =

The normal stress diagram in the cross-section corresponding to the maximum bending
moment is shown in Figure 7.2.7c.

Figure 7.2.7c

An alternative approach, using the sectional modulus, is the following:

x_max
M
z_max
I
Zc
y
max

all

x_max
M
z_max
W

all

153

where:
y
max
max y
sup
y
inf
,
( )
:= y
max
23.839cm =
x_max
M
z_max
W
:=
3 6
3
10 * 362 . 595
10 * 115
m
N
x_max
193.16MPa =
if
x_max

all
"OK" , "NG" ,
( )
"OK" =

B.3.b Shear Stress Verification (
xy
Verification)

The shear stress verification is conducted in the cross-section where the shear force
reaches the absolute maximum. This cross-section is identified by surveying the shear
force diagram shown in Figure 7.2.7.a. The formula used in the shear stress verification
is:

xy_max
V
y_max
S
Zc_NA
I
Zc
t
pl

all

where:

V
y_max
V
3_right
:= V
y_max
115kN =

S
Zc_NA
A
U24
y
C2
t
pl
h
pl
2
y
C
\
|
.
1
2
h
pl
2
y
C
\
|
.
+ :=

|
.
|
\
|

|
.
|
\
|
+ 339 . 3
2
30
*
2
1
* 339 . 3
2
30
* 1 381 . 10 * 3 . 42 S
Zc_NA
507.116cm
3
=

- the static moment of the area located
above the neutral axis (NA)

xy_max
V
y_max
S
Zc_NA
I
Zc
t
pl
:=

m m
m N
2 4 8
3 6 3
10 * 1 * 10 * 717 . 14192
10 * 116 . 507 * 10 * 115

xy_max
41.09MPa =
if
xy_max

all
"OK" , "NG" ,
( )
"OK" =

154

B.4 Sizing of the Welds

B.4.a The Upper Welds

The sizing of the upper welds is performed using the following formula:
q
weld_sup
1 m ( ) P
cap_welds_sup

The shear capacity of the upper welds is calculated as:

P
cap_welds_sup
n
welds_sup
t
eff_sup
1 m ( )
all_weld

The shear flow in the upper welds is calculated:

q
weld_sup
V
y_max
S
zc_U24
I
Zc
:=

4 8
3 6 3
10 * 717 . 14192
10 * 124 . 439 * 10 * 115
m
m N
q
weld_sup
355.811
kN
m
=

where:
S
zc_U24
A
U24
y
C2
:= 381 . 10 * 3 . 42 S
zc_U24
439.124cm
3
=

- the static moment of the U24 about the neutral axis (NA)

The effective throat of the upper weld is the only unknown quantity and it is calculated
as:
t
eff_sup
q
weld_sup
n
welds_sup

all_weld
:=
Pa
m N
6
3
10 * 147 * 2
/ 10 * 811 . 355
t
eff_sup
1.21mmm =

B.4.bThe Lower Welds

The sizing of the lower welds is performed using the following formula:
q
weld_inf
1 m ( ) P
cap_welds_inf

The shear capacity of the lower welds is calculated as:

P
cap_welds_inf
n
welds_inf
t
eff_inf
1 m ( )
all_weld

155

The shear flow in the lower welds is calculated:

q
weld_inf
V
y_max
S
zc_U12
I
Zc
:=

4 8
3 6 3
10 * 717 . 14192
10 * 96 . 338 * 10 * 115
m
m N

q
weld_inf
274.651
kN
m
=

where:
S
zc_U12
A
U12
y
C3
:= ) 939 . 19 ( * 0 . 17 S
zc_U12
338.96cm
3
=

The effective throat of the lower weld is the only unknown quantity and is calculated
as:
t
eff_inf
q
weld_inf
n
welds_inf

all_weld
:=
Pa
m N
6
3
10 * 147 * 2
/ 10 * 651 . 274
t
eff_inf
0.934mm =

B.5 Stress Diagrams on Section S.

The bending moment and the shear force in the cross-section S are:

s 1 m :=
M
z_S
M
2
V
2_right
s + := 1 * 59 3 M
z_S
56 kN m =
V
y_S
V
2_right
:= V
y_S
59 kN =

B.5.a Normal Stress Diagram (
x
Diagram see Figure 7.2.7.d)

The normal stress (
x
) diagram in the cross-section S is constructed in a similar manner
with the
x
diagram used in the calculation of the
x_max
. The variation of the normal
stress on the cross-section is linear in accordance to the Naviers Formula and only
the values at the extreme fibers are necessary to be calculated.

x_sup_S
M
z_S
I
Zc
y
sup
:=
m
m
N
2
4 8
3
10 * 611 . 12 *
10 * 717 . 14192
10 * 56

x_sup_S
49.76MPa =

156

x_inf_S
M
z_S
I
Zc
y
inf
:=
m
m
N
2
4 8
3
10 * ) 839 . 23 ( *
10 * 717 . 14192
10 * 56

x_inf_S
94.06 MPa =

Figure 7.2.7.d

B.5.b Shear Stress Diagram ( Diagram)

The shear flow and stress diagrams are calculated following the explanations regarding
the application of the Jurawskis Formula detailed in the theoretical paragraph. An
infinitesimal element of the beam starting from the cross-section S and having a length
x is isolated from the entire beam.

The cross-section is divided into six distinct rectangular areas, A1 through A6, as
shown in Figure 7.2.7.e, where Jurawskis Formula is applicable.

Each area is delineated by two cuts (A1:a-b or a-b, A2:c-d or c-d, A3:e-f, A4:g-f,
A5:k-j or k-j, A6:i-g or i-h). The variation of the corresponding shear stress is
calculated on each of the six areas.

For each cut the corresponding free body diagram is drawn. The resulting forces
x
F
and
x x
F
+
on each face of the resulting free body are indicated function of the signs of
the bending moment and shear force acting in the cross-section S.

157

Figure 7.2.7.e

B.5.b.1 Calculation of the Shear Stress on Area A1 (see Figure 7.2.7.f)

The horizontal cut 1-1 is made at distance s1 measured from a and increasing towards
b.

Figure 7.2.7.f
0
_
<
S z
M 0 <
x
F (area above the NA is in tension).
0
_
<
S y
V 0 *
_ _
=< = x V M
S y S z
0
_ _ _
< + =
+ S z S z x S z
M M M 0 >
+ x x
F
S z x S z
M M
_ _
>
+

x x x
F F >
+
0 < H
0 < H 0
_
<
avr yx
q 0
_
<
avr yx
0
_
<
avr xy

158

t
ab
t
f_U24
:=

t
ab
1.262cm =

- thickness of the cut at s1

S
Zc_ab
s1 ( ) s1 t
f_U24
y
sup
b
f_U24
s1
2
+
|
\
|
.
:=


q
yx_ab
s1 ( )
V
y_S
S
Zc_ab
s1 ( )
I
Zc
:=

- shear flow on the cut area
yx_ab_avg
s1 ( )
q
yx_ab
s1 ( )
t
ab
The above functions are particularized for the two limiting cuts of the segment ab.

cut a
s1 0 cm :=

S
Zc_ab
s1 ( ) 0cm
3
=
q
yx_ab
s1 ( ) 0
kN
m
=
yx_ab_avg
s1 ( ) 0MPa =
xy_ab_avg
s1 ( )
yx_ab_avg
s1 ( ) :=
xy_ab_avg
s1 ( ) 0MPa =

cut b
s1 b
f_U24
t
w_U24
:=

s1 7.55cm =
S
Zc_ab
s1 ( ) 75.14cm
3
=
q
yx_ab
s1 ( ) 31.236
kN
m
=
yx_ab_avg
s1 ( ) 2.475 MPa =
xy_ab_avg
s1 ( )
yx_ab_avg
s1 ( ) :=
xy_ab_avg
s1 ( ) 2.475 MPa =

159

The calculation for the segment ab is conducted in a similar manner as for the
segment ab and the shear stress is symmetric.

B.5.b.2 Calculation of the Shear Stress on Area A2 (see Figure 7.2.7.g)

The vertical cut 2-2 is made at distance s2 measured from c and increasing towards d.

0
_
<
S z
M 0 <
x
0
_
<
S y
V 0 *
_ _
=< = x V M
S y S z
0
_ _ _
< + =
+ S z S z x S z
M M M 0 >
+ x x
F
S z x S z
M M
_ _
>
+

x x x
F F >
+
0 < H
0 < H 0
_
<
avr zx
q 0
_
<
avr zx
0
_
>
avr xz

Figure 7.2.7.g
t
cd
t
w_U24
:= t
cd
S
Zc_cd
s2 ( ) S
Zc_ab
b
f_U24
( )
s2 t
w_U24
y
sup
t
w_U24
2
\
|
.
+ :=

q
zx_cd
s2 ( )
V
y_S
S
Zc_cd
s2 ( )
I
Zc

160

zx_cd_avg
s2 ( )
q
zx_cd
s2 ( )
t
cd

The above functions are particularized for the two limiting cuts of the segment cd:

cut c

s2 0 cm :=
S
Zc_cd
s2 ( ) 89.69cm
3
=
q
zx_cd
s2 ( ) 37.285
kN
m
=
zx_cd_avg
s2 ( ) 3.925 MPa =
xz_cd_avg
s2 ( )
zx_cd_avg
s2 ( ) :=
xz_cd_avg
s2 ( ) 3.925MPa =

cut d

s2
h
U24
2
t
f_U24
t
pl
2
\
|
.
:= s2 10.238cm =
S
Zc_cd
s2 ( ) 207.728cm
3
=
q
zx_cd
s2 ( ) 86.354
kN
m
=
zx_cd_avg
s2 ( ) 9.09 MPa =
xz_cd_avg
s2 ( )
zx_cd_avg
s2 ( ) :=
xz_cd_avg
s2 ( ) 9.09MPa =

The calculation for the segment cd is conducted in a similar manner as for the
segment cd and the shear stress is symmetric.

B.5.b.3 Calculation of the Shear Stress on Area A3 (see Figure 7.2.7.h)

The horizontal cut 3-3 is made at distance s3 measured from e and increasing towards
f.

161

Figure 7.2.7.h

0
_
<
S z
M 0 <
x
0
_
<
S y
V

0 *
_ _
=< = x V M
S y S z

0
_ _ _
< + =
+ S z S z x S z
M M M 0 >
+ x x
F
S z x S z
M M
_ _
>
+

x x x
F F >
+
0 < H
0 < H 0
_
<
avr yx
q 0
_
<
avr yx
0
_
<
avr xy

t
ef
t
pl
:=

t
ef

S
Zc_ef
s3 ( ) A
U24
y
C2
s3 t
pl
y
sup
t
w_U24
s3
2
\
|
.
+ :=

q
yx_ef
s3 ( )
V
y_S
S
Zc_ef
s3 ( )
I
Zc
yx_ef_avg
s3 ( )
q
yx_ef
s3 ( )
t
ef

The above functions are particularized for the two limiting cuts of the segment ef:.

162

cut e
s3 0 cm :=
S
Zc_ef
s3 ( ) 439.124cm
3
=
q
yx_ef
s3 ( ) 182.547
kN
m
=
yx_ef_avg
s3 ( ) 18.255 MPa =
xy_ef_avg
s3 ( )
yx_ef_avg
s3 ( ) :=
xy_ef_avg
s3 ( ) 18.255MPa =

cut f
s3 y
sup
t
w_U24
:= s3 11.661cm =
S
Zc_ef
s3 ( ) 507.116cm
3
=
q
yx_ef
s3 ( ) 210.811
kN
m
=
yx_ef_avg
s3 ( ) 21.081 MPa =
xy_ef_avg
s3 ( )
yx_ef_avg
s3 ( ) :=
xy_ef_avg
s3 ( ) 21.081MPa =

B.5.b.4 Calculation of the Shear Stress on Area A5 (see Figure 7.2.7.i)

The horizontal cut 5-5 is made at distance s5 measured from k and increasing towards
j.


0
_
<
S z
M 0 >
x
F (area below the NA is in compression).
0
_
<
S y
V 0 *
_ _
=< = x V M
S y S z
0
_ _ _
< + =
+ S z S z x S z
M M M 0 <
+ x x
F
S z x S z
M M
_ _
>
+

x x x
F F >
+
0 > H
0 > H 0
_
>
avr yx
q 0
_
>
avr yx
0
_
>
avr xy

163

t
kj
t
f_U12
:= t
kj

S
Zc_kj
s5 ( ) s5 t
f_U12
y
inf
s5
2
+
|
\
|
.
q
yx_kj
s5 ( )
V
y_S
S
Zc_kj
s5 ( )
I
Zc
yx_kj_avg
s5 ( )
q
yx_kj
s5 ( )
t
kj

Figure 7.2.7.i

The above functions are particularized for the two limiting cuts of the segment kj:.

cut k
s5 0 cm :=
S
Zc_kj
s5 ( ) 0cm
3
=
q
yx_kj
s5 ( ) 0
kN
m
=
yx_kj_avg
s5 ( ) 0MPa =
xy_kj_avg
s5 ( )
yx_kj_avg
s5 ( ) :=
xy_kj_avg
s5 ( ) 0MPa =

164

cut j
s6 b
f_U12
t
w_U12
:= s6 4.8cm = - thickness of the cut at s5
S
Zc_kj
s5 ( ) 89.734 cm
3
=
q
yx_kj
s5 ( ) 37.303
kN
m
=
yx_kj_avg
s5 ( ) 4.278MPa =
xy_kj_avg
s5 ( )
yx_kj_avg
s5 ( ) :=
xy_kj_avg
s5 ( ) 4.278MPa =

The calculation for the segment kj is conducted in a similar manner as for the
segment kj and the shear stress is symmetric.

B.5.b.5 Calculation of the Shear Stress on Area A6 (see Figure 7.2.7.j)

The vertical cut 6-6 is made at distance s6 measured from i and increasing towards h.

Figure 7.2.7.j

0
_
<
S z
M 0 >
x
0
_
<
S y
V 0 *
_ _
=< = x V M
S y S z
0
_ _ _
< + =
+ S z S z x S z
M M M 0 <
+ x x
F

165

S z x S z
M M
_ _
>
+

x x x
F F >
+
0 > H
0 > H 0
_
>
avr zx
q 0
_
>
avr zx
0
_
<
avr xz

t
ih
t
w_U12
:=

t
ih
S
Zc_ih
s6 ( ) S
Zc_kj
b
f_U12
( )
s6 t
w_U12
y
inf
b
f_U12
+
t
w_U12
2
\
|
.
+ :=

q
zx_ih
s6 ( )
V
y_S
S
Zc_ih
s6 ( )
I
Zc
zx_ih_avg
s6 ( )
q
zx_ih
s6 ( )
t
ih

The above functions are particularized for the two limiting cuts of the segment kj:.

cut i
s6 0 cm :=
S
Zc_ih
s6 ( ) 101.142 cm
3
=
q
zx_ih
s6 ( ) 42.045
kN
m
=
zx_ih_avg
s6 ( ) 6.006MPa =
xz_cd_avg
s6 ( )
zx_cd_avg
s6 ( ) :=
xz_cd_avg
s6 ( ) 3.925MPa =

cut j
s6
h
U12
2
t
f_U12
t
pl
2
\
|
.
:= s6 4.628cm =
S
Zc_ih
s6 ( ) 161.686 cm
3
=
q
zx_ih
s6 ( ) 67.214
kN
m
=

166

zx_ih_avg
s6 ( ) 9.602MPa =
xz_cd_avg
s6 ( )
zx_cd_avg
s6 ( ) :=
xz_cd_avg
s6 ( ) 6.26MPa =

The calculation for the segment ij is conducted in a similar manner as for the segment
ij and the shear stress is symmetric.

B.5.b.6 Calculation of the Shear Stress on Area A4 (see Figure 7.2.7.k)

The horizontal cut 4-4 is made at distance s3 measured from g and increasing towards
f.

0
_
<
S z
M 0 >
x
0
_
<
S y
V 0 *
_ _
=< = x V M
S y S z
0
_ _ _
< + =
+ S z S z x S z
M M M 0 <
+ x x
F
S z x S z
M M
_ _
>
+

x x x
F F >
+
0 > H
0 > H 0
_
>
avr yx
q 0
_
>
avr yx
0
_
>
avr xy

Figure 7.2.7.k

t
gf
t
pl
:= t
ef

167

S
Zc_gf
s4 ( ) A
U12
y
C3
s4 t
pl
y
inf
b
f_U12
+
s4
2
+
|
\
|
.
+ :=

q
yx_gf
s4 ( )
V
y_S
S
Zc_gf
s4 ( )
I
Zc
yx_gf_avg
s4 ( )
q
yx_gf
s4 ( )
t
gf

cut g
s4 0 cm :=
S
Zc_gf
s4 ( ) 338.96 cm
3
=
q
yx_gf
s4 ( ) 140.908
kN
m
=
yx_gf_avg
s4 ( ) 14.091MPa =
xy_gf_avg
s4 ( )
yx_gf_avg
s4 ( ) :=
xy_gf_avg
s4 ( ) 14.091 MPa =

cut f
s4 y
inf
b
f_U12
+ := s4 18.339cm =
S
Zc_gf
s4 ( ) 507.116 cm
3
=
q
yx_gf
s4 ( ) 210.811
kN
m
=
yx_gf_avg
s4 ( ) 21.081MPa =
xy_gf_avg
s4 ( )
yx_gf_avg
s4 ( ) :=
xy_gf_avg
s4 ( ) 21.081MPa =


Problem 7.3.1 The cross-section of the wide-flange beam I40 made of structural steel,
shown in Figure 7.3.1, is subjected to pure bending. Alternatively considering the

168

situations pictured in Figures 7.3.1.a and 7.3.1.b and assuming that the allowable
bending normal stress is
allow
= 200 MPa, calculate: (a) the flexural stress and strain
distribution on the cross-section and (b) the maximum bending moment which can be
applied.

Figure 7.3.1

Problems 7.3.2 The cross-section shown in Figure 7.3.2 is subjected to pure bending.
Conduct the following tasks: (a) Draw the flexural stress and strain distributions
considering the following dimensions: b
f
= 20 cm, t
f
= 5 cm, h
w
=15 cm, and t
w
= 2
cm, (b) Calculate the capable bending moment of the cross-section if the allowable
tensile and compressive normal stress is
allow
= 220 MPa, and (c) Determine the
stresses at points A and B if a bending moment m kN M = 5 . 13 is acting on the cross-
section.

Figure 7.3.2

169

Problems 7.3.3 A wood beam made from three boards glued together to form a single
beam as shown in Figure 7.3.3 is subjected to pure bending. Obtain an analytical
expression for: (a) the tensile and compressive maximum stresses and draw the normal
stress distribution on the cross-section, (b) the total force acting on the top board and
(c) for a=10 cm calculate the capable bending moment if the allowable tensile and
compressive stresses are
all_tens
=35 MPa and
all_compr
=25 MPa, respectively.

Figure 7.3.3

Problems 7.3.4 An I shaped beam with unequal flanges, with dimensions as shown in
Figure 7.3.4, is subjected to a bending moment of magnitude of M=40 kN. Draw the
normal stress and strain distributions and calculate the maximum tensile and flexural
stresses on this cross-section.

Figure 7.3.4

170

Problem 7.3.5 If the allowable shear stress in the timber beam cross-section shown in
Figure 7.3.5 is
all
= 20 MPa, draw the shear stress diagram and calculate the
maximum transversal shear force V which can be sustained by the wood beam. For
calculation consider b=10 cm and h=15 cm, respectively.

Figure 7.3.5

Problem 7.3.6 Using Jurawskis Formula, determine an expression for the shear stress
at the neutral-axis of the circular and tubular cross-sections shown in Figure 7.3.6.
Conduct a numerical application for the following data: d=d
0
=10 cm and d
i
=5 cm.

Figure 7.3.6

Problem 7.3.7 The tee-shaped cross-section shown in Figure 7.3.7 is subjected to a
vertical shear force V. Calculate: (a) and draw the shear stress distribution and (b) the
vertical shear force carried by the web of the cross-section. Conduct a numerical
application for t=1 cm.

171

Figure 7.3.7

Problem 7.3.8 A vertical shear force V = 200 kN is applied to the cross-section shown
in Figure 7.3.8. Considering the following dimensions: h = 320 mm, h
w
= 300 mm,
b=160mm and t
w
= 8mm, calculate: (a) the distribution of the shear stress on the cross-
section and (b) the shear force carried by the web.

Figure 7.3.8

Problem 7.3.9 Two wide-flange beams I20 and I40, respectively, are subjected to the
same magnitude vertical shear force, V. Determine: (a) the distribution of the shear
stresses for each cross-section, (b) the maximum shear force allowed by each wide-
flange beam if the allowable shear stress is MPa
all
140 = , (c) the shear force carried
by the webs of each beam and (d) the ration of the maximum obtained shear stresses.

172

Figure 7.3.9

Problem 7.3.10 The channel cross-section shown in Figure 7.3.10 (dimensions in mm)
is subjected to a vertical shear force V = 10 kN. Calculate: (a) the shear stress
distribution on the cross-section, (b) the shear stress at points A and B and (c) the
vertical shear forces carried by the vertical positioned flanges.

Figure 7.3.10

Problem 7.3.11 Considering that the thin-wall closed cross-section shown in Figure
7.3.11 (dimensions in mm) is subjected to a vertical shear force V calculate: (a) the
shear stress distribution on the cross-section and (b) the vertical shear force carried by
the webs if the material has an allowable shear stress MPa
all
140 = .

173

Figure 7.3.11

Problem 7.3.12 The tubular thin-wall closed cross-sections shown in Figure 7.3.12 are
subjected to a vertical shear force V. Calculate the following: (a) the shear stress
distribution on the cross-sections, (b) the ratio of the maximum shear stresses and (c)
the ratio of the shear forces in the webs. Consider a numerical application for t=10
mm.

Figure 7.3.12

Problem 7.3.13 Repeat the calculations required in problem 7.3.9 for the cross-sections
shown in Figure 7.3.13. For numerical application consider a thickness t=1.5 cm.

174

Figure 7.3.13

Problem 7.3.14 Repeat the requirements of problem 7.3.13 considering the cross-
section shown in Figure 7.3.14.

Figure 7.3.14

Problem 7.3.15 The steel plate girder pictured in Figure 7.3.15 (all dimensions in mm)
is fabricated by welding together two horizontal plates to a vertical steel plate. Using
the dimensions in mm shown in Figure 7.3.15 and considering for the material an
allowable shear stress, MPa
all
140 = , (a) calculate the allowable shear force V
characterizing the cross-section and (b) size the welds considering an allowable shear
stress, MPa
weld all
150
_
= .

175

Figure 7.3.15

Problem 7.3.16 The tee-shaped steel beam shown in Figure 7.3.16, fabricated by
welding together two steel plates, is subjected to a vertical shear force V. Calculate: (a)
the distribution of the shear stress on the cross-section, (b) the allowable shear force
carried by the cross-section and (c) verify the welds (effective thickness mm t
eff
7 =
and MPa
weld all
160
_
= ).

Figure 7.3.16

Problem 7.3.17 The I36 steel wide-flange beam, shown in Figure 7.3.17, is
strengthened by welding on its flanges two additional 175 mm x 10 mm cover steel
plates. Considering that a vertical shear force V is acting on the cross-section centroid
calculate: (a) the shear stress distribution in the original and strengthened cross-
sections, (b) the allowable vertical shear forces if the material is characterized by an

176

allowable shear stress MPa
all
140 = , and (c) size the weds considering that the weld
shear stress is MPa
weld all
150
_
= .

Figure 7.3.17

Problem 7.3.18 An I26 steel wide-flange beam subjected to a vertical shear force V is
strengthened by bolting two additional U14 steel channels. The strengthened cross-
section is shown in Figure 7.3.18.

Figure 7.3.18

Calculate: (a) the shear stress distribution of the web of the original and strengthened
cross-sections and (b) the maximum allowable vertical shear force of the strengthened
cross-section if the bolts have a diameter mm
bolt
12 = , are longitudinally spaced at
mm s 100 = and are made of a material with allowable bearing and shear stresses of
MPa
bear all
400
_
= and MPa
shear all
130
_
= , respectively.

177

Problem 7.3.19 A steel beam is built up from a I40 wide-flange beam and two 155mm
x 15 mm cover plates as shown in Figure 7.3.19. Calculate the allowable shear force
and bending moment carried by the original and strengthened cross-sections
considering a material characterized by MPa
all
400 = , and MPa
all
160 = allowable
stresses. If the bolts are mm
bolt
15 = in diameter and are made of a material with
allowable bearing and shear stresses of MPa
bear all
400
_
= and MPa
shear all
130
_
=
find the required spacing between the bolts.

Figure 7.3.19

Problem 7.3.20 Two wood box beams, shown in Figure 7.3.20, have identical cross-
sections.

Figure 7.3.20

178

Considering a vertical shear force V = 5 kN and a bending moment M=50 KN*m
acting at the centroid of the cross-sections calculate: (a) the normal and shear stress
distributions on the cross-sections, (b) the maximum spacing between the nails for each
nail arrangement, considering that they are equally spaced at 50 mm and an individual
nail can carry an allowable shear force of 250 kN.

Problems 7.3.21 and 7.3.22 For the wood beams shown in Figures 7.3.21 and 7.3.22
calculate: (a) the internal resultants diagrams and draw their plots, (b) the distributions
of the normal tensile and compressive stresses corresponding to the cross-section
where the maximum stresses appear, (c) calculate the distribution of the shear stress in
the cross-section where the maximum shear stress appears, (d) verify the beam using
the following allowable stresses MPA
tens all
60
_
= , MPA
comps all
40
_
= , and
MPA
all
25 =
.

Figure 7.3.21

Figure 7.3.22

179

Problem 7.3.23 The timber beam shown in Figure 7.3.23, with 200 mm x 300 mm
rectangular cross-section, is subjected to the following vertical concentrated loads: P
B

= 15 kN and P
C
= 25 kN. Calculate: (a) the distribution of the normal bending stress in
the cross-section where the maximum bending moment appears, (b) the distribution of
the shear stress on the cross where the maximum appears and (c) verify the beam
considering the following allowable stresses: MPA
tens all
50
_
= , MPA
comps all
35
_
= ,
and MPA
all
25 =
.

.

Figure 7.3.23

Problem 7.3.24 The boxed type beam shown in Figure 7.3.25 is made of timber with
the following allowable stresses: MPA
tens all
50
_
= , MPA
comps all
35
_
= , and
MPA
all
25 = .

180

Figure 7.3.24

Calculate: (a) the distribution of the flexural stress in the cross-section where the
maximum appears, (b) the distribution of the shear stress on the cross where the
maximum appears and (c) verify the beam and (d) find the necessary spacing between
the nails if nails mm 2 =

and MPA
all
120 = are employed to realize the connection.

Problems 7.3.25 through 7.3.30 For the steel beams shown in Figures 7.3.25 and 7.3.30
calculate: (a) the internal resultants diagrams and draw their plots, (b) the distributions
of the normal tensile and compressive stresses corresponding to the cross-section
where maximum stresses appear, (c) calculate the distribution of the shear stress in the
cross-section where the maximum shear stress appears, (d) verify the beam using the
following allowable stresses MPA
all
210 = and MPA
all
160 = , and (d) assuming an
welded connection between the web and flanges with MPA weld
all
180 _ = size the
welds
.

Figure 7.3.25

181

Figure 7.3.26

Figure 7.3.27

Figure 7.3.28

Figure 7.3.29

182

Figure 7.3.30

Problem 7.3.31 and 7.3.32 The beams shown in Figures 7.3.31 and 7.3.32 are made of
I32 structural steel. Calculate: (a) the internal resultants diagrams and plot the
diagrams, (b) the flexural stress and shear stress distributions on the cross-section right
of B, (c) identify the cross-sections where the maximum normal and shear stresses are
and draw the corresponding distributions (d) verify the beam considering the following
allowable stresses MPA
all
210 = and MPA
all
160 = , (d) the vertical shear force in
the web.

Figure 7.3.31

Figure 7.3.32

183

Problems 7.3.33 through 6.3.35 The beams shown in Figures 7.3.33 through 6.3.35
have the cross-section made of I shape type laminated steel. Determine the profile
required if it is assumed that the allowable tensile and compressive stresses are both
equal to MPA
all
210 = and MPA
all
160 = . Draw the normal and shear stresses
diagrams in cross-section C.

Figure 7.3.33

Figure 7.3.34

Figure 7.3.35

184

Problem 7.3.36 The beam illustrated in Figure 7.3.36 is made of wood which allows
equal normal tensile and compressive stresses MPA
all
60 = and shear stress
MPA
all
40 = , respectively. Calculate the required dimensions for the cross-section,
assuming the ratio height to width is 1.5. Draw the corresponding normal stress and
shear stress diagrams for the cross-section located at the right of point C.

Figure 7.3.36

Problem 7.3.37 The laminated beam shown in Figure 7.3.37 is made by gluing together
n planks of width b and thickness t. Derive a formula for a cross-section with height
h=n*t and width b considering that the wood is characterized by the following
allowable stresses: tension MPA
tens all
60
_
= , compression MPA
comp all
50
_
= and
shear MPA
all
40 = , respectively. Assume that the thickness of the glue layer is
negligible and that the obtained laminated beam behaves like a compact ordinary wood
beam. Calculate the number of required planks to create the lightest timber beam. if the
fallowing data is considered: b = 200 mm, L= 5 m, P = 9 kN and t = 50 mm.

Figure 7.3.37

185

Problem 7.3.38 Locate the roller support B of the beam shown in Figure 7.3.38 such
that the beam AD has an equal magnitude of the maximum positive and negative
moments. Assuming P
A
= 30 kN, PC = 40 kN, L = 1.5 m and equal flexural tensile and
compressive stresses MPA
all
60 = for the steel, determine the required I shape.

Figure 7.3.38

Problem 7.3.39 An electrical switch is fabricated as shown in Figure 7.3.39. In the
on position the button D moves down and applies a vertical force P=50kN on the tip
C of the copper plate AC. Assuming that the plate AC has a rectangular cross-section
and the copper is characterized by the following allowable stresses MPA
all
100 =
and MPA
all
60 = , calculate the required dimensions of the cross-section.

Figure 7.3.39

186

Problem 7.3.40 and 7.3.41 The beams illustrated in Figures 7.3.40 and 7.3.41 are made
of rectangular wood which allows equal flexural tensile and compressive stresses
MPA
all
60 = and shear stress MPA
all
40 = . Calculate the required dimensions for
the rectangular cross-section, assuming the ratio height to width is 1.5.

Figure 7.3.40

Figure 7.3.41

Problem 7.3.42 through 7.3.44 The steel beams shown in Figures 7.3.42 through 7.3.44
are assembled from same type structural shapes. Determine the size of the necessary
structural shapes, neglecting the bolt existence and considering the following allowable
stresses for the steel: normal stress MPA
all
210 = and shear stress MPA
all
160 = .
Calculate the spacing between the bolts assuming a mm 12 = bolt diameter and the
following allowable stresses for the bolts: MPA
bearl al
360
_
= and
MPA
shear all
140
_
= .

187

Figure 7.3.42

Figure 7.3.43

Figure 7.3.44

Problem 7.3.45 through 7.3.49 The beams shown in Figures 7.3.45 through 7.3.49 are
made of structural steel characterized by following allowable stresses:
MPA
all
210 = and MPA
all
160 = . Calculate: (a) the internal resultants diagrams,
(b) the geometrical characteristics of the cross-section, (c) the flexural and shear stress
distribution in the cross-sections where the maximum values are obtained, (d) the
maximum distributed force w carried by the beam, (e) the vertical shear force in the
web and (f) the effective thickness of the weld considering MPA weld
all
180 _ = .

188

Figure 7.3.45

Figure 7.3.46

Figure 7.3.47

Figure 7.3.48

189

Figure 7.3.49

Problem 7.3.50 Two wood boards are attached together by screws, spaced at regular
intervals of s=10 cm along the length of the beam, to form the inverted T-shaped beam
shown in Figure 7.3.50. Each screw has an allowable shear capacity of 2 k N. Calculate
the maximum allowable load P carried by the composed beam.

Figure 7.3.50

Problem 7.3.51 An inverted structural steel tee beam with dimensions shown in Figure
73.51 is subjected at end C to a concentrated force P.

Figure 7.3.51

190

What is the maximum load P assuming a material with allowable stresses of
MPA
all
210 = and MPA
all
160 = is used? Repeat the calculation for the case when
the allowable flexural tensile and compressive stresses are MPA tens
all
180 _ = and
MPA
comp all
90
_
= , respectively. Draw the stress distributions corresponding to the
cross-section located at the left of point B. Size the welds if MPA weld
all
180 _ = .

Problem 7.3.52 Repeat the calculations required at problem 7.3.51 considering the
beam shown in Figure 7.3.52.

Figure 7.3.52

Problem 7.3.53 A timber beam, with 15cm x 25cm nominal dimensions, is supported
and loaded as shown in Figure 7.3.53. If the allowable flexural and shear stresses of the
wood are: MPA tens
all
60 _ = , MPA
comp all
40
_
= and MPA
all
25 = , calculate the
maximum load P possible to be applied to this beam.

Figure 7.3.53

191

Problem 7.3.54 The simply supported beam shown in Figure 7.3.54 has a rectangular
cross-section. Consider for the wood the following allowable stresses:
MPA tens
all
60 _ = , MPA
comp all
40
_
= and MPA
all
25 = . Calculate: (a) P
,
based
on the allowable flexural stress, (b) P
,
based on the allowable shear stress and (c) the
ratio P
/ P

of the previously calculated loads. Discuss the implications of the beam
dimensions and calculate the length L for which the shear-stress or the flexural stress
criterion governs.

Figure 7.3.54

Problem 7.3.55 As pictured in Figure 7.3.55, a set of wheels on the one-axle railway
car passes directly over one of the rectangular cross ties with 18cm height and 20 cm
width.

Figure 7.3.55

If the following calculation scheme, as pictured in Figure 7.3.55a, is assumed, then the
load exercised by each wheel is represented by a uniformly distributed load p
w
= 500
kN/m applied over the 0.3m width of the tie plate and while the cross tie distributes this
load as an uniformly distributed pressure p
b
to the ballast on which the cross tie rests.

192

Figure 7.3.55.a

Calculate the following: (a) the allowable distributed load p
b
, (b) the cross-section
internal resultants diagrams, (c) the maximum normal bending stress and (d) maximum
shear stress in the wood cross tie.

193
CHAPTER 8 Bending of Plane Linear
Beams Deflection

The application of the second-order and forth-order differential equations of the
deflection of linear beams is presented.


The equation relating the bending moment ) (x M
z
with the radius of curvature
) (x is:
) ( * ) ( *
) (
1
) ( x I x E
x
x M
z z
= (8.1)

where ) (x E - the modulus of elasticity;
) (x I
z
- the moment of inertia about the horizontal centroidal axis of the cross-
section;
) (x M
z
- the cross-sections bending moment;
) (x - the radius of curvature of the deflection curve.

Note: If the material is a homogeneous, linear elastic one and the beam is of uniform
cross-section, the product
z
I E * is called the flexural rigidity and is
constant. Then,
z z
I E
x
x M * *
) (
1
) (
= (8.2)

The sign of the deflection v(x), expressed by equation (8.1) or (8.2) is determined
using the sign convention established during the theoretical analysis induced by the
bending deformation , Lecture 7, and re-plotted below in Figure 8.1.

Note: The moment diagram is always plotted at the beam side where the fibers are
subjected to tension, while the curvature center is placed on the opposite side. When

194
the bending moment is positive the deflection curvature is concave, while for the
negative bending moment the deflection curvature is convex.

Figure 8.1 Sign Convention for Beams in Bending

The relation between the radius of curvature ) (x and the deflection ) (x v is
established in calculus as:

2
3
2
2
2
] )
) (
( 1 [
) (
) (
1
dx
x dv
dx
x v d
x
+
=
(8.3)

where:
dx
x dv
x
) (
) ( tan = (8.4)

Under the small displacement assumption the first derivative is a very small value:
1
) (
<<
dx
x dv
(8.5)

and consequently, the products of the deflection derivative can be neglected
0
) (
2
|
.
|
\
|
dx
x dv
(8.6)
and the angle approximated by its tangent:
dx
x dv
x x
) (
) ( tan ) ( = (8.7)

195
Note: Relation (8.7) is valid if the influence of the shear force on the deflection ) (x v
is neglected.
Substituting (8.6) into equation (8.3) a more simplified relation between the radius of
curvature ) (x and the deflection ) (x v is obtained:
2
2
) (
) (
1
dx
x v d
x

(8.8)

The moment-curvature equation, a second order differential equation, is obtained
substituting equation (8.8) into (8.1):
) ( * ) ( * ) ( ) (
"
x v x I x E x M
z
= (8.9)

where the notation
2
2
"
) (
) (
dx
x v d
x v = is employed.

Consider the differential relation, previously obtained from the equilibrium of the
beam infinitesimal volume element, between the transverse loading ) ( x p
n
and the
cross-section stress resultants, the shear force ) ( x V
y
and bending moment ) ( x M
z
:
) (
) (
x p
dx
x dV
n
y
= (8.10)
) (
) (
x V
dx
x dM
y
z
= (8.11)

Note: Distributed normal load ) ( x p
n
acting on the longitudinal axis Ox is orientated
in the positive direction of the vertical axis Oy, 0 ) ( > x p
n
.

Differentiating the moment-curvature equation (8.9) and using equations (8.10) and
(8.11) two new differential equations, the shear-deflection and load-deflection
equations, are obtained:
)]' ( " * ) ( * ) ( [ ) ( x v x I x E x V
z y
= (8.12)
)]" ( " * ) ( * ) ( [ ) ( x v x I x E x p
z n
= (8.13)

The load-deflection equation (8.13) is a forth-order differential equation.

196
If the beam is made from a homogeneous linear elastic material and has a constant
cross-section in the continuity interval of the bending moment or transversal loading
equations (8.9) and (8.13) become:
) ( * * ) (
"
x v I E x M
z
= (8.14)
) ( * * ) ( x v I E x p
IV
z n
= (8.15)

where constant * =
z
I E .

The continuity intervals pertinent to the functions involved in the differential
equations (8.14) and (8.15), the bending moment ) ( x M
z
and transverse load ) ( x p
n
,
must be recognized in order for the integration process to be properly conducted. In
the general case, when the flexural rigidity
z
I E * is not constant, its functional
continuity must be also considered in the integration process.

8.1.1 Integration of the Moment - Curvature Differential Equation (8.9)

Integration of the second-order differential equation (8.9) on an interval of continuity
for the bending moment ) ( x M
z
yields the following relations:
1
'
*
) ( * ) (
) (
) ( ) ( C dx
x I x E
x M
x v x
z
z
+ = = (8.16)
2 1
* * *
) ( * ) (
) (
) ( C x C dx dx
x I x E
x M
x v
z
z
+ + =

(8.17)

For the case of a beam with constant flexural rigidity const I E
z
= ) * ( , the integrals
expressed in equations (8.16) and (8.17) simplify as follows:
1
'
* ) (
*
1
) ( ) ( C dx x M
I E
x v x
z
z

+ = = (8.18)
2 1
* * * ) (
*
1
) ( C x C dx dx x M
I E
x v
z
z
+ + =

(8.19)

The integration constants
1
C and
2
C are calculated by imposing the boundary
conditions of the specific continuity interval. The boundary conditions are

197
represented by known values of the rotation and deflection at the end locations of the
bending moment ) ( x M
z
continuity interval.
For practical purposes the above formulae (8.16) through (8.19) are re-written
considering that the values of the rotation
0
) 0 ( = = x and deflection
0
) 0 ( v x v = = ,
respectively, at the beginning of the continuity interval, at 0 = x , are known values.
Consequently, the expressions (8.16), (8.17), (8.18) and (8.19), respectively, become:
0
'
*
) ( * ) (
) (
) ( ) (

+ = = dx
x I x E
x M
x v x
z
z
(8.20)
0 0
* * *
) ( * ) (
) (
) ( v x dx dx
x I x E
x M
x v
z
z
+ + =

(8.21)
and
0
'
* ) (
*
1
) ( ) (

+ = = dx x M
I E
x v x
z
z
(8.22)
0 0
* * * ) (
*
1
) ( v x dx dx x M
I E
x v
z
z
+ + =

(8.23)

8.1.2 Integration of the Load-Deflection Differential Equation (8.13)

Successive integration of the forth-order differential equation (8.13) in a continuity
interval of the transverse loading function yields the following relations:
1
' "
* ) ( )] ( * ) ( * ) ( [ ) ( C dx x p x v x I x E x V
n z y
+ = =

(8.24)
2 1
"
* * * ) ( ) ( * ) ( * ) ( ) ( C x C dx dx x p x v x I x E x M
n z z
+ + = =

(8.25)
3 2 1
3
'
*
) ( * ) (
1
* *
) ( * ) (
*
* ] * * ) ( [
) ( * ) (
1
*
) ( * ) (
) (
) ( ) (
C dx
x I x E
C dx
x I x E
x
C
dx dx dx x p
x I x E
C dx
x I x E
x M
x v x
n
z
z
z
+ + +
+ =
= + = =

(8.26)
4 3
2 1
*
* *
) ( * ) (
1
* * *
) ( * ) (
*
* * * * ) (
) ( * ) (
1
) (
C x C
dx dx
x I x E
C dx dx
x I x E
x
C
dx dx dx dx x p
x I x E
x v
n
z
+ +
+ + +
+ =

(8.27)

198
1
C ,
2
C ,
3
C and
4
C are calculated by imposing the boundary
conditions applicable to the specific problem.
For the case of a beam with constant flexural rigidity const I E
z
= ) * ( , the integrals
expressed in equations (8.24) through (8.27) may be considerably simplified as
follows:

1
' ' '
* ) ( ) ( * * ) ( C dx x p x v I E x V
n z y
+ = =

(8.28)
2 1
"
* * * ) ( ) ( * * ) ( C x C dx dx x p x v I E x M
n z z
+ + = =

(8.29)
3
2
2 1
3
'
*
*
2
* * * ) (
*
1
* ) (
*
1
) ( ) (
C
x C
x
C
dx dx dx x p
I E
C dx x M
I E
x v x
n
z
z
z
+
(
(
(
+
+ +
=
= + = =

(8.30)
4 3
2 2 3 1
*
*
2
*
6
* * * * ) (
*
1
) (
C x C
x
C
x
C
dx dx dx dx x p
I E
x v
n
z
+ +
+
(
+ + =

(8.31)

1
C ,
2
C ,
3
C and
4
C are calculated by imposing the
boundary conditions of the specific continuity interval. The boundary conditions are
represented by known values of the shear force, bending moment, rotation and
deflection at the end locations of the transverse load ) ( x p
n
continuity interval.

For practical purposes the above formulae (8.24) through (8.31) are re-written
considering that the values of the shear force
0
) 0 ( V x V
y
= = , bending moment
0
) 0 ( M x M
z
= = , the rotation
0
) 0 ( = = x and deflection
0
) 0 ( v x v = = ,
respectively, at the beginning of the continuity interval, at 0 = x , are known values.
Consequently, the expressions (8.24) and (8.27) and (8.28) and (8.31), respectively,
become:
0
* ) ( ) ( V dx x p x V
n y
+ =
(8.32)
0 0
* * * ) ( ) ( M x V dx dx x p x M
n z
+ + =

(8.33)

199
0
0 0
*
) ( * ) (
1
* *
) ( * ) (
*
* ] * * ) ( [
) ( * ) (
1
) (
+
+ + +
+ =

dx
x I x E
M dx
x I x E
x
V
dx dx dx x p
x I x E
x
n
z
(8.34)
0 0
0 0
*
* *
) ( * ) (
1
* * *
) ( * ) (
*
* * * * ) (
) ( * ) (
1
) (
v x
dx dx
x I x E
M dx dx
x I x E
x
V
dx dx dx dx x p
x I x E
x v
n
z
+ +
+ + +
+ =

(8.35)
and
0
* ) ( ) ( V dx x p x V
n y
+ =
(8.36)
0 0
* * * ) ( ) ( M x V dx dx x p x M
n z
+ + =
(8.37)
0 0
2 0
* *
2
* * * ) (
*
1
) ( +
(
+ + =

x M x
V
dx dx dx x p
I E
x
n
z
(8.38)
0 0
2 0 3 0
*
*
2
*
6
* * * * ) (
*
1
) (
v x
x
M
x
V
dx dx dx dx x p
I E
x v
n
z
+ +
+
(
+ + =

(8.39)

General Conclusion: The moment-curvature equation (8.9) can be used only if the
bending moment ) ( x M
z
variation is known, in the case of statically determinate
structures. The load-deflection curve equation (8.13) requires the variation of
transverse load ) ( x p
n
to be known and, consequently, can be used for either
statically determinate or indeterminate beams.

8.1.3 Boundary and Continuity Integration Conditions

As previously stated, the functions (8.16) though (8.27) obtained above, represent the
general solutions. Only after the boundary conditions are imposed and the integration
constants are determined, the solutions become representative for a specific variation
interval. The boundary conditions commonly encountered in the application of the
equations (8.20) and (8.23) or equations (8.32) through (8.39) are presented in Table
8.1.

200
Table 8.1 Boundary Conditions

Table 8.2 Continuity Conditions

201
In general, the transverse load ) (x p
n
and the bending moment ) ( x M
z
functions for a
particular loaded beam are described by a number of continuity intervals which are
priory determined to the beginning of the integration. Therefore, the continuity
conditions at the common ends of the intervals must be described in order for the
constants to be calculated. Each continuity interval is treated as an independent
interval and then, the boundary and continuity conditions are applied. The most
common continuity conditions are summarized in Table 8.2.

8.1.4 Superposition Method

In the technical literature, a large number of deflection ) ( x v and rotation ) ( x curves
corresponding to simple cases of restrained beams subjected to simple types of
loadings are calculated and tabulated. Tables T1 and T2 of the Appendix A contain
frequently encountered cases of loadings pertinent to the cases of cantilever, simply
supported and fixed-fixed beams. Due to the linearity of the differential equations
describing the deflection curve, a complicated case can be decomposed in simple
cases with deflection curves tabulated. By summation of these deflection functions
pertinent to each simple loading case, the final expression of the deflection curve is
obtained. This method is extensively used in structural engineering practice.


Problem 8.2.1 Considering the cantilever beam illustrated in Figure 7.2.1 calculate:
(a) the radius of curvature, (b) the deflection function and (c) the maximum
displacement.
.

A.1 The cantilever is subjected to pure bending conditions. Consequently the Naviers
formula is applied.

M
0
20 kN m := - the bending moment

202
L 5 m :=

- cantilever length
d 120 mm :=

- edge length
E 200 GPa :=


B. Calculations

B.1 Calculation of the Radius of Curvature

The radius of curvature ) ( x

is calculated using the following formula:
x ( )
E
M
z
x ( )
I
zc

where:
zc
I is the moment of inertia of the entire cross-section about the central axis z.
The central moment of inertia is calculated:
I
zc
d
4
12
:=
4
4
12
12
cm I
zc
1.728 10
3
cm
4
=

The radius of curvature

) ( x

is then obtained as:

E
M
0
I
zc
:=
4 8
3
9
10 * 1728 *
* 10 * 20
10 * 200
m
m N
Pa
172.8m =

Note: the radius of curvature

) ( x

is constant. It can be concluded that when the
beam is in a pure bending condition the radius of curvature is always constant and
the defection curve is a circle.

The curvature

) ( x k

is:
k x ( )
1
x ( )

1
8 . 172
1
m k 5.787 10
3
m
-1
=

B.2 Calculation of Maximum Displacement

Because the bending moment is known and constant the second-order differential
equation of the deflection curve is used:

203
2
x
v x ( )
d
d
2 M
0
E I
zc

By integration the slope

) ( ' ) ( ) ( x v x v
dx
d
x = = and the vertical displacement

) ( x v are

obtained as:

x
v x ( )
d
d
M
0
E I
zc
x C
0
+

v x ( )
M
0
2E I
zc
x
2
C
0
x + C
1
+

where

0
C

and

1
C

are integration constants, which are calculated from the boundary
conditions imposed at 0 = x :
v' 0 ( ) 0 C
0
0
v 0 ( ) 0 C
1
0

Substituting the constants , the expression of the vertical displacement is:
v x ( )
M
0
2E I
zc
x
2

The maximum vertical displacement

B
v x v = ) (

is obtained at the cantilever tip
m L x 5 = =

2 2
4 8 9
3
5 *
10 * 1728 * 10 * 200 * 2
* 10 * 20
m
m Pa
m N
v
B
0.072m =

To verify the vertical displacement formula obtained above, the function ) ( x v is also
calculated employing Mathcad differential equation package, and then plotted:

l
0
L
1 m
:=

Given

204
2
x
v x ( )
d
d
2 M
0
E I
zc
0

v 0 ( ) 0

v' 0 ( ) 0

v Odesolve x l
0
,
( )
:=

0 1 2 3 4 5
0
0.018
0.036
0.054
0.072
v x ( )
x

B.1 Maximum Displacement

The maximum value
B
v x v = ) ( obtained from the graph is:
v
B
v 5 ( ) m := v
B
0.072m =

Problem 8.2.2 The deflection v(x) of the simply supported beam loaded as illustrated
in Figure 8.2.2 is:

(
(
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
.
|
\
|
=
L
x
L
x
L
x
I E
L M
x v
2 3
2
0
* 3 * 2 *
* * 3
*
) (

205
Considering that the flexural rigidity of the beam constant * =
z
I E along its entire
length, obtain the following: (a) the expressions of the rotation ) ( x , shear force V(x)
and bending moment M(x), (c) the expressions of the applied moment M
1
and the
reactions V
1
and

V
2
and (d) the position and maximum absolute rotation and vertical
deflection,
max
and
max
v , respectively. Plot all the graphs using the Mathcad graphic
capabilities.

Figure 8.2.2


A.1. The beam illustrated in Figure 8.2.2 is investigated using the moment - curvature
second-order differential equation (8.9) since it is a statically determinate system.
Consequently, the equation (8.14) is employed.

A.2 The boundaries are:
- at point 1 v
1
0;
- at point 2 v
3
0.

A.3 In the absence of any transversal distributed force, the beam is characterized by
only one continuity interval, the interval 1-2.

A.4 For simplicity of the calculations the following notation is used:
z
I E
K
*
1
=

206
B. Calculations

B.1 Calculation of the Rotation, Bending Moment and Shear Force

The expression of the vertical deflection v(x) characterizing the beam shown in Figure
8.2.1 is assumed known on the continuity interval 1-2:
v x ( )
M
0
l
2
3 E I
2
x
l
|
\
|
.
3
3
x
l
|
\
|
.
2
+
x
l
(
(

where x represents the position of a particular cross-section located between the end
points 1 and 2 and is measured starting from point 1. Replacing
z
I E
K
*
1
= into the
expression of the vertical deflection v(x) a new expression is obtained:

v x ( )
M
0
l
2
3
2
x
l
|
\
|
.
3
3
x
l
|
\
|
.
2
+
x
l
(
(
K

Using the formula (8.7) the rotation function ) ( x is calculated:
x ( )
x
v x ( )
d
d

The bending moment function M(x) is obtained employing the equation (8.9) as
follows:
K M x ( )
2
x
v x ( )
d
d
2
x
x ( )
d
d

M x ( ) 2
M
0
l
2 x l + ( )

207
The shear force V(x) and the distributed transversal load p(x) are calculated by
successive differentiation from the bending moment function M(x):
V x ( )
x
M x ( )
d
d

V x ( )
x
2
M
0
l
2 x l + ( )
(
(
d
d
V x ( ) 4
M
0
l

p x ( )
x
V x ( )
d
d

p x ( )
x
4
M
0
l
\
|
.
d
d
p x ( ) 0

Note: The absence of the transversal distributed force p(x) is verified by the above
obtained results.

B.2 Calculation of the Reaction Forces
1
V and
2
V

The reaction forces are calculated particularizing the position x of the cross-section
into the shear force function V(x):

- at point 1
V
1
V x 0 ( ) V
1
4
M
0
l
substitute x 0 , V
1
4
M
0
l

- at point 2
V
2
V x l ( )
V
2
4
M
0
l
substitute x l , V
2
4
M
0
l

B.3 Calculation of the Concentrated Moment
1
M

The bending moment acting at point 1 is calculated:
M
1
M x 0 ( ) M
1
2
M
0
l
2 x l + ( ) substitute x 0 , M
1
2 M
0

To verify the validity of the above obtained moment formula, the value of the
concentrated moment acting at point 2 is calculated:

208
M
2
M x l ( ) M
2
2
M
0
l
2 x l + ( ) substitute x l , M
2
2 M
0

B.4 Important Values of the Rotation ) ( x and Vertical Deflection ) ( x v Functions

The value of the rotations of the beam at point 1 and 2 are:
1
1
3
M
0
l
6 x
2
6 x l l
2
+
( )
K substitute x 0 ,
1
1
3
M
0
l K

2
1
3
M
0
l
6 x
2
6 x l l
2
+
( )
K substitute x l ,
2
1
3
M
0
l K

The rotation function

) ( x is described by a second-order polynomial and
consequently, a local maximum value, located between point 1 and 2, is expected.
The location is obtained:

x
x ( )
d
d
0
x
1
3
M
0
l
6 x
2
6 x l l
2
+
( )
K
(
(
d
d
0 solve x ,
1
2
l

Substituting the above calculated location into the rotation expression the maximum
value is obtained:
max
1
3
M
0
l
6 x
2
6 x l l
2
+
( )
K substitute x
1
2
l ,
max
1
6
M
0
l K

The values of the vertical displacement at points 1 and 2 are known and the
calculation is conducted just for verification purposes:
v
1
M
0
l
2
3
2
x
l
|
\
|
.
3
3
x
l
|
\
|
.
2
+
x
l
(
(
K substitute x 0 , v
1
0

v
2
M
0
l
2
3
2
x
l
|
\
|
.
3
3
x
l
|
\
|
.
2
+
x
l
(
(
K substitute x l , v
2
0

The vertical deflection function

) ( x v is described by a third-order polynomial and
consequently, local extremum values, located between point 1 and 2, are expected.

209
The locations are obtained as:
x
v x ( )
d
d
0
x
M
0
l
2
3
2
x
l
|
\
|
.
3
3
x
l
|
\
|
.
2
+
x
l
(
(
(
(
d
d
0 solve x ,
1
2
1
6
3 +
|
\
|
.
l
1
2
1
6
3
|
\
|
.
l
(
(
(
(

The value of the vertical deflection v(x) at those locations is calculated:

B.5 Numeric Application

The numeric application is conducted for the following data:
K K
1
N m
2
:=

l 6 m :=

M
0
1000 N m :=

The shear force, bending moment, rotation and vertical deflection functions are
particularized for the data set indicated above:

210
V x ( ) 4
M
0
l
substitute M
0
1000 N m ,
substitute l 6 m ,
float 4 ,
V x ( ) 666.7 N

M x ( ) 2
M
0
l
2 x l + ( )
substitute M
0
1000 N m ,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute x x m ,
simplify
collect m ,
float 4 ,
M x m ( ) 666.7 N m x 3. ( )

Numerical values of the above functions calculated in the important points of their
definition are:
V
1
4
M
0
l
substitute M
0
1000 N m ,
substitute l 6 m ,
float 4 ,
V
1
666.7 N

211
V
2
4
M
0
l
substitute M
0
1000 N m ,
substitute l 6 m ,
float 4 ,
V
2
666.7 N

M
1
2
M
0
l
2 x l + ( )
substitute M
0
1000 N m ,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute x 6 m ,
float 4 ,
M
1
2000. N m

1
1
3
M
0
l
6 x
2
6 x l l
2
+
( )
K
substitute M
0
1000 N m ,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute x 0 m ,
substitute K K
1
N m
2
,
simplify
float 4 ,
1
2000. K

2
1
3
M
0
l
6 x
2
6 x l l
2
+
( )
K
substitute M
0
1000 N m ,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute x 6 m ,
substitute K K
1
N m
2
,
simplify
float 4 ,
2
2000. K

x
1
2
l substitute l 6 m , x
3 m

max
1
3
M
0
l
6 x
2
6 x l l
2
+
( )
K
substitute M
0
1000 N m ,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute x 3 m ,
substitute K K
1
N m
2
,
simplify
float 4 ,
max
1000. K

212
v
1
M
0
l
2
3
2
x
l
|
\
|
.
3
3
x
l
|
\
|
.
2
+
x
l
(
(
K
substitute M
0
1000 N m ,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute x 0 m ,
substitute K K
1
N m
2
,
simplify
float 4 ,
v
1
0

v
2
M
0
l
2
3
2
x
l
|
\
|
.
3
3
x
l
|
\
|
.
2
+
x
l
(
(
K
substitute M
0
1000 N m ,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute x 6 m ,
substitute K K
1
N m
2
,
simplify
float 4 ,
v
2
0
x
v_1
1
2
1
6
3
|
\
|
.
l
substitute l 6 m ,
simplify
float 4 ,
x
v_1
1.268 m

x
v_2
1
2
1
6
3 +
|
\
|
.
l
substitute l 6 m ,
simplify
float 4 ,
x
v_2
4.732 m

213

B.6 Plotted Diagrams

The shear force, bending moment, rotation and vertical displacement functions
obtained in the previous section are plotted using the Mathcad graphical capabilities.

l 6 m :=

M
0
1000 N m :=

nint 14 :=

nint1 3 :=

nint2 nint 2 nint1 := nint2 8 =

x
v_1
1
2
1
6
3
|
\
|
.
l := x
v_1
1.268m =
x
v_2
1
2
1
6
3 +
|
\
|
.
l := x
v_2
4.732m =

lint2 l x
v_1
l + x
v_2
( )
:= lint2 3.464m =

dlint1
x
v_1
nint1
:= dlint1 0.423m =

dlint2
lint2
nint2
:= dlint2 0.433m =

pos
0
0 :=
position of the origin point

Initial values:

shear
0
2000
3
:=
shear
0
666.667 = mom
0
2000 :=

214

rot
0
2000 :=

disp
0
0 :=

i 1 nint .. :=

dlint
i
if i 3 dlint1 , if i 12 dlint1 , dlint2 , ( ) , ( )
1
m
:=

pos
i
pos
i 1
dlint
i
+ :=

shear
i
shear
0
:=

mom
i
2000
3
pos
i
3 ( ) :=

rot
i
1000
3
pos
i
( )
2
6 pos
i
6 +
:=

disp
i
1000
9
pos
i
pos
i
( )
2
9 pos
i
18 +
:=

Position (m) Shear Force (kN) Bending Moment (kN*m)

pos
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
0
0.423
0.845
1.268
1.701
2.134
2.567
3
3.433
3.866
4.299
4.732
5.155
5.577
6
=

shear
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
-666.667
=

mom
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
210
3
1.71810
3
1.43610
3
1.15510
3
866.025
577.35
288.675
2.96110
-13
-288.675
-577.35
-866.025
-1.15510
3
-1.43610
3
-1.71810
3
-210
3
=

215
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams
Position (m)
S
h
e
a
r

F
o
r
c
e

(
k
N
)
,

B
e
n
d
i
n
g

M
o
m
e
n
t

(
k
N
*
m
)
shear
mom
pos

Position (m) Rotation (rad) Vert Displacement (m)

pos
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
0
0.423
0.845
1.268
1.701
2.134
2.567
3
3.433
3.866
4.299
4.732
5.155
5.577
6
=

rot
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
-210
3
-1.21410
3
-547.578
0
437.5
750
937.5
110
3
937.5
750
437.5
1.18410
-12
-547.578
-1.21410
3
-210
3
=

disp
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
0
-675.055
-1.04310
3
-1.15510
3
-1.05510
3
-793.857
-423.992
0
423.992
793.857
1.05510
3
1.15510
3
1.04310
3
675.055
4.73710
-12
=

216
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
Rotation and Vert Displacement Diagrams
Position (m)
R
o
t
a
t
i
o
n
/
K

(
r
a
d
)
,

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
/
K

(
m
)
rot
disp
pos

Problem 8.2.3 The beam illustrated in Figure 8.2.3 has a constant cross-section along
its entire length. Using the second-order differential equation conduct the following
tasks: (a) derive mathematical expressions for rotation ) ( x and vertical deflection
) ( x v functions, (b) develop expressions for rotation and vertical deflection
characterizing all important points of the beam and (c) conduct a numeric application
considering
m
kN
p * 8 = and m l * 6 = .

Figure 8.2.3

217

A.1. The beam illustrated in Figure 8.2.3 is investigated using the moment- curvature
second-order differential equation (8.9). The differential equation (8.9) can be used
only if the investigated system is a statically determinate system. The beam proposed
for investigation is characterized by a constant cross-section along the entire length
and represents a statically determinate system. Consequently, the equations (8.22) and
(8.23) are employed.

- at point 1 v
1
0;
- at point 3 v
3
0.

A.3 The acting load is characterized by two continuity intervals, 1-2 and 2-3. In the
absence of concentrated bending moments, it is expected that the bending moment
function is also characterized by the same continuity intervals. This fact will be
confirmed by the calculations. Consequently, two continuity equations representing
the equality of the rotations and deflections at the left and right locations of the
common end, point 2, can be written:
- v
2_12
v
2_23
;
-
2_12

2_23
.

A.4 For simplicity of the calculations the following notation is used in the formulae
(8.22) and (8.23):
z
I E
K
*
1
=
B. Calculations

B.1. Calculation of the reactions forces
It is obvious that in the absence of the horizontal load the horizontal component of the
reaction force existing at point 1 of the beam is null. The magnitudes of the two
vertical reactions forces
1
V and
3
V are calculated as:

218
0
3
=
z
M V
1
l p
l
2
3
4
l 0 solve V
1
,
3
8
p l

0
1
=
z
M V
3
l p
l
2
1
4
l + 0 solve V
3
,
1
8
p l

The expressions of the obtained vertical reaction forces are:
V
1
3
8
p l

V
3
1
8
p l

B.2 Calculation of the shear forces and bending moments

B.2.a Continuity Interval 1-2 ]
2
, 0 [
l
x
The origin of the continuity interval 1-2 is point 1. The dummy variable ]
2
, 0 [
l
x is
specific to the investigated interval and changes from interval to interval. The
expressions of the shear force ) (
12
x V and bending moment ) (
12
x M on the continuity
interval 1-2 are:
V
12
x ( ) V
1
x p
d + substitute V
1
3
8
p l , V
12
x ( )
3
8
p l p x

and
M
12
x ( ) M
1
x V
12
x ( )
d +
M
12
x ( ) M
1
x
3
8
p l p x
|
\
|
.
(
(
d + substitute M
1
0 , M
12
x ( )
3
8
p l x
1
2
p x
2

where
l p x V V * *
8
3
) 0 (
12 1
= = = is the shear force at point 1

219
0 ) 0 (
12 1
= = = x M M is the bending moment at point 1

The values of the shear force and bending moment at the end of the continuity
interval, the point 2 )
2
(
l
x = are calculated:
V
2
V
12
x ( )
substitute V
12
x ( )
3
8
l x
|
\
|
.
p ,
substitute x
l
2
,
V
2
1
8
p l
M
2
M
12
x ( )
substitute M
12
x ( )
3
8
p l x
1
2
p x
2
,
substitute x
l
2
,
M
2
1
16
p l
2

The location
max
x and the value of the maximum bending moment
max _ 12
M are
obtained:
V
12
x ( ) 0
3
8
p l p x 0 solve x ,
3
8
l x
max
3
8
l

M
12_max
3
8
p l x
1
2
p x
2
substitute x
3
8
l , M
12_max
9
128
p l
2

B.2.b Continuity Interval 2-3 ]
2
, 0 [
l
x
The origin of the continuity interval 2-3 is point 2. The dummy variable ]
2
, 0 [
l
x is
specific to the investigated interval and changes from interval to interval. The
expressions of the shear force ) (
23
x V and bending moment ) (
23
x M on the continuity
interval 2-3 are:
V
23
x ( ) V
2
x 0
d + substitute V
2
1
8
p l , V
23
x ( )
1
8
p l

and
M
23
x ( ) M
2
x V
23
x ( )
d +

220

where
l p
l
x V V * *
8
1
)
2
(
12 2
= = = the shear force at point 2 (previously calculated)

2
12 2
* *
16
1
)
2
( l p
l
x M M = = = the bending moment at point 2
The values of the shear force and bending moment at the end of the continuity
interval, the point 3 )
2
(
l
x = are calculated:
V
3
V
23
x ( )
substitute V
23
x ( )
1
8
p l ,
substitute x
l
2
,
V
3
1
8
p l

M
3
M
23
x ( )
substitute M
23
x ( )
1
16
p l
2
1
8
p l x ,
substitute x
l
2
,
M
3
0

Note: The bending moment function is characterized by two continuity interval. The
expression of the bending moments is known and consequently, the integration of the
equations (8.22) and (8.23) can proceed.

B.3 Calculation of the rotation and deflection curves

2
, 0 [
l
x
The initial conditions for the interval 1-2 are:
1
real

unknown value and must be calculated

221
v
1
0
The expressions of the rotation ) (
12
x and deflection ) (
12
x v curves are:
12
x ( )
1
K x M
12
x ( )
d +

12
x ( )
1
K x
3
8
p l x
1
2
p x
2

|
\
|
.
(
(
d +

12
x ( )
1
K
3
16
p l x
2
1
6
p x
3

|
\
|
.
+

and
v
12
x ( ) v
1
x
12
x ( )
(
(
d +

The rotation and deflection at end 2 are obtained:

222
2
, 0 [
l
x
The initial conditions for the interval 2-3 are calculated using the continuity of the
deformation in the common point 2 identified in section A.3:
2

1
5
192
K p l
3
+

v
2
1
2

1
l
1
192
K p l
4
+

The expressions of the rotation ) (
23
23
x v curves are:
23
x ( )
2
K x M
23
x ( )
d +

and
v
23
x ( ) v
2
x
23
x ( )
(
(
d +

223

The rotation and deflection at end 3 are obtained:

Note: It can be remarked that the expressions of the rotations and deflections pertinent
to both continuity intervals, 1-2 and 2-3, are dependent on the unknown rotation
1
.

B.4. Solution
The only unknown value, the rotation
1
, is obtained by imposing the second boundary
condition represented by the nullity of the displacement in point 3. Consequently, the
unknown rotation
1
is found:

224
v
3
0
3
128
K p l
4

1
l + 0 solve
1
,
3
128
K p l
3

1
3
128
K p l
3

B.5. Final Expressions
The expression of the rotation
1
is replaced in the previously determined functions
of the rotations and vertical displacements pertinent to the continuity intervals 1-2 and
2-3.

2
, 0 [
l
x

The final expressions of the rotation

) (
12
x and ) (
12
x v are:

2
, 0 [
l
x
The final expressions of the rotation

) (
23
23
x v curves are:

225

Note: It has to be remarked that the position of the cross-section is described in each
interval by different measurements; the dummy variable x stars at point 1 and 2 for the
intervals 1-2 and 2-3, respectively.

B.5.c Rotations and Vertical Displacements at Points 1, 2 and 3
at point 1
1
3
128
K p l
3

calculated above
v
1
0

boundary condition

at point 2
2

1
5
192
K p l
3
+ substitute
1
3
128
K p l
3
,
2
1
384
K p l
3

226
at point 3
3
1
24
K p l
3

1
+ substitute
1
3
128
K p l
3
,
3
7
384
K p l
3

v
3
0

boundary condition

Note: It has to be remarked that all four functions, V , M, and v , are
proportional with the load intensity p , while the functions representing the
deformation only, and v , are additionally proportional with the inverse of the
flexural rigidity K . This proportionality is a characteristic of the elastic behavior.

B.6. Usage of Unique Origin ] , 0 [ l x

A unique origin, point 1, can be used by changing the variable x to
x x
l
2
in the
interval 2-3. No change is operated in interval 1-2, where the origin is point 1. The
representative functions, the shear force, the bending moment, the rotation and the
vertical displacement are expressed as:
V
23
x ( )
1
8
p l substitute x x
l
2
, V
23
x
1
2
l
|
\
|
.
1
8
p l

227

B.7. Numeric Application

The following data is used to obtain numerical values for the functions calculated
above:
l 6 m

p 8
kN
m

K K
1
kN m
2

B.7. a Reactions
V
1
3
8
p l
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
V
1
18 kN
V
3
1
8
p l
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
V
3
6 kN

B.7. b Interval 1-2 ]
2
, 0 [
l
x
V
12
x ( )
3
8
p l p x
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute x x m ,
collect kN ,
V
12
x m ( ) 18 8 x ( ) kN

228

B.7. c Interval 2-3 ] ,
2
[ l
l
x
V
23
x ( )
1
8
p l
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
V
23
x ( ) 6 kN

229

B.7.d Shear Forces, Bending Moments, Rotations and Vertical Displacements at
Points 1, 2 and 3
at point 1

V
1
3
8
p l
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
V
1
18 kN

230
m kN M = 0
1

1
3
128
K p l
3
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute K K
1
kN m
2
,
float 3 ,
1
40.5 K

m v = 0
1

at point 2

V
2
18 8 x ( ) kN substitute x 3 , V
2
6 kN

M
2
18 x 4 x
2

( )
kN m substitute x 3 , M
2
18 kN m

x
max
3
8
l substitute l 6 m , x
max
9
4
m

M
12_max
9
128
p l
2
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
float 4 ,
M
12_max
20.25 kN m

2
1
6
243 54 x
2
8 x
3
+
( )
K
substitute x 3 ,
float 3 ,

2
4.50 K

v
2
1
6
m x 243 18 x
2
2 x
3
+
( )
K
substitute x 3 ,
float 4 ,
v
2
67.50 m K

at point 3
V
3
6 kN substitute x 6 , V
3
6 kN

M
3
36 6 x ( ) kN m substitute x 6 , M
3
0

3
3
2
51 24 x 2 x
2
+
( )
K
substitute x 6 ,
float 3 ,

3
31.5 K

v
3
1
2
m 54 153 x 36 x
2
+ 2 x
3
+
( )
K
substitute x 6 ,
float 3 ,
v
3
0

231

obtained in the previous section are plotted using the Mathcad graphic capabilities.
l 6 m :=

x
max
3
8
l :=

x
max
2.25m =

lint
x
max
6
:=

nint
l
lint
:= nint 16 =

lspan
l
m
:=

i 0 nint .. :=

pos
i
lspan
nint
i :=

shear12
i
18 8 pos
i
( ) :=

shear23
i
6 :=

mom12
i
18 pos
i
( ) 4 pos
i
( )
2
:=

mom23
i
36 6 pos
i
( ) :=

rot12
i
9 pos
i
( )
2
4
3
pos
i
( )
3
40.5 :=

rot23
i
76.5 36 pos
i
( ) + 3 pos
i
( )
2
:=

disp12
i
40.5 pos
i
( ) 3 pos
i
( )
3
+
1
3
pos
i
( )
4
:=

disp23
i
27 76.5 pos
i
( ) 18 pos
i
( )
2
+ pos
i
( )
3
:=

shear
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
shear12
i
, shear23
i
,
|
\
|
.
:=

mom
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
mom12 ( )
i
, mom23 ( )
i
,
(
(
:=
rot
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
rot12
i
, rot23
i
,
|
\
|
.
:=

disp
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
disp12
i
, disp23
i
,
|
\
|
.
:=

232
pos
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
0.375
0.75
1.125
1.5
1.875
2.25
2.625
3
3.375
3.75
4.125
4.5
4.875
5.25
5.625
6
=

shear
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
15
12
9
6
3
0
-3
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
= mom
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
-6.188
-11.25
-15.188
-18
-19.688
-20.25
-19.688
-18
-15.75
-13.5
-11.25
-9
-6.75
-4.5
-2.25
0
=

0 1 2 3 4 5 6
30
20
10
0
10
20
Position (m)
S
h
e
a
r

F
o
r
c
e

(
k
N
)
,

B
e
n
d
i
n
g

M
o
m
e
n
t

(
k
N
*
m
)
shear
mom
pos

233

pos
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
0.375
0.75
1.125
1.5
1.875
2.25
2.625
3
3.375
3.75
4.125
4.5
4.875
5.25
5.625
6
=

rot
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
-40.5
-39.305
-36
-31.008
-24.75
-17.648
-10.125
-2.602
4.5
10.828
16.313
20.953
24.75
27.703
29.813
31.078
31.5
=

disp
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
-15.036
-29.215
-41.825
-52.313
-60.282
-65.496
-67.876
-67.5
-64.6
-59.484
-52.471
-43.875
-34.014
-23.203
-11.76
0
=

0 1 2 3 4 5 6
80
60
40
20
0
20
40
Position (m)
R
o
t
a
t
i
o
n
/
K

(
r
a
d
)
,

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
/
K

(
m
)
rot
disp
pos

234
Problem 8.2.4 Repeat the calculations required by the problem 8.2.3 using the load-
deflection fourth-order differential equation.


A.1. The beam illustrated in Figure 8.2.3 is investigated using the load-deflection
fourth-order differential equation (8.13). The differential equation (8.13) can be used
to investigate the deformation of any system. The beam proposed for investigation is
characterized by a constant cross-section along the entire length and represents a
statically determinate system. Consequently, the equations (8.36) and (8.39) are
employed.

- at point 1

M
1
0, v
1
0;
- at point 3

M
3
0
, v
3
0.

A.3 The acting load is characterized by two continuity intervals, 1-2 and 2-3. In the
conformed by the calculations. Consequently, four continuity equations representing
the equality of shear forces, bending moments, rotations and deflections at the left and
at the right locations of the common point 2, can be written:
-
V
2_12
V
2_23
;
-
M
2_12
M
2_23
;
-
2_12

2_23
;
-
v
2_12
v
2_23
.

A.4 For simplicity of the calculations the following notation is used when applying
the formulae (8.22) and (8.23):
z
I E
K
*
1
=

235
B. Calculations

B.1 Calculation of the Shear Forces, Bending moments, Rotations and Vertical
Displacements

2
, 0 [
l
x
The distributed loading existing on this continuity interval is a uniformly distributed
load:
p
n
x ( ) p

To apply the formulae (8.36) to (8.39) the values of the shear force, bending moment,
rotation and vertical displacement pertinent to the beginning of the interval, at

0 = x ,

has to be identified. They are:
V
0
V
1

unknown value
M
0
0

boundary condition in point 1
0

1
:=
1

unknown value
v
0
0


The following functions are calculated using the expressions (8.36) through (8.39):
V
12
x ( ) x p ( )
d V
1
+ V
12
x ( ) p x V
1
+

236

The values of the shear force, bending moment, rotation and vertical displacement at
the end of the interval 1-2, at point 2, are obtained substituting
2
l
x = into the above
formulae:
V
2_12
V
12
x ( )
substitute V
12
x ( ) p x V
1
+ ,
substitute x
l
2
,
V
2_12
1
2
p l V
1
+
M
2_12
M
12
x ( )
substitute M
12
x ( )
1
2
p x
2
V
1
x + ,
substitute x
l
2
,
M
2_12
1
8
p l
2
1
2
V
1
l +

237

2
, 0 [
l
x

No distributed load is acting on the continuity interval 2-3 and consequently:
p
n
x ( ) 0


0 = x ,

has to be identified. They are obtained employing the continuity conditions existing at
point 2:
V
0
V
2_23
V
2_12
1
2
p l V
1
+

continuity condition in point 2
M
0
M
2_23
M
2_12
1
8
p l
2
1
2
V
1
l +

0

2_23

2_12
1
48
l
3
p
1
8
V
1
l
2
+
|
\
|
.
K
1
+ :=
2_23

v
0
v
2_23
v
2_12
K
1
384
p l
4
1
48
V
1
l
3
+
|
\
|
.
1
2

1
l +

continuity condition in point 2.


V
23
x ( ) x 0 ( )
d V
2_23
+
substitute V
2_23
1
2
p l V
1
+ ,
collect p ,
V
23
x ( )
1
2
p l V
1
+

238

239

The values at the end of the continuity interval 2-3 are obtained substituting
2
l
x =
into the above formulae:
V
3
V
23
x ( )
substitute V
23
x ( )
1
2
p l V
1
+ ,
substitute x
l
2
,
V
3
1
2
p l V
1
+

240

to both continuity intervals, 1-2 and 2-3, are dependent on the unknown value of the
shear force
1
V and rotation
1
.

B.2. Solution

The unknown values of the shear force
1
V and rotation
1
are obtained by imposing
the boundary conditions at point 3. They are:
M
3
0

V
1
l
3
8
p l
2
0 solve V
1
,
3
8
p l

v
3
0
5
128
l
4
p
1
6
V
1
l
3
+
|
\
|
.
K
1
l + 0
substitute V
1
3
8
p l ,
solve
1
,
3
128
p l
3
K

1
3
128
K p l
3


241
The final expressions of the shear force
1
V and of the rotation
1
, respectively, are
replaced in the previously determined functions of the shear forces, bending moments,
rotations and vertical displacements pertinent to continuity intervals 1-2 and 2-3.

2
, 0 [
l
x
The final expressions are:
V
12
x ( ) V
1
p x
substitute V
1
3
8
p l ,
collect p ,
V
12
x ( ) x
3
8
l +
|
\
|
.
p

M
12
x ( )
1
2
p x
2
V
1
x +
substitute V
1
3
8
p l ,
collect p ,
M
12
x ( )
1
2
x
2
3
8
l x +
|
\
|
.
p

The values calculated at the end of the continuity interval are:
V
2_12
1
2
p l V
1
+ substitute V
1
3
8
p l , V
2_12
1
8
p l

M
2_12
1
8
p l
2
1
2
V
1
l + substitute V
1
3
8
p l , M
2_12
1
16
p l
2

242
2_12

1
5
192
K p l
3
+ substitute
1
3
128
K p l
3
,
2_12
1
384
p l
3
K

The position and value of maximum bending moment are calculated as:
V
12
x ( ) 0
3
8
l x
|
\
|
.
p 0 solve x ,
3
8
l x
max
3
8
l

M
12_max
3
8
l x
1
2
x
2

|
\
|
.
p substitute x
3
8
l , M
12_max
9
128
p l
2

2
, 0 [
l
x

The final expressions are calculated:
V
23
x ( ) V
1
1
2
p l substitute V
1
3
8
p l , V
23
x ( )
1
8
p l

243

Note: It has to be remarked that all four functions

V , M, and v are proportional
with the load intensity p , while the functions representing the deformation only,
and v , are additionally proportional with the inverse of the flexural rigidity K . This
proportionality is a characteristic of the elastic behavior.

B.4 Usage of Unique Origin ] , 0 [ l x
A unique origin, point 1, can be used by changing the variable x to x x
l
2
in the
V
23
x ( )
1
8
p l substitute x x
l
2
, V
23
x
1
2
l
|
\
|
.
1
8
p l

M
23
x ( )
1
16
l 2 x l + ( ) p
substitute x x
l
2
,
simplify
M
23
x
1
2
l
|
\
|
.
1
8
l x l + ( ) p

244

V
3
V
23
x ( )
substitute V
23
x ( )
1
8
p l ,
substitute x l ,
V
3
1
8
p l

M
3
M
23
x ( )
substitute M
23
x ( )
1
8
l x l + ( ) p ,
substitute x l ,
M
3
0

verification

verification


l 6 m

p 8
kN
m

K K
1
kN m
2

B.5. a Interval 1-2 ]
2
, 0 [
l
x
V
12
x ( )
3
8
l x
|
\
|
.
p
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute x x m ,
simplify
V
12
x m ( ) 2 4 x 9 ( ) kN

245
M
12
x ( )
3
8
l x
1
2
x
2

|
\
|
.
p
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute x x m ,
simplify
M
12
x m ( ) 2 x m 2 x 9 ( ) kN

B.5. b Interval 2-3 ] ,
2
[ l
l
x
V
23
x ( )
1
8
p l
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
simplify
V
23
x ( ) 6 kN

M
23
x ( )
1
8
l x l + ( ) p
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute x x m ,
simplify
M
23
x m ( ) 6 m x 6 ( ) kN

246

B.5. c Values at Important Points

V
1
3
8
p l
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
V
1
18 kN

V
2
1
8
p l
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
V
2
6 kN

M
2
1
16
p l
2
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
M
2
18 kN m

247
M
12_max
9
128
p l
2
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
float 5 ,
M
12_max
20.250 kN m

1
3
128
K p l
3
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute K K
1
kN m
2
,
float 3 ,
1
40.5 K

2
1
384
K p l
3
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute K K
1
kN m
2
,
float 3 ,
2
4.50 K

v
2
5
768
K p l
4
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute K K
1
kN m
2
,
float 4 ,
v
2
67.50 K m

V
3
1
8
p l
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
V
3
6 kN

M
3
0
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
M
3
0

3
7
384
K p l
3
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute K K
1
kN m
2
,
float 4 ,
3
31.50 K

248
v
3
0
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute K K
1
kN m
2
,
float 4 ,
v
3
0


l 6 m :=

x
max
3
8
l :=

x
max
2.25m =

lint
x
max
6
:=

nint
l
lint
:= nint 16 =

lspan
l
m
:=

i 0 nint .. :=

pos
i
lspan
nint
i :=

shear12
i
2 4 pos
i
9 ( ) :=

shear23
i
6 :=

mom12
i
2 pos
i
( ) 2 pos
i
9 ( ) :=

mom23
i
6 pos
i
( ) 6
:=

shear
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
shear12
i
, shear23
i
,
|
\
|
.
:=

mom
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
mom12 ( )
i
, mom23 ( )
i
,
:=

249

pos
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
0.375
0.75
1.125
1.5
1.875
2.25
2.625
3
3.375
3.75
4.125
4.5
4.875
5.25
5.625
6
=

shear
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
15
12
9
6
3
0
-3
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
=

mom
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
-6.188
-11.25
-15.188
-18
-19.688
-20.25
-19.688
-18
-15.75
-13.5
-11.25
-9
-6.75
-4.5
-2.25
0
=

0 1 2 3 4 5 6
30
20
10
0
10
20
Position (m)
S
h
e
a
r

F
o
r
c
e

(
k
N
)
,

B
e
n
d
i
n
g

M
o
m
e
n
t

(
k
N
*
m
)
shear
mom
pos

250
rot12
i
1
6
8 pos
i
( )
3
54 pos
i
( )
2
243 +
:=

rot23
i
3
2
2 pos
i
( )
2
24 pos
i
( ) 51 +
:=

disp12
i
1
6
pos
i
( ) 2 pos
i
( )
3
18 pos
i
( )
2
243 +
:=

disp23
i
1
2
2 pos
i
( )
3
36 pos
i
( )
2
153 pos
i
( ) 54 +
:=

rot
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
rot12
i
, rot23
i
,
|
\
|
.
:=

disp
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
disp12
i
, disp23
i
,
|
\
|
.
:=

Position (m) Rotation/K (rad) Vertical Displacement/K (kN*m)

pos
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
0.375
0.75
1.125
1.5
1.875
2.25
2.625
3
3.375
3.75
4.125
4.5
4.875
5.25
5.625
6
=

rot
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
-40.5
-39.305
-36
-31.008
-24.75
-17.648
-10.125
-2.602
4.5
10.828
16.313
20.953
24.75
27.703
29.813
31.078
31.5
=

disp
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
-15.036
-29.215
-41.825
-52.313
-60.282
-65.496
-67.876
-67.5
-64.6
-59.484
-52.471
-43.875
-34.014
-23.203
-11.76
0
=

251
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
80
60
40
20
0
20
40
Position (m)
R
o
t
a
t
i
o
n
/
K

(
r
a
d
)
,

V
e
r
t

D
i
s
p
l
/
K

(
m
)
31.5
67.876
rot
disp
6 0
pos

Problem 8.2.5 The beam pictured in Figure 8.2.5 has a constant cross-section along
its entire length. Using the fourth-order differential equation conduct the following
tasks: (a) determine the mathematical expressions of the rotation ) ( x and vertical
deflection ) ( x v curves, (b) determine the expressions of the rotation and deflection in
all important points of the beam and (c) conduct a numeric application considering
m
kN
p * 8 = , m l * 6 = .

Figure 8.2.5

252

A.1. The beam illustrated in Figure 8.2.5 is investigated using the load-deflection
fourth-order differential equation (8.13). The differential equation (8.13) can be used
to investigate the deformation of any system. The beam proposed for investigation is
characterized by a constant cross-section along the entire length and represents a
statically indeterminate system. Consequently, equations (8.36) and (8.39) are
employed.

A.2. The boundaries are:
- at point 1

1
0
, v
1
0;
- at point 3

M
3
0
, v
3
0.

A.3. The acting load is characterized by two continuity intervals, 1-2 and 2-3. In the
conformed by the calculations. Consequently, four continuity equations representing
the equality of shear forces, bending moments, rotations and deflections at the left and
right locations of the common point 2, can be written:
-
V
2_12
V
2_23
;
- M
2_12
M
2_23
;
-
2_12

2_23
;
-
v
2_12
v
2_23
.

A.4. For simplicity of the calculations the following notation is used when applying
the formulae (8.22) and (8.23):
z
I E
K
*
1
=
B. Calculations

B.1 Calculation of the Shear Forces, Bending moments, Rotations and Vertical
Displacements

253
2
, 0 [
l
x

The distributed loading existing on this continuity interval is an uniform distributed
load:
p
n
x ( ) p

To apply the formulae (8.36) to (8.39), the values of the shear force, bending moment,

0 = x ,

have to be identified. They are:
V
0
V
1

unknown value
0
0

M
0
M
1
:= M
1

unknown value
v
0
0


V
12
x ( ) x p ( )
d V
1
+ V
12
x ( ) p x V
1
+
M
12
x ( ) x x p
(
(
(
(
d V
1
x + M
1
+

M
12
x ( ) x x p
(
(
(
(
d V
1
x + M
1
+ collect p , M
12
x ( )
1
2
p x
2
V
1
x + M
1
+

254

The values of the shear force, bending moment, rotation and vertical displacement at
the end of the interval 1-2, at point 2, are obtained substituting
2
l
x = into the above
formulae:
V
2_12
V
12
x ( )
substitute V
12
x ( ) p x V
1
+ ,
substitute x
l
2
,
V
2_12
1
2
p l V
1
+
M
2_12
M
12
x ( )
substitute M
12
x ( )
1
2
p x
2
V
1
x + M
1
+ ,
substitute x
l
2
,
M
2_12
1
8
p l
2

1
2
V
1
l + M
1
+

255
2
, 0 [
l
x

No distributed load is acting on the continuity interval 2-3 and consequently:
p
n
x ( ) 0


0 = x ,

have to be identified. They are obtained employing the continuity conditions existing
at point 2:
V
0
V
2_23
V
2_12
1
2
p l V
1
+

M
0
M
2_23
M
2_12
1
8
p l
2
1
2
V
1
l + M
1
+

0

2_23

2_12
1
48
l
3
p
1
8
V
1
l
2
+
1
2
M
1
l +
|
\
|
.
K :=
2_23

v
0
v
2_23
v
2_12
K
1
384
p l
4
1
48
V
1
l
3
+
1
8
M
1
l
2
+
|
\
|
.

continuity condition in point 2.
V
23
x ( ) x 0 ( )
d V
2_23
+
substitute V
2_23
1
2
p l V
1
+ ,
collect p ,
V
23
x ( )
1
2
p l V
1
+

256

+

257

The values at the end of the continuity interval 2-3 are obtained substituting
2
l
x =
into the above formulae:
V
3
V
23
x ( )
substitute V
23
x ( )
1
2
p l V
1
+ ,
substitute x
l
2
,
V
3
1
2
p l V
1
+

+
+
+

258
to both continuity intervals, 1-2 and 2-3, are dependent on the unknown values of the
shear force
1
V and moment
1
M .

B.2. Solution

The unknown values of the shear force
1
V and moment
1
M are obtained by imposing
the boundary conditions at point 3. They are:
M
3
0

v
3
0

V
1
l
3
8
p l
2
M
1
+ 0 solve V
1
,
1
8
3 p l
2
8 M
1

l

5
128
l
4
p
1
6
V
1
l
3
+
1
2
M
1
l
2
+
|
\
|
.
K 0
substitute V
1
1
8
3 p l
2
8 M
1

l
,
solve M
1
,
9
128
p l
2

V
1
1
8
3 p l
2
8 M
1

l
substitute M
1
9
128
p l
2
, V
1
57
128
p l


The final expressions of shear force
1
V and moment
1
M , respectively, are replaced in
the previously determined functions of the shear forces, bending moments, rotations
and vertical displacements pertinent to continuity intervals 1-2 and 2-3.

2
, 0 [
l
x
The final expressions are:
V
12
x ( ) V
1
p x
substitute V
1
57
128
p l ,
collect p ,
V
12
x ( ) x ( )
57
128
l +
p

259

The values calculated at the end of the continuity interval are:

260
The position and value of maximum bending moment are calculated as:
V
12
x ( ) 0 x
57
128
l +
|
\
|
.
0 solve x ,
57
128
l

x
max
57
128
l

The position of zero moment is computed as:

2
, 0 [
l
x
The final expressions are calculated:
V
23
x ( )
1
2
p l V
1
+ substitute V
1
57
128
p l , V
23
x ( )
7
128
p l

+

261

(verification)

(verification)

Verify the continuity conditions:

262
Note: It has to be remarked that all four functions

V , M, and v are proportional
with the load intensity p , while the functions representing the deformation only,
and v , are additionally proportional with the inverse of the flexural rigidity EI. This
proportionality is a characteristic of the elastic behavior.

B.4 Usage of Unique Origin ] , 0 [ l x

A unique origin, point 1, can be used by changing the variable x to
x x
l
2
in the
V
23
x ( )
7
128
p l substitute x x
l
2
, V
23
x
1
2
l
|
\
|
.
7
128
p l

V
3
V
23
x ( )
substitute V
23
x ( )
7
128
p l ,
substitute x l ,
V
3
7
128
p l

263
M
3
M
23
x ( )
substitute M
23
x ( )
7
128
p l x
7
128
p l
2
+ ,
substitute x l ,
M
3
0

(verification)

(verification)


l 6 m

p 8
kN
m

K K
1
kN m
2

B.5. a Interval 1-2 ]
2
, 0 [
l
x
V
12
x ( ) x
57
128
l +
|
\
|
.
p
substitutep 8
kN
m
,
substitutel 6 m ,
substitutex x m ,
simplify
V
12
x m ( )
1
8
64 x 171 ( ) kN

264

B.5. b Interval 2-3 ] ,
2
[ l
l
x
V
23
x ( )
7
128
p l
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
simplify
V
23
x ( )
21
8
kN

265

B.5. c Values at Important Points

The maximum moment:

266
M
12_max
945
32768
p l
2
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
float 5 ,
M
12_max
8.3057 kN m

The position of zero moment:

M
12_max
945
32768
p l
2
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
float 5 ,
M
12_max
8.3057 kN m

267

M
3
0
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
M
3
0
(verification)

v
3
0
substitute p 8
kN
m
,
substitute l 6 m ,
substitute K K
1
kN m
2
,
float 4 ,
v
3
0

(verification)


l 6 m :=

nint 16 := nint1 6 :=

nint2
nint
2
nint1 := nint2 2 = nint3 8 :=

x
max
57
128
l := x
max
2.672m =
dlint1
x
max
nint1
:=

dlint1 0.445m =
dlint2
l
2
x
max
nint2
:= dlint2 0.164m =

dlint3
l
2
nint3
:= dlint3 0.375m =

268
lspan
l
m
:= pos
0
0 :=
shear
0
171
8
:=

mom
0
162
8
|
\
|
.
:= rot
0
0 := disp
0
0 :=

i 1 nint .. :=

dlint
i
if i nint1 dlint1 , if i
nint
2
dlint2 , dlint3 ,
|
\
|
.
,
|
\
|
.
:=

pos
i
pos
i 1
dlint
i
m
+ :=

shear12
i
1
8
64 pos
i
171 ( ) :=

shear23
i
21
8
:=

mom12
i
1
8
32 pos
i
( )
2
171 pos
i
162 +
:=

mom23
i
21
8
pos
i
6 ( ) :=
shear
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
shear12
i
, shear23
i
,
|
\
|
.
:=

mom
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
mom12 ( )
i
, mom23 ( )
i
,
(
(
:=

pos
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
0.445
0.891
1.336
1.781
2.227
2.672
2.836
3
3.375
3.75
4.125
4.5
4.875
5.25
5.625
6
= shear
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
21.375
17.813
14.25
10.688
7.125
3.563
0
-1.313
-2.625
-2.625
-2.625
-2.625
-2.625
-2.625
-2.625
-2.625
-2.625
= mom
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20.25
11.525
4.386
-1.167
-5.133
-7.512
-8.306
-8.198
-7.875
-6.891
-5.906
-4.922
-3.938
-2.953
-1.969
-0.984
0
=

269
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
10
5
0
5
10
15
20
25
Position (m)
S
h
e
a
r

F
o
r
c
e

(
k
N
)
,

B
e
n
d
i
n
g

M
o
m
e
n
t

(
k
N
*
m
)
shear
mom
pos

rot12
i
1
48
pos
i
64 pos
i
( )
2
513 pos
i
972 +
:=

rot23
i
3
16
7 pos
i
( )
2
84 pos
i
192 +
:=

disp12
i
1
48
pos
i
( )
2
16 pos
i
( )
2
171 pos
i
486 +
:=

disp23
i
1
16
126 pos
i
( )
2
576 pos
i
432 + 7 pos
i
( )
3
+
:=

rot
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
rot12
i
, rot23
i
,
|
\
|
.
:=

disp
i
if pos
i
lspan
2
disp12
i
, disp23
i
,
|
\
|
.
:=

270
Position (m) Rotation/K (rad) Vertical Displacement/K (kN*m)

pos
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
0.445
0.891
1.336
1.781
2.227
2.672
2.836
3
3.375
3.75
4.125
4.5
4.875
5.25
5.625
6
= rot
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
-7.016
-10.5
-11.157
-9.696
-6.822
-3.241
-1.884
-0.563
2.206
4.605
6.636
8.297
9.589
10.512
11.065
11.25
= disp
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
-1.706
-5.724
-10.638
-15.347
-19.064
-21.317
-21.738
-21.938
-21.618
-20.329
-18.21
-15.398
-12.033
-8.253
-4.196
0
=

Problem 8.2.6 The beam illustrated in Figure 8.2.6 has a constant cross-section along
its entire length. Using the Superposition Method conduct the following tasks: (a)
derive mathematical expressions for rotation ) ( x and vertical deflection ) ( x v
functions, (b) develop expressions for rotation and vertical deflection characterizing

271
all important points of the beam, (c) conduct a numeric application considering
m
kN
p * 8
0
= and m l * 6 = and (d) draw the deflection curve and rotation for various
values of the parameter .

Figure 8.2.6


A.1. The loading of the cantilever beam illustrated in Figure 8.2.4 is composed from
the addition of two individual cases: (a) Load Case I - a uniform distributed force
0
p
applied on the left side of the beam between points 1 and 2 and (b) Load Case II - a
concentrated force
0
* * p l P = acting on the tip of the cantilever, in point 3.
The loading presents two continuity intervals, 1-2 and 2-3.

A.2 The expressions of the deflection curve ) ( x v and rotation ) ( x for Load Case I
are obtain from Table T1, case 6, of the Appendix A by replacing
2
l
a = into the
formulae:
for the continuity interval 1-2
2
0
l
x
) * * 2 *
2
3
( * *
* 24
) (
2 2 2 0
x x l l x
EI
p
x v + =
) * *
2
3
*
4
3
( * *
* 6
) (
2 2 0
x x l l x
EI
p
x + =
for the continuity interval 2-3 l x
l

2

) *
8
1
( *
* 48
*
) (
3
0
l x
EI
l p
x v =

272
EI
l p
x
* 48
*
) (
3
0
=

The above obtained formulae are changed, for future graphical representation, into a
more manageable format by replacing the variable l x * = :
2
1
0
|
.
|
\
|
+ =
2 2
4
0
* 2
2
3
* *
* 24
*
) (
EI
l p
x v
) *
2
3
4
3
( * *
* 6
*
) (
2
3
0
+ =
EI
l p
x

for the continuity interval 2-3 1
2
1

)
8
1
( *
* 48
*
) (
4
0
=
EI
l p
x v
EI
l p
x
* 48
*
) (
3
0
=

A.3 The expressions of the deflection curve ) ( x v and rotation ) ( x for Load Case II
are obtain from Table T1, case 3, of the Appendix A by replacing
0
* * p l P = into
the formulae. The formulae are identical for both continuity intervals 1-2 and 2-3:
) * 3 ( * *
* 6
* *
) (
2 0
x l x
EI
p l
x v =

) * 2 ( * *
* 2
* *
) (
0
x l x
EI
p l
x =

After replacing l x * = into the above expressions the deflection curve ) ( x v and
rotation ) ( x are:
) 3 ( * *
* 6
* *
) (
2
4
0

=
EI
l p
v
) 2 ( * *
* 2
* *
) (
3
0

=
EI
l p

where the parameter is described by the following set: 1 0

273
B. Calculations

B.1. Expressions of the deflection curve ) ( x v and rotation ) ( x

The expressions of the deflection curve ) ( x v and rotation ) ( x are obtained for each
of the two continuity intervals, 1-2 and 2-3, by summations of the formulae obtained
above. After algebraic manipulations, they are:

2
1
0
(
+
|
.
|
\
|
=
2 2
4
0
) * 2 1 ( * * 2 * 12
2
3
* *
* 24
*
) (
EI
l p
v
(
+
|
.
|
\
|

|
.
|
\
|
=
2
3
0
2
1
* * 3 * 6
4
3
* *
* 6
*
) (
EI
l p

2
1

(
+ + = ) * * 8 * * 24
8
1
*
* 48
*
) (
3 2
4
0

EI
l p
v

| | ) 2 ( * * * 24 1
* 48
*
) (
3
0
=
EI
l p

B.2. Deflection curve ) ( x v and rotation ) ( x in Points 1, 2 and 3

These expressions are calculated by replacing the corresponding

coordinate
pertinent to each point in the above obtained formulae:
9 for Point 1 (fixed point) 0 0 = = x
0 0 = = x is substituted into the formulae pertinent to continuity interval 1-2:
0 ) 0 (
1
= = = v v
0 ) 0 (
1
= = =

for Point 2
2
1
2
= =
l
x

274
2
1
2
= =
l
x is substituted into the formulae pertinent to continuity interval 1-2 or
continuity interval 2-3. Using the formulae pertinent to the continuity interval 1-2, the
following values are calculated:
) * 40 3 ( *
* 384
*
2
1
) * 2 1 ( *
2
1
* 2 * 12
2
3
*
2
1
*
* 24
*
)
2
1
(
4
0
2 2
4
0
2

=
=
(
(
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|

|
.
|
\
|
= = =
EI
l p
EI
l p
v v

) * 18 1 ( *
* 48
*
2
1
2
1
*
2
1
* 3 * 6
4
3
*
2
1
*
* 6
*
)
2
1
(
3
0
2
3
0
2

=
=
(
(
|
.
|
\
|
+ |
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
= = =
EI
l p
EI
l p

Using the formulae pertinent to the continuity interval 2-3, the following values are
calculated:
) * 40 3 ( *
* 384
*
)
2
1
* * 8
2
1
* * 24
2
1
8
1
*
* 48
*
)
2
1
(
4
0
3 2
4
0
2

=
=
(
(
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ = = =
EI
l p
EI
l p
v v

) * 18 1 ( *
* 48
*
)
2
1
2 ( *
2
1
* * 24 1
* 48
*
)
2
1
(
3
0
3
0
2

=
=
(
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
= = =
EI
l p
EI
l p

for Point 3 1 = = l x
1 = = l x is substituted into the formulae pertinent to continuity interval 2-3:
( ) ( ) ( )
) * 128 7 ( *
* 384
*
) 1 * * 8 1 * * 24 1
8
1
*
* 48
*
) 1 (
4
0
3 2
4
0
2

=
=
(
+ + = = =
EI
l p
EI
l p
v v

( ) ( ) | |
) * 24 1 ( *
* 48
*
) 1 2 ( * 1 * * 24 1
* 48
*
) 1 (
3
0
3
0
2

=
= = = =
EI
l p
EI
l p

275
B.3. Deflection Curve and Rotation Graphical Representation

In preparation for plotting, the deflection curve ) ( x v and rotation ) ( x formulae
pertinent to the continuity intervals 1-2 and 2-3 obtained above are modified to have
the same common factor
EI
l p
* 48
*
4
0
and
EI
l p
* 48
*
3
0
, respectively:

2
1
0
) , ( *
* 48
*
) * 2 1 ( * * 2 * 12
2
3
* * 2 *
* 48
*
) (
12
4
0
2 2
4
0
12

cv
EI
l p
EI
l p
x v
=
=
(
+ |
.
|
\
|
=

) , ( *
* 48
*
2
1
* * 3 * 6
4
3
* * 8 *
* 48
*
) (
12
3
0
2
3
0
12

c
EI
l p
EI
l p
x
=
=
(
+ |
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
=

2
1

) , ( *
* 48
*
) * * 8 * * 24
8
1
*
* 48
*
) (
23
4
0
3 2
4
0
23

cv
EI
l p
EI
l p
x v
=
=
(
+ + =

| |
) , ( *
* 48
*
) 2 ( * * * 24 1
* 48
*
) (
23
3
0
3
0
23

c
EI
l p
EI
l p
x
=
= =

The coefficients ) , (
12
cv , ) , (
12
cv , ) , (
12
c and ) , (
12
c are used to draw
the variation of the normalized deflection curve
EI
l p
x v
* 48
*
/ ) (
4
0
and rotation
EI
l p
x
* 48
*
/ ) (
3
0
. The plot is conducted for a value 0.5 :=

and a number of cross-
sections

nint 11 := .

276
i 0 nint 1 .. :=
;
i
0.1 i :=
cv12
i
2
i
( )
2 3
2
12
|
\
|
.
2
i
1 2 ( )
i
( )
2
+
(
(
:=
c12
i
8
i
3
4
6
|
\
|
.
3
i
1
2

|
\
|
.

i
( )
2
+
(
(
:=

cv23
i
1
8

i
+ 24
i
( )
2
8
i
( )
3
+ :=
c23
i
1 24
i
2
i
( ) :=

cv
i
if
i
1
2
cv12
i
, cv23
i
,
|
\
|
.
:=

c
i
if
i
1
2
c12
i
, c23
i
,
|
\
|
.
:=

0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
=

cv
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0
-0.09
-0.357
-0.794
-1.389
-2.125
-2.981
-3.933
-4.957
-6.029
-7.125
=

c
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0
-1.792
-3.536
-5.184
-6.688
-8
-9.08
-9.92
-10.52
-10.88
-11
=

277
8.3. Proposed Problems

Problem 8.3.1 The deflection v(x) of the simply supported beam illustrated in Figure
8.3.1 is:
(
(
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
L
x
L
x
L
x
I E
L q
x v * 6 * 7 *
* * 840
*
) (
3 7
4
0

Considering that the flexural rigidity of the beam E*I = constant along its entire
length, determine: (a) the maximum absolute deflection
max
v , (b) the expression of the
rotation ) ( x , (c) the expressions of the shear force V(x), bending moment M(x) and
distributed load p(x)and (c) the expressions of the reactions R
A
and

R
B
. Plot all the
graphs using the Mathcad graphic capabilities.

Figure 8.3.1

Problem 8.3.2 The deflection v(x) of the cantilevered beam illustrated in Figure 8.3.2
is:
(
(
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
.
|
\
|
= 4 * 5 * 2 *
* * 48
*
) (
3 4
4
0
L
x
L
x
L
x
I E
L p
x v
.
Figure 8.3.2

Considering the flexural rigidity of the beam E*I = constant along its entire length
calculate: (a) the maximum absolute deflection
max
v , (b) the expressions of the shear

278
force V(x) and bending moment M(x), (c) the expressions of the concentrated force P,
reactions R
2
and M
2
and (d) the expression of the rotation ) ( x . Plot all the graphs
using the Mathcad graphic capabilities

Problems 8.3.3 8.3.20 Integrating the moment-curvature second-order differential
equation and considering that the flexural rigidity E*I = constant along the entire
length of the beam obtain the expressions of: (a) the rotation ) ( x (b) deflection v(x)
and (c) maximum rotation
max
and deflection
max
v

for the beams illustrated in
Figures 8.3.3 through 8.3.20. Plot all the pertinent graphs using Mathcad graphic
capabilities.

Figure 8.3.3

Figure 8.3.4

Figure 8.3.5

279

Figure 8.3.6

Figure 8.3.7

Figure 8.3.8

Figure 8.3.9

280

Figure 8.3.10

Figure 8.3.11

Figure 8.3.12

Figure 8.3.13

281

Figure 8.3.14

Figure 8.3.15

Figure 8.3.17

Figure 8.3.18

282

Figure 8.3.19

Figure 8.3.20

Problems 8.3.21 8.3.33 Integrating the load-deflection fourth-order differential
equation and considering that the beams illustrated in Figures 8.3.21 through 8.3.33
are characterized by a flexural rigidity E*I = constant along the entire length of the
beam, determine the expressions of: (a) the shear force V(x), (b) bending moment
M(x), (c) rotation ) ( x , (d) deflection v(x), (e) maximum rotation
max
and (f)
deflection
max
v . Plot all the pertinent graphs using Mathcad graphic capabilities.

Figure 8.3.21

283

Figure 8.3.22

Figure 8.3.23

Figure 8.3.24

Figure 8.3.25

284

Figure 8.3.26

Figure 8.3.27

Figure 8.3.28

Figure 8.3.29

285

Figure 8.3.30

Figure 8.3.31

Figure 8.3.32

Figure 8.3.33

286
Problem 8.3.34 For the cantilever beam illustrated in Figure 8.3.34, obtain the
expressions of the rotation ) ( x and vertical deflection v(x) by integrating the
moment-curvature second-order differential equation. Find the maximum rotation
max
and vertical displacement
max
v of the beam.

Figure 8.3.34

Problem 8.3.35 The uniform cylindrical beam shown in Figure 8.3.35 is subjected,
through the pulley located at point 2, to a downward concentrated load P. Neglecting
the width of the pulley and of the bearings and assuming that the bearings provide
only vertical support for the beam, calculate the expressions of: (a) the deflection
curve v(x), (b) rotation ) ( x and (c) maximum rotation
max
and deflection
max
v
.

Conduct the calculation by integrating the moment-curvature second-order
differential equation. Plot all the graphs using the Mathcad graphic capabilities.
Repeat the calculations for the case when an additional weight W=2P acts in point D.

Figure 8.3.35

Problem 8.3.36 A number of cement bags are stacked on the over-hanging segment,
B-C, of the beam shown in Figure 8.3.36, producing a uniform distributed load of
magnitude p
0
per unit length. Using the moment-curvature second-order differential
equation determine the following expressions: (a) the deflection curve v(x), (b)
rotation ) ( x and (c) maximum rotation
max
and deflection
max
v . Repeat the

287
calculations using the load-deflection fourth-order differential equation. Plot all the
pertinent graphs using the Mathcad graphic capabilities.

Figure 8.3.36

Problem 8.3.37 The exercising bar of diameter d = 25 mm, shown in Figure 8.3.37,
rests on a rigid stand.

Figure 8.3.37

Assimilating the exercising bar as a simply supported beam with a span of L = 1 m
and assuming that each pair of weights exerts a concentrated force W = 100 N at a
distance a = 200 mm beyond the support points, calculate the following expressions:
(a) the deflection curve v(x), (b) rotation ) ( x and (c) maximum rotation
max
and
deflection
max
v
.
Assume that the bar is made of steel with a modulus of elasticity E =
210 GPa.

Problem 8.3.38 The wide-flange beam AB, shown in Figure 8.3.38, is supported at
both ends by two rods AC and BD. The rods are fabricated from circular bars with
equal diameters. Considering that a uniform distributed force p
0
acts on the entire
length of the beam and that the beam and rods are fabricated from the same type of

288
steel, calculate the total elongation of the rods and the maximum deflection in the
beam by integrating the moment-curvature second-order differential equation.

Figure 8.3.38

Problems 8.3.39 8.3.40 Determine the expressions of the deflection curve v(x) and
rotation ) ( x for the beams illustrated in Figures 8.3.38 and 8.3.40 by employing the
Superposition Method and pertinent expressions obtained from Table T1 contained in
Appendix A. Particularize the obtained expressions for the locations of points A, B, C
and D and draw the deflection curve v(x) and rotation ) ( x using Mathcad graphical
capabilities.

Figure 8.3.39

Figure 8.3.40

289
Problems 8.3.41 Determine the expressions of the deflection curve v(x) and rotation
) ( x for the system illustrated in Figure 8.3.41 by employing the Superposition
Method and pertinent expressions obtained from Table T1 contained in Appendix A.
Particularize the obtained expressions for the locations of points A, B, C and D and
draw the deflection curve v(x) and rotation ) ( x using Mathcad graphical
capabilities.

Figure 8.3.41

290
APPENDIX 8.1 Deflection Formulae

Table T1 - Cantilever Beam

Notation:

v(x) = deflection curve

(x) = rotation

v
B
= v(L) = deflection at end B

B
= (L) = rotation at end B

291

292

293

294
Table T2 - Simple Supported Beam

Notation:

v(x) = deflection

(x) = rotation

A
= (0) = rotation at end A

B
= - (L) = rotation at end B

x
m
= location of the point of maximum deflection

v
C
= v
L
2
|
\
|
|
.
= deflection at the center of the beam

v
max
= max v x ( ) = maximum deflection

295

296

297

298

299
Table T3 Fixed-Fixed Beam

Notation:

v(x) = deflection

(x) = rotation

x
m
= location of the point of maximum deflection

v
max
= max v x ( ) = maximum deflection

M
C
M x a ( )
l = left cross-section
r = right cross-section

300

301

302

303

304

305
CHAPTER 9 Torsion


A plane linear member subjected to a torsional moment ) (x T undergoes a torsional
deformation if after the deformation:

(a) the axis of the member remains straight and without longitudinal
extension;
(b) the cross-sections remain plane and perpendicular to the longitudinal
axis of the beam;
(c) radial lines remain straight and radial as the cross-section rotates about.

It is necessary to establish a consistent sign convention which will be used throughout
the theoretical development. The torque ) (x T and rotation angle ) (x are positive on
the cross-section if they rotate in the right-hand rule sense of the outer normal to the
cross-section. The sign convention established for the torque ) (x T and angle of
rotation ) (x is shown in Figure 9.1.1.

Figure 9.1.1 Torque and Rotation Angle Sign Convention

9.1.1 Member with Circular Cross-Section

The strain-displacement equation for torsional deformation of a circular cross-
section is represented by the relation between the shear strain ) , ( x and the rotation
angle ) ( x pertinent to cross-section x , is expressed as:
dx
d
x

* ) , ( = (9.1)

306
where x is the position of the cross-section and varies between zero and the radius
of the cross-section r.

Note: Accordingly to relation (9.1), in a particular cross-section, the shear
strain ) , ( const x = varies linearly with and reaches its maximum value on the
periphery of the cross-section. The shear strain distribution pertinent to circular and
tubular circular cross-sections is depicted in Figure 9.1.2.

Figure 9.1.2 Shear Strain Distribution for Circular Cross-Sections
(a) Solid Cross-Section and (b) Tubular Cross-Sections

If the homogeneous linear elastic material behavior is considered, the relationship
between shear stress and strain is written according to Hooks Law as:
) , ( * ) , ( x G x = (9.2)

whereG is the shear modulus and is calculated as:
) 1 ( * 2 +
=
E
G (9.3)

where E and are the modulus of elasticity and Poissons ratio, respectively.

Note: Equation (9.2) indicates that the shear stress follows the linear distribution of
the shear strain when the material is linear elastic and homogeneous. The distribution
of the shear stress on solid and tubular cross-sections is shown in Figure 9.1.3.
Substituting equation (9.1) into equation (9.2), the shear stress ) , ( x is expressed as
a function of the angle of rotation ) ( x :

307
dx
d
G x

* * ) , ( = (9.4)

The torque ) (x T is related with the shear stress ) , ( x by the following integral
equation:
=
A
dA x x T * ) , ( * ) ( (9.5)

Figure 9.1.3 Shear Stress Distribution for Circular Cross-Sections
(b) Solid Cross-Section and (b) Tubular Cross-Section

Substituting equation (9.4) into equation (9.5) it results:
p
I
dx
d
G x T * * ) (

= (9.6)

where A d I
A
p

= *
2
represents the polar moment of inertia of the cross-section.

Rewriting the equation (9.6) the torque-twist equation is obtained:

p
I G
x T
dx
d
*
) (
=
(9.7)

The torque ) (x T is a continuous real function on a given interval of continuity [0,L],
and consequently, equation (9.7) can be integrated. The angle of rotation ) ( x at a
particular cross-section x is calculated:

= + = ) 0 ( *
*
) (
) ( x dx
I G
x T
x
p
(9.8)

308

Consequently, the total angle of twist between the ends of the continuity interval is
obtained:

= = = =
L
p
total
dx
I G
x T
x L x
0
*
*
) (
) 0 ( ) ( (9.9)

where L is the length of the continuity interval characterizing the torque ) (x T .

Combining the equations (9.4) and (9.7), a new expression for the shear stress is
obtained:
*
) (
) , (
p
I
x T
x = (9.10)

The maximum value of the shear stress ) (
max
x is calculated:
r
I
x T
r x x
p
*
) (
) , ( ) (
max
= = = (9.11)

9.1.2 Member with Solid Rectangular Cross-Section

This type of torsional problem is exactly solved using methods of the Theory of
Elasticity. A member characterized by a solid rectangular cross-section when
subjected to torque application suffers not only relative rotation of adjacent cross-
sections, but also warping of the cross-sections. Only some practical formulae are
presented herein.

The distribution of shear stress for a rectangular cross-section, illustrated in Figure
9.1.4, is expressed as:

2
max
* * t d
T
= (9.12)

where is calculated as function of the ratio of the dimensions d and t .

309
Note: The shear stress attains its absolute maximum in the middle of the longer edge,
while becoming zero at the corners.

The rotation angle between the ends of the member is calculated:
J G
L T
*
*
= (9.13)

where the torsional moment of inertia J is obtained as:
3
* * t d J = (9.14)

Figure 9.1.4 Shear Stress on Rectangular Cross-Section

The constants and are listed in Table 9.1.

Note: For ratios 10
t
d
both coefficients and tends to 333 . 0 .

Table 9.1 Torsional Constants for Rectangular Cross-Section

310
9.1.3 Member with Solid Elliptical Cross-Section

The shear stress distribution on a solid elliptical cross-section is illustrated in Figure
9.1.5 The maximum value of the shear stress occurs on the periphery of the cross-
section at the two ends of the ellipses minor axis and is calculated using the
following formula:

2
max
* *
* 2
b a
T
= (9.15)

Figure 9.1.5 Shear Stress in Elliptical Cross-Section

The rotation angle measured between the ends of the member with elliptical cross-
section is calculated as:
J G
L T
*
*
= (9.16)

where the torsional moment of inertia J is obtained as:
2 2
3 3
* *
b a
b a
J
+
=

(9.17)

9.1.4 Member with Closed Thin-Wall Cross-Section

The torsional deformation of thin-wall members can be treated using the method
employed in Mechanics of Materials only if some simplifying assumptions are
imposed. They are:

(a) the member is cylindrical and the cross-section is constant its entire
length;

311
(b) the cross-section is closed and is comprised of a single-cell having a
small thickness relative to the general dimensions of the cross-section;
(c) the shear stress is constant through the thickness and parallel to the
median curve defining the cross-section;
(d) the member is subjected to end torque only;
(e) the warping of the cross-section is unrestrained at both ends;
A single-cell thin-wall member is illustrated in Figure 9.1.6.

Figure 9.1.6 Single Cell Thin-Wall Cross-Section
(a) Geometry and Notation, (b) Shear Flow Distribution and
(c) Shear Stress Distribution

Note: An important aspect of this discussion is that the cross-section is not required
to be circular.

The shear flow q is defined as:
t q * = (9.18)

where is the shear stress.

The equilibrium of the shear forces in the longitudinal direction, in the absence of any
forces acting on the exterior surface planes, implies that the shear flow q is constant
on the entire cross-section and, consequently, the shear stress is expressed as:
const
t
q
= = (9.19)

Note: Equation (9.19) reflects the underlying assumption (c) that the shear stress is
constant across the thickness of the thin-wall.

312

Following the notation shown in Figure 9.1.7 the integral relation between the torque
T and the shear flow q is written as:

= = =
m m m
C C
s
C
ds q ds q F d T * * * * * (9.20)

where ds dA * *
2
1
= (9.21)

Substituting equation (9.21) into the (9.20) the torque T is expressed as:
m
A q T * * 2 = (9.22)

where
m
A is the area enclosed by the median curve depicted in Figure 9.1.7.c.

Figure 9.1.7 Thin-Wall Cross-Section Notations

The expression of the shear flow is obtained as:

m
A
T
q
* 2
= (9.23)

and consequently, the shear stress is calculated:
t A
T
m
* * 2
= (9.24)

The rotation angle between the ends of the member is calculated:
J G
L T
*
*
= (9.25)

313
where the torsional moment of inertia J is calculated as:
m
m
P
t A
J
* * 4
2
= (9.26)

where
m
P is the perimeter of the area enclosed by the median curve depicted in
Figure 9.1.7.c.

9.1.5 Member with Open Thin-Wall Cross-Section

If the cross-section of the member subjected to torque is assembled from n thin walled
rectangular shapes and all component shapes equally rotate, the formulae developed
for the rectangular cross-section in section 9.1.2 can be used in the evaluation of the
shear stress distribution of the composed open thin-wall cross-section. The rotation
angle
i
pertinent to component shape i is obtained as:
*
*
*
*
L
J G
T
J G
L T
i
i
i
i
i
= = = (9.27)

where
J G
L T
*
*
= is the rotation angle and J is the torsional moment of inertia of the
entire cross-section.

From equilibrium and substituting equation (9.27) the torque T applied on the cross-
section is:
J
L
G
J
L
G
T T
n
i
i
n
i
i
* * * *
1 1

= =
= = = (9.28)

where the torsional moment of inertia J is calculated:

= =
= =
n
i
i
i
n
i
i
d t J J
1
3
1
* *
3
1
(9.29)

Note: The 1/3 factor used in equation (9.29) reflects the assumption b. In this case the
ratio of the rectangular component dimensions are larger that 10.

314
Then, from equation (9.27), the torque
i
T corresponding to each shape is obtained:
T
J
J
T
i
i
* = (9.30)
On each of the rectangular component shapes the stress distribution is identical to that
depicted in Figure 9.1.4. Consequently the maximum shear stress is obtained in the
middle of the longer dimension
i
d of the shape and is calculated:

i
i
i
i
i i
i
i
t
J
T
J
t
T
J
J
t d
T
*
*
1
*
* *
3
1
2
max_
= = = (9.31)
Note: The maximum shear stress for the entire cross-section is obtained in the middle
of the longer dimension of the thicker shape comprised on the cross-section.


Problem 9.2.1 A 4 m long circular member with a diameter D = 30 cm, illustrated in
Figure 9.2.1, is loaded by a constant torque of magnitude T = 100 kNm. Considering
that the member is made of steel characterized by a shear modulus G = 80 MPA, an
allowable shear stress MPa
torque all
60
_
= and an allowable rotation
angle m
torque all
deg/ 1
_
= , verify its strength and deformability. Repeat the strength
and deformability calculations considering the following types of cross-sections: (a)
tubular cross-section (D
e
= 30 cm and D
i
= 25 cm), (b) rectangular cross-section ( d =
30 cm and t = 13 cm), closed thin-wall rectangular cross-section (b=30cm, h=25cm ,
t
1
=t
2
=2cm), imperfect closed thin-wall rectangular cross-section(b=30cm, h=25cm,
t
1
=1.5cm and t
2
=2cm), splinted thin-wall rectangular cross-section and I-type thin-
wall cross-section (b
1
=20cm, b
2
=26cm, b
3
=20cm, t
1
=2m, t
2
=1cm and t
3
=2cm).

Figure 9.2.1

315

A.1- The member illustrated in Figure 9.2.1 is successively verified for strength and
deformability considering that its pertinent cross-section is:
(a) circular with the diameter D=30 cm;
(b) tubular with the exterior and interior diameters D
e
= 30 cm and D
i
= 25
cm;
(c) rectangular with the length d = 30 cm and the height t = 13 cm;
(d) closed thin-wall rectangular cross-section characterized by length b=30cm,
width h=25cm and wall thicknesses t
1
=t
2
=2cm;
(e) imperfect closed thin-wall rectangular cross-section characterized by
length b=30cm, width h=25cm and wall thicknesses t
1
=1.5cm and t
2
=2cm;
(f) splinted thin-wall rectangular cross-section;
(g) I-type thin-wall cross-section with the following dimensions: b
1
=20cm,
b
2
=26cm, b
3
=20cm, t
1
=2m, t
2
=1cm and t
3
=2cm.

The geometrical significance of the dimensions listed, pertinent to each type of cross-
section, are graphically represented in figures located in the particular calculation
area.

A.2 The material is characterized by the following constants: (a) the shear modulus
G = 80 MPA, (b) the allowable shear stress MPa
torque all
60
_
= and (c) the allowable
rotation angle m
m torque all
deg/ 1
_ _
= .
A.3 For each type of cross-section the strength and deformability verifications are
conducted considering the following requirements:

max

all_torque

and

max

all_torque

all_torque_m
L
where

all_torque
0.07rad =

316
B. Calculations

B.1 Circular Cross-Section (Figure 9.2.1.a)

Figure 9.2.1.a Circular Cross-Section
The circular cross-section is characterized by a diameter D=30 cm. The polar moment
of inertia
p
I is calculated:
I
P
D
4
32
:=

32
30 *
4

I
P
79521.564cm
4
=

The maximum shear stress is obtained using formula (9.11) for
r
max
15cm =
:
max
T
I
P
r
max
:=
* 10 * 15 *
* 10 * 564 . 79521
* * 10 * 100
2
4 8
3

m
m
m N
max
18.863MPa =

Consequently,
max
18.863MPa =
<

all_torque
60MPa :=
ok
The maximum rotation angle is calculated using formula (9.9):
max
T
G I
P
L :=
* 4 *
* 10 * 564 . 79521 * * 10 * 80
* * 10 * 100
4 8
2
9
3

m
m
m
N
m N

max
6.288 10
3
rad = =
max
0.36deg =

Consequently,
max
6.288 10
3
rad = <
all_torque
0.07rad =
ok

317
B.2: Tubular Circular Cross-Section (Figure 9.2.1.b)

Figure 9.2.1.b Tubular Circular Cross-Section

The tubular circular cross-section has an interior and exterior diameters, D
i
25cm :=

and D
e
30cm := , respectively.

The polar moment of inertia
p
I is calculated:
I
P
D
e
4
32
1
D
i
D
e
|
\
|
.
4
(
(
(
:=

30
25
1 *
32
30 *
4
4
(
(
|
.
|
\
|

I
P
41172.044cm
4
=

The maximum shear stress is obtained using formula (9.11) for
r
max
15cm =
:
max
T
I
P
r
max
:=
* 10 * 15 *
* 10 * 044 . 41172
* * 10 * 100
2
4 8
3

m
m
m N

max
36.432MPa =

Consequently,
max
36.432MPa =
<

all_torque
60MPa :=
ok

max
T
G I
P
L :=
* 4 *
* 10 * 044 . 41172 * * 10 * 80
* * 10 * 100
4 8
2
9
3

m
m
m
N
m N

max
0.012rad =

Consequently,
max
0.012rad = <
all_torque
0.07rad =
ok

318
B.3 Rectangular Cross-Section (Figure 9.2.1.c)

Figure 9.2.1.c Rectangular Cross-Section

The dimensions of the rectangular cross-section ared 30cm :=

and t 13cm := ,

it
resulting into a ratio
d
t
2.308 = . From Table 9.1, by interpolation, the coefficients
and are obtained: 0.253 = and 0.241 = . The torsional moment of inertia
is then calculated:
J d t
3
:= 13 * 30 * 241 . 0
3
J 15904.59cm
4
=

The maximum shear stress is calculated accordingly to formula (9.12):

max
T
d t
2
:=
* 10 * 13 * 30 * 253 . 0
* * 10 * 100
3 6 2
3

m
m N
max
77.842MPa =

and is located in the middle of the largest edge.

Consequently,
max
77.842MPa =
<

all_torque
60MPa := not ok???

The cross-section needs to be resized. The resizing is conducted in the following
manner:
W
t_nec
T
all_torque
:=
* 10 * 60
* * 10 * 100
6
3

Pa
m N
W
t_nec
1666.667cm
3
=

t
nec
3
W
t_nec
d
t
|
\
|
.
:=
308 . 2 * 253 . 0
667 . 1666
3
t
nec
14.178cm =

319
d
nec
d
t
|
\
|
.
t
nec
:= 178 . 14 * 308 . 2 d
nec
32.72cm =

The following new dimensions are obtained by rounding up the exact above
calculated values to: d 33cm :=

and t 14.5cm := . The new dimensional ratio
calculated is
d
t
2.276 = and therefore, the new calculated coefficients, after three
digits rounding, are: 0.253 = and

0.24 = . Consequently, the new value of the
torsional moment of inertia is:
J d t
3
:= 5 . 14 * 33 * 24 . 0
3
J 24148.579cm
4
=

The maximum shear stress is recalculated using the new cross-sectional dimensions:
max
T
d t
2
:=
* 10 * 5 . 14 * 33 * 253 . 0
* * 10 * 100
3 6 2
3

m
m N
max
5.705 10
7
Pa =

max
57.053MPa =
<

all_torque
60MPa := ok
max
T
G J
L := * 4 *
* 10 * 579 . 24148 * * 10 * 80
* * 10 * 100
4 8
2
9
3

m
m
m
N
m N

max
0.021rad = =
max
1.186deg =

Consequently,
max
0.021rad = <
all_torque
0.07rad =
ok

B.4: Rectangular Closed Thin-Wall Cross-Section (Figure 9.2.1.d)

Figure 9.2.1.d - Rectangular Closed Thin-Wall Cross-Section

320
The thin-wall rectangular cross-section is characterized by the following dimensions:
b 30cm :=

h 25cm :=

t
1
2cm :=

t
2
2cm :=

Computation of the average area :
b
m
b t
2
:=
b
m
28cm =

h
m
h t
1
:=
h
m
23cm =

A
m
b
m
h
m
:= 23 * 28
A
m
644cm
2
=

The shear flow q and maximum shear stress
max
are obtained using the formulae
(9.23) and (9.24), respectively:
t
min
min t
1
t
2
,
( )
:=

t t
min
:=
t 2cm =

q
T
2 A
m
:=
* 10 * 644 * 2
* * 10 * 100
2 4
3

m
m N
q 7.764 10
5
N
m
=

max
q
t
min
:=
* 10 * 2
* 10 * 764 . 7
2
5

m
m
N
max
3.882 10
7
Pa =

max
38.82MPa =
<

all_torque
60MPa := ok

The torsional moment of inertia is calculated using formula (9.26):
J
4 A
m
2
t
P
m
:=
* 10 * 102
* 10 * 2 * * ) 10 * 644 ( * 4
2
2 4 2 4

m
m m
J 3.253 10
4
cm
4
=

where:
P
m
2 b
m
h
m
+
( )
:= ) 23 28 ( * 2 +
P
m
102cm =

Computation of the rotation angle is conducted accordingly to (9.25):
max
T
G J
L := * 4 *
* 10 * 253 . 3 * * 10 * 80
* * 10 * 100
4 4
2
9
3

m
m
m
N
m N

max
0.015rad = =
max
0.881deg =

Consequently,

max
0.015rad = <
all_torque
0.07rad = ok

321
B.5. Imperfect Rectangular Closed Thin-Wall Cross-Section (Figure 9.2.1.e)

Figure 9.2.1.e Imperfect Rectangular Closed Thin-Wall Cross-Section

The thin-wall rectangular cross-section considered above is modified to create an
imperfect cross-section characterized by the following dimensions:
b 30cm :=

h 25cm :=

t
1
1.5cm :=

t
2
2cm :=

Computation of the average area :
b
m
b t
2
:=
b
m
28cm =

h
m
h t
1
:=
h
m
23.5cm =

A
m
b
m
h
m
:= 5 . 23 * 28
A
m
658cm
2
=

The shear flow q and maximum shear stress
max
are obtained using the formulae
(9.23) and (9.24), respectively:

t
min
min t
1
t
2
,
( )
:=

t t
min
:=
t
min
1.5cm =

q
T
2 A
m
:=
* 10 * 658 * 2
* * 10 * 100
2 4
3

m
m N
q 7.599 10
5
N
m
=

max
q
t
min
:=
* 10 * 5 . 1
* 10 * 599 . 7
2
5

m
m
N
max
5.066 10
7
Pa =

max
50.659MPa =
<

all_torque
60MPa := ok

The torsional moment of inertia is calculated using the following formula (9.26):
J
4 A
m
2
t
min
P
m
:=
* 10 * 103
* 10 * 5 . 1 * * ) 10 * 658 ( * 4
2
2 4 2 4

m
m m
J 2.522 10
4
cm
4
=

322
where:
P
m
2 b
m
h
m
+
( )
:= ) 5 . 23 28 ( * 2 +
P
m
103cm =

Computation of the rotation angle is conducted accordingly to (9.25):
max
T
G J
L := * 4 *
* 10 * 522 . 2 * * 10 * 80
* * 10 * 100
4 4
2
9
3

m
m
m
N
m N

max
0.02rad = =
max
1.136deg =

Consequently,

max
0.02rad = <
all_torque
0.07rad = ok
B.6. Rectangular Closed Thin-Wall Cross-Section with a Split (Figure 9.2.1.f)

The closed thin-wall cross-section analyzed in section B.4 is considered being splinted
in the middle of its height h as illustrated in Figure 9.2.1.f. The existence of the split
changes the thin-wall closed cross-section into an open cross-section, and,
consequently, the analysis is conducted as indicated in the theoretical section 9.1.5.

Figure 9.2.1.f Rectangular Thin-Wall Cross-Section with a Split

The cross-sectional dimensions are:
b 30 cm :=

h 25 cm :=

t
1
2cm :=

t
2
2cm :=

The dimensions of the average perimeter are:

b
m
b t
2
:=
b
m
28cm =

h
m
h t
1
:=
h
m
23cm =

323
The shape of the cross-section is decomposed in five individual rectangular shapes.
The individual torsional moments of inertia of the vertical uncut and splinted flanges
are calculated:

J
1
1
3
h
m
t
2
3
:= 2 * 23 *
3
1
3

J
1
61.333cm
4
=

J
2
1
3
h
m
2
t
2
3
:= 2 *
2
23
*
3
1
3

J
2
30.667cm
4
=
J
3
1
3
h
m
2
t
2
3
:= 2 *
2
23
*
3
1
3

J
3
30.667cm
4
=

The individual torsional moments of inertia of the horizontal flanges, lower and
upper, are calculated as:
J
4
1
3
b
m
t
1
3
:= 2 * 28 *
3
1
3

J
4
74.667cm
4
=
J
5
J
4
:= J
5
74.667cm
4
=

The total torsional moment of inertia pertinent to the entire cross-section is obtained
by summing the individual torsional moment of inertia of the component shapes:

J J
1
J
2
+ J
3
+ J
4
+ J
5
+ := J 272cm
4
=

The maximum shear stress on the cross-section is:
max
T
J
t
max
:= * 10 * 2 *
* 10 * 272
* * 10 * 100
2
4 8
3

m
m
m N
max
7.353 10
8
Pa =

where
t
max
max t
1
t
2
,
( )
:=
t
max
2cm =

max
735.294MPa = >
all_torque
60MPa := NG!!!!

The maximum angular rotation is calculated:
max
T
G J
L := * 4 *
* 10 * 272 * * 10 * 80
* * 10 * 100
4 8
2
9
3

m
m
m
N
m N

324
max
1.838rad = =
max
105.323deg =

Consequently,
max
1.838rad = >
all_torque
0.07rad = NG????

Note: The shaft with an open cross-section has a bigger than allowable deformation
and should be redesigned.

If the split is welded, as illustrated in Figure 9.2.1.g, the calculations are conducted
as if the cross-section is the closed thin-wall cross-section analyzed in section B.4.
The shear stress calculated for the closed thin-wall cross-section, constant on the
entire cross-section, was previously calculated as:
max
38.82MPa :=

The shear flow in the weld is obtained:
q
weld

max
t
2
:= * 10 * 2 * 10 * 82 . 38
2 6

m Pa q
weld
7.764 10
5
N
m
=

Figure 9.2.1.g Rectangular Thin-Wall Cross-Section with a Welded Split

If the weld is made of a material characterized by an allowable shear
stress
all_weld
160MPa :=
, then the effective thickness of the weld is calculated
employing the following formula:
q R
weld
t
weld
all_weld

Consequently,

325
t
weld
q
all_weld
:=
* 10 * 160
* 10 * 764 . 7
6
5

Pa
m
N
t
weld
4.749mm =

A rounded value for the weld thickness is chosen:

t
weld
5mm :=

B.7 I-type Thin-Wall Cross-section (Figure 9.2.1.h)

All true in section B.6 an open thin-wall cross-section was already analyzed, in this
section the case of I-type cross-section, a shape often encountered in structural
engineering, is investigated using the same approach. The I-type cross-section
illustrated in Figure 9.2.1.g has the following dimensions:
b
1
20cm :=

b
2
26cm :=

b
3
20cm :=

t
1
2cm :=

t
2
1cm :=

t
3
2cm :=

The torsional moment of inertia pertinent to the entire cross-section is calculated:
J
1
3
1
3
i
b
i
t
i
( )
3
(
(
(
:= )] 2 * 20 ( ) 1 * 26 ( ) 2 * 20 [( *
3
1
3 3 3
+ + J 115.333cm
4
=

Figure 9.2.1.h Open Contour Thin-Wall Cross-Section

The maximum shear stress on each individual part, as illustrated in Figure 9.2.1.h, is
located in the middle of the larger length of the rectangular part and is obtained as:

1
T
J
t
1
:= * 10 * 2 *
* 10 * 333 . 115
* * 10 * 100
2
4 8
3

m
m
m N
1
1.734 10
9
Pa =

326
2
T
J
t
2
:= * 10 * 1 *
* 10 * 333 . 115
* * 10 * 100
2
4 8
3

m
m
m N
2
8.671 10
8
Pa =
3
T
J
t
3
:= * 10 * 2 *
* 10 * 333 . 115
* * 10 * 100
2
4 8
3

m
m
m N
3
1.734 10
9
Pa =

The maximum shear stress pertinent to the entire cross-section is realized in the
flanges, at points 1 and 3:

max
T
J
t
max
:= * 10 * 2 *
* 10 * 333 . 115
* * 10 * 100
2
4 8
3

m
m
m N
max
1734.104MPa =

max
1734.104MPa = >
all_torque
60MPa := NG!!!
The maximum angular rotation is:
max
T
G J
L := * 4 *
* 10 * 272 * * 10 * 80
* * 10 * 100
4 8
2
9
3

m
m
m
N
m N
max
4.335rad =
max
4.335rad = =
max
248.392deg =

Consequently,
max
4.335rad = >
all_torque
0.07rad = NG????

Note: The cross-section analyzed in sections B6 and B7 indicate a violation of the
strength or deformation verification criteria and, under normal circumstances, should
be resized. This task remains to be conducted by the student.


Problem 9.3.1 The solid shaft, illustrated in Figure 9.3.1, with a diameter d = 40 mm
and a length L = 800 mm is made of an aluminum alloy. The material is characterized
by an allowable shear stress
all
= 70 MPa and a shear modulus of elasticity G = 26
GPa. If the allowable angle of twist over the entire length of the shaft is
all
= 0.10
rad. Draw the variation of the torque magnitude along the entire length of the shaft.
Calculate: (a) the maximum allowable torque T
all
sustained by the shaft and draw the

327
corresponding shear stress distribution on the cross-section, and (b) the angle of twist
induced by a torque T = 0.9 T
all
.

Figure 9.3.1

Problem 9.3.2 The 2 m long solid shaft shown in Figure 9.3.1 is made of brass
characterized by an allowable shear stress
all
= 120 MPa and a shear modulus of
elasticity G = 26 GPa. The shaft is subjected at both ends by a torque T = 25 kNm.
Calculate the required diameter of the shaft considering the strength and deformation
of the material. The allowable angle of twist over the entire length of the shaft is
all

= 0.10 rad/m.

Problem 9.3.3 The shaft, shown in Figure 9.3.3, with an outside diameter d
0
= 60 mm
is made of a steel alloy characterized by an allowable shear stress of
all
= 80 MPa and
a shear modulus of elasticity G = 200 GPa. The shaft is to be subjected at both ends
to a torque T = 2 kNm. Draw the variation of the torque magnitude along the entire
length of the shaft. Calculate: (a) the required interior diameter d
i
, (b) the required
exterior diameter d
e
if the shaft has a full cross-section, (c) the ratio of the weight of
the shaft obtained in the previous two conditions, and (d) the angle of twist between
the two ends if the shaft has a length L=1m.

Figure 9.3.3

Problem 9.3.4 The solid circular shaft, illustrated in Figure 9.3.4.a, reaches the
allowable shear stress
all
under the action of a torque T
a
. Later, the solid shaft is

328
replaced by a tubular shaft, shown in Figure 9.3.4.b, with a ratio of outside diameter
to inside diameter of 5 . 0 =
i
o
d
d
but weighing the same as the solid shaft.

Figure 9.3.4

Draw the variation of the torque magnitude along the entire length of the shaft and
calculate: (a) the magnitude of the torque T
b
necessary to produce in the tubular cross-
section the same allowable shear stress and draw the distribution of the shear stress on
the cross-section, and (b) the twisting angles
a
and
b
corresponding to torques T
a

and T
b
, respectively.

Problem 9.3.5 The circular stepped shaft AC, illustrated in Figure 9.3.5, is made of
steel and is subjected to two torques located at sections B and C. The diameters of the
shaft segments are: d
1
= 40 mm and d
2 =
25 mm. Draw the variation of the torque
magnitude along the entire length of the shaft and calculate: (a) the magnitude of the
torques T
B
and T
C
necessary to induce in both segments a maximum shear stress of
200 MPa, (b) considering the magnitude of the torques previously calculated and a
shear modulus of elasticity G = 200 GPa, the angular rotations at B and C, and (c) the
ratio of the torques for the angular rotation in C to be zero.

Figure 9.3.5

329
Problem 9.3.6 The stepped shaft AC, shown in Figure 9.3.6, consisting of two solid
circular segments is subjected to torques T
B
= 5 kNm and T
C
= 1.7 kNm. The lengths
and the diameters of the segments are: d
1
= 65 mm, d
2
= 50 mm, L
1
=650 mm and L
2

= 450 mm. The shaft is made of steel with an allowable shear stress
all
= 70 MPa and
a shear modulus G = 80 GPa.

Figure 9.3.6

Draw the variation of the torque magnitude along the entire length of the shaft and (a)
verify the shaft cross-sections and draw the corresponding shear stress distributions on
the cross-section, and (b) calculate the angle of twist at locations B and C.

Problem 9.3.7 The allowable shearing stress in the circular stepped steel shaft shown
in Figure 9.3.7 is
all
= 200 MPa. Consider that the diameters of the shaft segments
are d
1
= 50 mm, d
2
= 100 mm and d
3
= 150 mm and that the shaft is made of steel
with a shear modulus G = 200 GPa. Draw the variation of the torque magnitude along
the entire length of the shaft and calculate: (a) the magnitudes of the torques T
A
, T
B

and T
C
necessary to induce in all segments a shear stress equal to
all
, (b) the angular
rotation at locations A, B and C induced by the torques T
A
, T
B
and T
C
previously
calculated.

Figure 9.3.7

330
Problem 9.3.8 The stepped shaft ABCD, illustrated in Figure 9.3.8, consisting of
three solid circular segments, is subjected to torques of magnitudes T
B
=12 kNm, T
C
=
6 kNm and T
D
=2 kNm, respectively.

Figure 9.3.8

The shaft is made of steel characterized by an allowable shear stress
all
= 200 MPa
and a shear modulus of elasticity G = 200 GPa. Considering that the segments have
equal lengths of 0.5 m and that the diameters of the segments are 80 mm, 60 mm, and
40 mm, respectively, conduct the following tasks: (a) draw the variation of the torque
magnitude along the entire length of the shaft, (b) verify the shear stress in the shaft,
(c) calculate the shaft angle of twist at locations B, C and D, and (d) indicate an
allowable angle of twist per unit length.

Problem 9.3.9 A circular tube of outer diameter d
3
= 70 mm and inner diameter d2 =
60 mm is welded at the right end to a fixed plate and at the left end to a rigid end plate
as illustrated in Figure 9.3.9. The second bar, a solid circular bar with a diameter d1 =
40 mm, located inside and concentric with the tube, passes through a hole in the fixed
plate and is welded to the left end plate. The lengths of the tube and solid circular bar
are L and 0.5L, respectively. A torque of magnitude T acts at the tip A of the circular
bar. Both members are made of steel characterized by an allowable shear stress
all

and shear modulus of elasticity G. Conduct the following tasks: (a) draw the variation
of the torque magnitude along the entire lengths of both members, (b) derive a
formula for the maximum shear stresses in both the bar and tube, (c) derive a formula
for the angle twist at tip A of the bar, (d) considering the length of the solid bar L= 1
m, the allowable shear stress
all
= 200 MPa calculate the allowable torque of the
system, and (e) for shear modulus of elasticity G = 200 GPa and the magnitude of the
torque previously calculated determine the angle of twist at the left plate location and
at tip A.

331

Figure 9.3.9

Problem 9.3.10 Three identical circular rigid disks A, B, and C are welded to the ends
of three identical solid circular bars as shown in Figure 9.3.10. The bars are welded at
their intersection D to form a rigid connection. The bars have a diameter d2 = 10 mm
and a length of L = 1 m, while the rigid disks have a diameter d1 = 75 mm.

Figure 9.3.10

Considering that the forces P
1
, P
2
, and P
3
are applied on the disks A, B, and C,
respectively, conduct the following tasks: (a) draw the variation of the torque
magnitude along each bar of the system, (b) derive a relation between the forces P
1
,
P
2
, and P
3
, (c) verify the bars for strength if P
3
= 200 N and
all
=80 MPa, and (d)
calculate the angle of twist at A, B and C locations considering P
1
= 140 N and the
shear modulus of elasticity G = 70 GPa.

Problem 9.3.11 The vertical pole of solid circular cross-section and height H,
illustrated in Figure 9.3.11, is twisted by two horizontal forces P acting at the ends of
a horizontal arm AB. Considering that the vertical pole is made of a material with an
allowable shear stress
all
and a shear modulus of elasticity G conduct the following
tasks: (a) find the horizontal force P inducing in the pole a shear stress equal to
all
, (b)

332
find the expression of the maximum angle of twist of the vertical pole, (c) considering
the following values:
all
= 90 MPa, c = 0.25 m and P = 2 kN and d=50 mm verify
the pole for strength, and (d) considering G = 70 GPa and
all
=0.1 rad/m calculate
the required height of the pole.

Figure 9.3.11

Problem 9.3.12 The tapered solid shaft, shown in Figure 9.3.12, has a variable
diameter linearly changing from d
0
at tip A (x = 0) to 2*d
0
at point B (x =L). The shaft
is attached in point B, at x = L, to a rigid wall and is subjected in point A, at x = 0, to
a torque of magnitude T
0
. Draw the variation of the torque magnitude along the entire
length of the shaft and (a) derive an expression for the maximum cross-sectional shear
stress in the tapered shaft as a function of the distance x, (b) derive an expression for
the angle of twist of the shaft at the tip A considering the shear modulus of elasticity G
of the material known, (c) repeat the tasks (a) and (b) if the shaft has a circular tubular
cross-section of a constant thickness t, and (d) repeat the tasks (a) and (b) if a hole of
constant diameter d
i
= 0.5* d
0
is drilled out along the entire length of the shaft
(resulting in a tubular shaft of linearly varying wall thickness).

Figure 9.3.12

Problem 9.3.13 The solid circular shaft attached to a rigid wall as illustrated in Figure
9.3.13 is subjected to a distributed external torque which varies linearly from intensity
of t
0
per unit of length at point A (x = 0) to zero value at point B (x = L).

333

Figure 9.3.13

Draw the variation of the torque magnitude along the entire length of the shaft.
Considering that the shaft diameter and the materials elastic shear modulus are d and
G, respectively, determine: (a) the expression of the cross-sectional shear stress in the
shaft as a function of the distance x, (b) the expression of the total angle of twist at the
free end of the shaft, (c) repeat the tasks (a) and (b) if the stated externally-applied
torque distribution is replaced by the cubically-varying torque ] ) ( 1 [ * ) (
3
0
L
x
t x t = ,
and (d) repeat the tasks (a) and (b) if the stated externally-applied torque distribution
is replaced by the varying torque )
* 2
*
cos( * ) (
0
L
x
t x t

= .

Problem 9.3.14 9.3.23 A thin-wall tubular member with a cross-section illustrated
in Figures 9.3.14 through 9.3.23 is subjected at both ends by opposite torques of
equal magnitudes T. Conduct the following tasks: (a) derive and draw the expression
of the shear stress on the cross-section function of the indicated parameters
(T,t,a,b,etc.), (b) considering that the maximum shear stress reaches the allowable
shear stress
all
of the material calculate the allowable torque magnitude T
all
, and (c)
considering that the material shear modulus of elasticity G is known calculate the
angle of twist between the ends of the member. Conduct numerical evaluations for the
following set of geometrical data: a =100 mm, b = 80 mm, t = 2 mm, t
1
=t and t
2
=2*t

334
and a material characterized by
all
= 90 MPa and G=200 GPa. Hint: for problem
9.3.19 the variation of the wall thickness is )
2
sin 1 ( * ) (
0

+ = t t .

Figure 9.3.14 Figure 9.3.15



Figure 9.3.20

335


Figure 9.3.23

Problem 9.3.24 Consider that the bars with the thin-wall cross-sections illustrated in
Figures 9.3.14 through 9.3.19 are 1m long and are made of the same material
(density , allowable shear stress
all
and allowable angle of twist
all
). All bars are
subjected to the same magnitude torque T. Calculate the material weight
corresponding to each bar and conclude about the efficiency of the shape.

Problem 9.3.25-9.3.28 A thin-wall member with a cross-section illustrated in Figures
9.3.25 through 9.3.28 is subjected at both ends to opposite torques of equal
magnitudes T. Conduct the following tasks: (a) derive and draw the expression of the
shear stress on the cross-section function of the indicated parameters (T, t, a, b), (b)
considering that the maximum shear stress reaches the allowable shear stress
all
of the
material calculate the allowable torque magnitude T
all
, and (c) considering the
material shear modulus of elasticity G known calculate the angle of twist between the
ends of the member. Conduct numerical evaluations for the following set of
geometrical data: a =100 mm, b = 80 mm, t = 2 mm and a material characterized by
all
= 90 MPa and G=200 GPa

336



Problem 9.3.29 Calculate the allowable torque T
all
of the thin-wall cross-sections
illustrated in Figure 9.3.29 considering that all are made of the same material and the
welds are broken. Considering that the welds are in-place calculate the shear forces in
the welds.

Figure 9.3.29

Problem 9.3.30 A solid circular bar with diameter d is to be replaced by a rectangular
tubular cross section with dimensions shown in Figure 9.3.30. Determine the
thickness t of the tube so that the maximum shear stress in the tube and in the circular
bar to be equal.

337

Figure 9.3.30

Problem 9.3.31 The statically indeterminate stepped shaft ACB, illustrated in Figure
9.3.31, is fixed at both ends, A and B, and is subjected to a torque To at point C. The
two segments of the shaft characterized by lengths L
A
and L
B
and polar moments of
inertia I
pA
and I
pB
, respectively, are made of the same material. Calculate the ratio
between the diameters of the two segments in order for the maximum shear stress to
reach the allowable limit in both segments.

Figure 9.3.31

Problem 9.3.32 As illustrated in Figure 9.3.32, a solid steel bar with a 30 mm diameter
is enclosed by a steel tube of 45 mm outer diameter and 36 mm inner diameter. Both
the bar and the tube are joined by a rigid plate at end B and fixed into a rigid wall at
end A. Considering that the rigid end plate is subjected to a torque T = 500 Nm and
the length of both members is 500 mm determine: (a) the maximum shear stresses in
the bar and tube, (b) the angle of rotation (in degrees) of the end plate, assuming that
the shear modulus of the steel is G = 200 GPa and (c) if the tube and the bar are

338
replaced by a single bar with solid circular cross-section, find its diameter d for the
angle of twisting to remain unchanged.

Problem 9.3.32

Problem 9.3.33 As illustrated in Figure 9.3.33 the hollow circular tube A fits over the
end of a solid circular bar B without being attached to each other. The far ends of both
bars are fixed into rigid walls. Then, bar B is twisted with an angle and two holes
are made through both members and a rigid pin is placed through the holes. Later, the
bar B is released and the system returns to equilibrium. Considering that the members
have the same lengths and are characterized by polar moments of inertia I
pA
and I
pB
,
respectively, calculate: (a) the reaction torques acting at the fixed ends and (b) the
maximum shear stresses in the members.,

Problem 9.3.33

Problem 9.3.34 The shaft AB of diameter d
1
attached to two circular disks of diameter
d
2
, as illustrated in Figure 9.3.34.a, is subjected at both ends by a torques To. While
these torques are acting, a tube of the same material as the shaft and with an outer
diameter d
3
and an inner diameter d
2
, is fitted over the disks and welded securely to
them, as pictured in Figure 9.3.34.b, and then, the torques To are removed.

339

Problem 9.3.34
Assuming that the flanges are rigid, derive a formula for the maximum shear stress in
the shaft before and after the fitting of the tube.

340
CHAPTER 10 Plane Stress Transformation


The three-dimensional state of stress is illustrated in Figure 10.1.1 where, for clarity,
only the stresses drawn on the faces with positive normal are represented.

Figure 10.1.1 Three-Dimensional State of Stress

Mathematically the three-dimensional state of stress is represented by a generalized
stress tensor ) , , ( z y x T
defined by nine distinct stress components:

z zy zx
yz y yx
xz xy x
z y x T

= ) , , ( (10.1)

Applying the shear stress duality principle (
yx xy
= ,
zx xz
= and
zy yz
= ) the
number of independent stress components is reduced from nine to six.

There are instances when some of the stress tensor components vanish and the general
three-dimensional stress tensor ) , , ( z y x T
degenerates into a tensor characterized by

only three independent components all independent of the variable z. This condition
is called plane state of stress. For the present theoretical development, it is assumed
that all stress components pertinent to the planes having normal vector parallel to the
z axis are zero:
0 =
z
(10.2)
0 = =
xz zx
(10.3)

341
0 = =
yz zy
(10.4)

and
) , ( ) , , ( y x T z y x T

= (10.5)

where:
y yx
xy x
y x T

= ) , ( (10.6)

Consequently, the plane stress tensor ) , ( y x T
, defined by three non-zero components,

can be represented in plane oxy as depicted in Figure 10.1.2.

Figure 10.1.2 Plane State of Stress

The beam deformation models encountered in previous chapters, including the study
of the axial and torsional deformation and pure and non-uniform bending, are
characterized by a simpler state of plane stress where the normal stress 0 =
y
has a
null magnitude. In this case the stress tensor ) , ( y x T
is characterized by only two

non-zero stress components:
0
) , (
yx
xy x
y x T
= (10.7)

10.1.1 Plane Stress Transformation Equations

The transformation relations between normal and shear stresses
n
and
nt
pertinent
to a rotated plane and the stresses
x
,
y
and
xy
are obtained by writing the

342
equilibrium equations for the infinitesimal triangular element depicted in Figure
10.1.3. The inclined plane is defined by its positive normal n which is rotated
counterclockwise with an angle from the horizontal direction x .

Figure 10.1.3 Equilibrium of the Infinitesimal Triangular Element

The normal
n
and shear
nt
stresses are:
cos * sin * * 2 sin * cos *
2 2
xy y x n
+ + = (10.8)
) sin (cos * cos * sin * ) (
2 2
+ =
xy y x nt
(10.9)
Equations (10.8) and (10.9), called the plane stress transformation equations, can be
re-written using the trigonometric relations between the angle and the double
angle ) * 2 ( :
) * 2 sin( * ) * 2 cos( *
2 2

xy
y x y x
n
+
+
+
= (10.10)
) * 2 cos( * ) * 2 sin( *
2

xy
y x
nt
+
= (10.11)

Figure 10.1.4 Stresses on Orthogonal Rotated Faces

343
Two faces are needed to express the plane stress tensor around the particular
point ) , ( y x P . Consequently, the formulae (10.10) and (10.11) are applied twice, as
illustrated in Figure 10.1.4. First, considering the rotation angle
'
xx
= and,
secondly, for the complementary angle
'
xy
= . The stresses on two orthogonal
rotated faces are expressed as:
) * 2 sin( *
) * 2 cos( *
2 2
) (
'
' ' '
xx
xy
xx
y x y x
xx
n
x

+
+
+
+
= = =
(10.12)
) * 2 cos( *
) * 2 sin( *
2
) (
'
' ' ' '
xx
xy
xx
y x
xx
nt
y x

+
+
= = =
(10.13)
) * 2 sin( *
) * 2 cos( *
2 2
) 90 (
'
' ' '
xx
xy
xx
y x y x
xx
n
y

+
= + = =

(10.14)
) * 2 cos( *
) * 2 sin( *
2
) 90 (
'
' ' ' '
xx
xy
xx
y x
xx
nt
x y

= + = =

(10.15)

If equations (10.12) and (10.14) are summed, the invariance of the summation of
normal stresses is established:
y x
y x
+ = +
' '
(10.16)

10.1.2 Principal Stresses and Directions

The maximum and minimum normal stresses are called principal stresses and
mathematically represent the extreme values of the normal stress function ) (
n
. The
extreme values are obtained by imposing the condition that the first derivative of the
normal stress ) (
n
relative to the rotation angle is zero:
0
) (
= =
nt
n
d
d

(10.17)

Note: Equation (10.17) indicates that the principal normal stresses are obtained for a
rotated plane where the shear stress is zero.

344
The principal stresses
1
and
2
, schematically depicted in Figure 10.1.5,
1
are
calculated as:
R
av xy
y x y x
p n
+ = +
+
+
= = =

2
2
1 1
4
) (
2
) ( (10.18)
R
av xy
y x y x
p n
= +
+
= = =

2
2
2 2
4
) (
2
) ( (10.19)

where
2
y x
av

+
= (10.20)
2
2
4
) (
xy
y x
R

+
= (10.21)

Figure 10.1.5 Principal Stresses and Directions

From the stationarity condition (10.17), after algebraic manipulations, the angle
p
,
representing the angle for which the normal stress ) (
n
reaches its extreme value is
obtained:
2
) * 2 tan(
y x
xy
p

= (10.22)

Solution of the trigonometric equation (10.22) yields two solutions, ) * 2 (
1 p

and ) * 2 (
2 p
, where the two angles are related as:
+ =
1 2
* 2 * 2
p p
(10.23)

From (10.23) the orthogonality of the two principal directions is established:

345
2
1 2

+ =
p p
(10.24)

To identify which of the two angles,
1 p
or
2 p
, corresponds to the maximum
principal stress
1
, two methods can be employed:
(a) by successively assigning to the angle in equation (10.10) the values
1 p

and
2 p
and observing which angle produces the maximum principal stress;
(b) by employing the inequality (10.25) relating the of the principal maximum
direction angle of rotation to the shear stress
xy
:
0
tan
>
xy
p

(10.25)
For the inequality (10.24) to hold true, the signs of the tangent of the angle
p

and shear stress
xy
must be identical.

10.1.3 Maximum Shear Stresses and Directions

The maximum shear stresses are determined in a similar manner as the principal
stresses. The extreme condition for the shear stress function ) (
nt
contained in
equation (10.17) is written as:
0
) (
) (
=

d
d
nt
(10.26)

From the stationarity condition (10.26) the angle
s
representing the angle for which
the shear stress ) (
nt
reaches its extreme value is obtained:
) * 2 tan(
1
2
) * 2 tan(
p xy
y x
s

=
= (10.27)

Solving the trigonometric equation (10.27), two solutions ) * 2 (
1 s
and ) * 2 (
2 s
, two l
solutions are obtained. The angles orthogonal and are related as:
2
1 2

+ =
s s
(10.28)

The relationship between the angles of the maxim principal normal stress and shear
stress directions,
s
and
p
, is expressed as:

346

4
1 1

=
p s
(10.29)

The maximum and minimum shear stresses are calculated as:
max
2
2
1 1
4
) (
) (

= = +
= = = R
xy
y x
s nt s
(10.30)
min
2
2
2 2
4
) (
) (

= = +
= = = R
xy
y x
s nt s
(10.31)

The normal stresses corresponding to the maximum and minimum shear stresses are
non-null values and are obtained as:
2
) (
1 1
y x
s n s

+
= = = (10.32)
2
) (
2 2
y x
s n s

+
= = = (10.33)

The maximum and minimum shear stresses and the corresponding normal stresses are

Figure 10.1.6 Principal Planes and Maximum Shear Stress Planes

Note: From Figure 10.1.6 it can be concluded that in contrast to the principal planes
which are free of shear stress, the planes on which the shear stress achieves
extreme values are not necessarily free of normal stresses.

347
10.1.4 Mohrs Circle for Plane Stresses

Mohrs Circle is a graphical construction reflecting the variation of the plane state of
stress around a particular point, including information pertinent to the principal and
maximum shear stresses.

The Mohrs Circle for plane stress condition is drawn relative to a Cartesian system
with the abscissa and the ordinate axis representing the normal stresses and the
shear stress , respectively. The following sign convention is employed as illustrated
in Figure 10.1.7:

(a) the positive shear stress axis is downward. This convention is elected in
order to be able to enforce the positive measurement of the angle (sign
convention (b));
(b) the positive angle is measured counterclockwise;
(c) the shear stress on a face plots as positive shear if tends to rotate the face
counterclockwise.

Morhs Circle for plane stress is constructed in the following steps:

(a) The coordinate system is drawn as shown in Figure 10.1.7. The horizontal axis
represents the normal stress , while the vertical axis represents the shear
stress . To gain full advantage of the graphical benefits of the method it is
necessary that the drawing to be made on scale. The representation illustrated
considers the case
y x
> and 0 >
xy
;
(b) Using the calculated values of the normal stresses
x
and
y
and the shear
stress
xy
two points noted as ) , (
xy x
X and ) , (
xy y
Y are placed on the
drawing. The line XY intersects the horizontal axis at point C which
represents the center of the Mohrs Circle;
(c) The distance CX represents the radius of the circle. Using the radius CX and
the position of the center ) 0 , (
avg
C the Mohrs Circle is constructed. The
intersection points,
1
P and
2
P
,
between the circle and the horizontal axis

348
represent the maximum and the minimum principal stresses,
1
and
2
,
respectively;
(d) The value of the angles of rotation pertinent to the principal stresses
1 p
and
2 p
can also be calculated from the graph. The third point ) , (
xy y
Z , called
the pole of normals , is constructed. The lines
1
ZP and
2
ZP represent the
principal direction 1 (associated with the maximum principal stress) and 2
(associated with the minimum principal stress), respectively. The rotation
angles of the principal directions,
1 p
or
2 p
, are measured from the line XZ to
1
ZP and
2
ZP , respectively;

Figure 10.1.7 Mohrs Circle Notation

(e) Constructing two points, S1 and S2, at the intersection of the vertical diameter
of the Mohrs circle with its circumference, the maximum shear stresses and
their corresponding normal stresses are obtained. The points S1 and S2 have as
coordinates the two pairs (
1 s
,
1 s
) and (
2 s
,
2 s
), respectively. The
directions of the maximum shear stresses are obtained by drawing the lines

349
ZS1 and ZS2. The angles
1 s
and
2 s
are measured from the reference line ZX
to the lines ZS1 and ZS2, respectively.
(f) The normal and shear stresses, ) (
n
and ) (
nt
, corresponding to an
inclined plane NN, characterized by the angle , are graphically obtained
constructing a line inclined with the angle measured from the line ZX. The
coordinates of the intersection point N between the inclined line and the circle
circumference represent the of the corresponding normal and shear stresses,
) (
n
and ) (
nt
;


Problem 10.2.1 The stress components of the plane stress tensor T
at a particular
point are shown in the Figures 10.2.1. Conduct the following tasks: (a) calculate the
principal stresses and directions, (b) calculate the maximum shear stresses and
directions, (c) calculate the stresses on the indicated inclined plane NN ( 30deg := ),
(d) calculate the stress components of the stress tensor if the coordinate system is
rotated with 45 deg and (e) plot the corresponding Mohrs Circle.

Figure 10.2.1

The plane stress tensor corresponding to the stress condition illustrated in Figure
10.2.1 is obtained as:

350
Mpa y x T
y yx
xy x
32 16
16 48
) , (
= =

where the stress components are identified accordingly to the sign convention
pictured in Figure 10.1.3:
x
48 MPa :=

y
32 MPa :=

xy
16MPa :=

B. Calculations

B.1 Principal Stresses and Directions

The two main values, the average normal stress
av
and the radius R are calculated
accordingly to formulae (10.20) and (10.21):
avg
1
2

x

y
+
( )
:= ) 32 48 ( *
2
1
avg
8MPa =
R
1
4

x

y
( )
2

xy
2
+ := + +
2 2
16 ) 32 48 ( *
4
1
R 43.081MPa =

1
and
2
are calculated using the formulae (10.18) and
(10.19):
1

avg
R + := + 081 . 43 8
1
51.081MPa =
2

avg
R := 081 . 43 8
2
35.081 MPa =

The principal directions are calculated solving the trigonometric equation (10.22)
tan
2p
( )

xy
x

y
2
:=

2
) 32 ( 48
16

xy
x

y
2
0.4 =

Then, it results that the double angle is:
2p
atan

xy
x

y
2
|
\
|
.
:=

)
2
) 32 ( 48
16
( tan
1
2p
21.801deg =

Two trigonometric solutions are possible:

351
p0_1

2p
2
:=
2
801 . 21
p0_1
10.901deg =
p0_2

2

p0_1
+ := + 901 . 10
2
180
p0_2
100.901deg =

To identify the direction angle of the maximum normal stress two methods can be
used:

(a) First method

The normal stresses corresponding to the two calculated angles are obtained using the
formula (10.9):
n1

x

y
+
2
x

y
2
cos 2
p0_1
( )
+
xy
sin 2
p0_1
( )
+ :=
+
+
+
) 901 . 10 * 2 sin( * 16 ) 901 . 10 * 2 cos( *

2
32 48
2
32 48

n1
51.081MPa =
n2

x

y
+
2
x

y
2
cos 2
p0_2
( )
+
xy
sin 2
p0_2
( )
+ :=
+
+
+
) 901 . 100 * 2 sin( * 16 ) 901 . 100 * 2 cos( *

2
32 48
2
32 48

n2
35.081 MPa =

The principal direction angles are calculated:

p1

p0_1

1

n1
if
p0_2

1

n2
if
:=
angle of the maximum normal stress direction
p1
10.901deg =
p2

p0_1

p1

p0_2
if
p0_2

p1

p0_1
if
:=
angle of the minimum normal stress direction
p2
100.901deg =

(b) Second method

The angle of the maximum normal stress direction is obtained using the formula
(10.25):

352
p1

p0_1
tan
p0_1
( )
xy
0 if
p0_2
tan
p0_1
( )
xy
0 < if
:=
p1
10.901deg =

The complementary angle of the minimum normal stress direction is calculated:
p2

p0_1

p1

p0_2
if
p0_2

p1

p0_1
if
:=
p2
100.901deg =

The graphical representation of the principal stresses and directions is illustrated
below.

B.2 Maximum Shear Stresses and Directions

The magnitude of the maximum shear stresses

1
and
2
are calculated accordingly to
formulae (10.30) and (10.31):
1
R :=
1
43.081MPa =
2
R :=
2
43.081 MPa =

The corresponding normal stress is:

s

avg
:=
s
8MPa =

The direction of maximum shear stress is calculated employing the formula (10.27):

353
tan
2s
( )

x

y
xy
:=

16
2
) 32 ( 48
-2.5

Then, it results:
:
2s
atan
x

y
xy
\
|
.
:=
|
|
|
|
.
|
\
|

16
2
) 32 ( 48
tan
1
2s
68.199 deg =

s0_1

2s
2
:=
2
199 . 68
s0_1
34.099 deg =
s0_2

2

s0_1
+ := 099 . 34
2
180
s0_2
55.901deg =

Two methods can be used to identify the direction angle of the maximum shear stress:

(c) First method

The shear normal stresses corresponding to the two calculated angles are obtained
using the formula (10.11):
s1

x

y
2
sin 2
s0_1
( )

xy
cos 2
s0_1
( )
+ :=
s1
43.081MPa =
s2

x

y
2
sin 2
s0_2
( )

xy
cos 2
s0_2
( )
+ :=
s2
43.081 MPa =

The direction angles are calculated:

s1

s0_1

1

s1
if
s0_2

1

s2
if
:=
angle of the maximum shear stress direction
s1
34.099 deg =
s2

s0_1

s1

s0_2
if
s0_2

s1

s0_1
if
:=
angle of the minimum shear stress direction
s2
55.901deg =

354
(d) Second method

The angle of the maximum shear stress direction is obtained using the formula
(10.29):
s1

p1

4
:=
4
180
901 . 10
s1
34.099 deg =

The complementary angle corresponding to the minimum shear stress direction is
calculated as:

s2

s1

2
+ := +
2
90
099 . 34
s2
55.901deg =

B.3 Stresses on an Inclined Plane (=30deg)

The rotation angle of the inclined plane is 30deg := . Employing the formulae
(10.10) and (10.11) the normal and shear stresses,
n
and
nt
, are calculated:
n

x

y
+
2
x

y
2
cos 2
( )
+
xy
sin 2
( )
+ :=

+
+
+
) 30 * 2 sin( * 16 ) 30 * 2 cos( *
2
32 48
2
32 48
n
41.856MPa =
nt

x

y
2
sin 2
( )

xy
cos 2
( )
+ :=
+
+
) 30 * 2 cos( * 16 ) 30 * 2 sin( *
2
32 48
nt
26.641 MPa =

355

B.4 Modification of the Plane Stress Tensor with Rotated Coordinate System

The stresses on the infinitesimal square rotated with an angle
r
45deg :=

are
calculated accordingly to formulae (10.12) through (10.15). For calculation simplicity
those formulae can be re-cast in a matrix notation as:
r
R
0

The extended notation of the above equation is:
rx
ry
rxy
|
\
|
|
|
|
|
.
1
2
1 cos 2
r
( )
+
( )
1
2
1 cos 2
r
( )
( )
1
2
sin 2
r
( )
1
2
1 cos 2
r
( )
( )
1
2
1 cos 2
r
( )
+
( )
1
2
sin 2
r
( )
sin 2
r
( )
sin 2
r
( )
cos 2
r
( )
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
xy
|
\
|
.

For the case in point, after the algebraic manipulations and matricial multiplication, it
results:
0
48
32
16
|
\
|
|
|
|
.
MPa :=

R
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1
1
0
|
\
|
|
|
|
.
= and

r
24
8
40
|
\
|
|
|
|
.
MPa =

Consequently, the rotated stress components

rx
24MPa = ,

ry
8 MPa =

and
xy
40 MPa =

are pictured below.

356

B.5 Mohrs Circle Construction

The Morhs Circle pertinent to this stress condition is constructed following the steps
described in the theoretical section. The results obtained in sections B3 and B4 are
illustrated by the coordinates of the points N(
nt n
, ), P(
rx rx
, ) and P(
rx ry
, ).

357
Problem 10.2.2 Considering the beam shown in Figure 7.2.7 and a point P located on
the cross-section S at 5 cm above the neutral axis calculate the followings: (a) the
pertinent stresses for point P, (b) the principal stresses and directions, (c) the
maximum shear stresses and directions, and (d) plot the corresponding Mohrs Circle.


A1. The cross-section internal resultants pertinent to cross-section S are obtained from

problem 7.2.7 calculations, section B.5:
M
z_S
56 kN m :=
V
y_S
59 kN :=

A2. The following data necessary for the calculation of the normal stress in point P of
the cross-section S is retrieved from problem 7.2.7 calculations, section B.5.a and
Figure 7.2.7.d:
y
P
5 cm :=
- the position of the point P measured from the neutral axis (NA).
I
Zc
14192.717 cm
4
:=

A2. The following data necessary for the calculation of the shear stress in point P of
the cross-section S is retrieved from problem 7.2.7 calculations, section B.5.b.3 and
Figure 7.2.7.h:
A
U24
42.3 cm
2
:=
y
C2
10.381 cm :=
y
sup
12.611 cm :=
t
w_U24
0.95 cm :=
t
pl
1 cm :=

B. Calculations
B.1 Stresses in Point P of the Cross-section S

The normal stress in point P is calculated accordingly to Naviers Formula:

358
x_P_S
M
z_S
I
Zc
y
P
:=
m
m
m N
* 10 * 5 *
10 * 717 . 14192
* 10 * 56
2
4 8
3

x_P_S
19.728MPa =

The shear stress in point P is obtained employing the Jurawskis Formula:

s3 y
sup
t
w_U24
y
P
:= 5 95 . 0 611 . 12 s3 6.661cm =
- the height of the
web above the cut

S
Zc_ef
s3 ( ) A
U24
y
C2
s3 t
pl
y
sup
t
w_U24
s3
2
\
|
.
+ :=

+ )
2
661 . 6
95 . 0 611 . 12 ( * 1 * 661 . 6 381 . 10 * 3 . 42 S
Zc_ef
s3 ( ) 494.606cm
3
=

- the static moment of the area above the cut

q
yx_ef
s3 ( )
V
y_S
S
Zc_ef
s3 ( )
I
Zc
:=

4 8
3 6 3
10 * 717 . 14192
* 10 * 606 . 494 * 10 * 59
m
m N

q
yx_ef
s3 ( ) 205.611
kN
m
=
- the flow

yx_ef_avg
s3 ( )
q
yx_ef
s3 ( )
t
pl
:=

m
m
kN
2
10 * 1
* 611 . 205
yx_ef_avg
s3 ( ) 20.561 MPa =
xy_ef_avg
s3 ( )
yx_ef_avg
s3 ( ) :=
xy_ef_avg
s3 ( ) 20.561MPa =

In order to use the notation employed in the theoretical section the above calculated
stresses are recast as:
x

x_P_S
:=
x
19.728MPa =
y
0 MPa :=
y
0MPa =
xy

xy_ef_avg
s3 ( ) :=
xy
20.561MPa =

Note: For the case of the plane linear beams subjected to non-uniform bending the
normal stress
y
is always zero.
The plane stress tensor corresponding to the stress condition pertinent to point P,
illustrated in Figure 10.2.2, is:
Mpa y x T
yx
xy x
0 561 . 20
561 . 20 728 . 19
0
) , ( = =

where the stress components are identified accordingly to the sign convention
pictured in Figure 10.1.3:

359

Figure 10.2.2

B.2 Principal Stresses and Directions

The two main values, the average normal stress
av
and the radius R are calculated
accordingly to formulae (10.20) and (10.21):
avg
1
2

x

y
+
( )
:= + ) 0 728 . 19 ( *
2
1
avg
9.864MPa =
R
1
4

x

y
( )
2

xy
2
+ := + +
2 2
561 . 20 ) 0 728 . 19 ( *
4
1
R 22.805MPa =

1
and
2
are calculated using the formulae (10.18) and
(10.19):
1

avg
R + := + 805 . 22 864 . 9
1
32.669MPa =
2

avg
R := 805 . 22 864 . 9
2
12.941 MPa =

The principal directions are calculated solving the trigonometric equation (10.22)
tan
2p
( )

xy
x

y
2
:=
2
728 . 19
561 . 20

xy
x

y
2
2.084 =

Then, it results that the double angle is:
2p
atan

xy
x

y
2
|
\
|
.
:=

)
2
728 . 19
561 . 20
( tan
1
2p
64.371deg =

p0_1

2p
2
:=
2
371 . 64
p0_1
32.185deg =

360
p0_2

2

p0_1
+ := + 185 . 32
2
180
p0_2
122.185deg =

To identify the direction angle of the maximum normal stress two methods can be
used:

(e) First method

The normal stresses corresponding to the two calculated angles are obtained using the
formula (10.9):
n1

x

y
+
2
x

y
2
cos 2
p0_1
( )
+
xy
sin 2
p0_1
( )
+ :=
+ + ) 185 . 32 * 2 sin( * 561 . 20 ) 185 . 32 * 2 cos( *
2
728 . 19
2
728 . 19

n1
32.669MPa =
n2

x

y
+
2
x

y
2
cos 2
p0_2
( )
+
xy
sin 2
p0_2
( )
+ :=
+ + ) 185 . 122 * 2 sin( * 561 . 20 ) 185 . 122 * 2 cos( *
2
728 . 19
2
728 . 19

n2
12.941 MPa =

The principal direction angles are calculated:

p1

p0_1

1

n1
if
p0_2

1

n2
if
:=
p1
32.185deg =
p2

p0_1

p1

p0_2
if
p0_2

p1

p0_1
if
:=
p2
122.185deg =

(f) Second method

The angle of the maximum normal stress direction is obtained using the formula
(10.24):
p1

p0_1
tan
p0_1
( )
xy
0 if
p0_2
tan
p0_1
( )
xy
0 < if
:=

361
p1
32.185deg =

The complementary angle of the minimum normal stress direction is calculated:
p2

p0_1

p1

p0_2
if
p0_2

p1

p0_1
if
:=
p2
122.185deg =

The graphical representation of the principal stresses and directions is illustrated
below.

B.3 Maximum Shear Stresses and Directions

The magnitude of the maximum shear stresses

1
and
2
are calculated accordingly to
formulae (10.30) and (10.31):
1
R :=
1
22.805MPa =
2
R :=
2
22.805 MPa =

The corresponding normal stress is:

s

avg
:=
s
9.864MPa =

The direction of maximum shear stress is calculated employing the formula (10.27):
tan
2s
( )

x

y
xy
:=
561 . 20
2
728 . 19
-0.480

Then, it results:

362
:
2s
atan
x

y
xy
\
|
.
:=
|
|
|
|
.
|
\
|

561 . 20
2
728 . 19
tan
1
2s
25.629 deg =

s0_1

2s
2
:=
2
629 . 25
s0_1
12.815 deg =
s0_2

2

s0_1
+ := 815 . 12
2
180
s0_2
77.185deg =

Two methods can be used to identify the direction angle of the maximum shear stress:

(g) First method

The shear normal stresses corresponding to the two calculated angles are obtained
using the formula (10.11):
s1

x

y
2
sin 2
s0_1
( )

xy
cos 2
s0_1
( )
+ :=
s1
22.805MPa =
s2

x

y
2
sin 2
s0_2
( )

xy
cos 2
s0_2
( )
+ :=
s2
22.805 MPa =

The direction angles are calculated:

s1

s0_1

1

s1
if
s0_2

1

s2
if
:=
angle of the maximum shear stress direction
s1
12.815 deg =
s2

s0_1

s1

s0_2
if
s0_2

s1

s0_1
if
:=
angle of the minimum shear stress direction
s2
77.185deg =

(h) Second method

The angle of the maximum shear stress direction is obtained using the formula
(10.29):
s1

p1

4
:=
4
180
185 . 32
s1
12.815 deg =

363

The complementary angle corresponding to the minimum shear stress direction is
calculated as:

s2

s1

2
+ := +
2
180
815 . 12
s2
77.185deg =

B.5 Mohrs Circle Construction

The Morhs Circle pertinent to the calculated stress condition is constructed following
the steps described in the theoretical section.

364

Problem 10.3.1- 10.3.3 The stress components of the plane stress tensor T
at a
particular point are shown in the Figures 19.3.1 through 10.3.3. Calculate the stresses
on the indicated inclined plane NN for each individual case and construct the
corresponding Morhs circle.


Figure 10.3.3

Problem 10.3.4 The components of the stress tensor T
at point A of a bracket are

shown in Figure 10.3.4. Calculate and draw the stresses around the point A if the
coordinate system is rotated anti-clock-wise with an angle = 20.

365

Figure 10.3.4

Problem 10.3.5 The hinged support of the steel plate girder illustrated in Figure 10.3.5
depicts the region of a plate girder where it transfers its vertical load through a roller
support to a concrete pier. The components of the stress tensor T

at point A are also
shown in the picture. Calculate and draw the components of the plane stress tensor if
the coordinate system is rotated anti-clock-wise with an angle = 30. Recalculate for
the case =-30.

Figure 10.3.5

Problem 10.3.6 - 10.3.7 The components of the plane stress tensor T

around a given
point are shown in the corresponding figures. Calculate and draw the components of
the stress tensor if the coordinate system is rotated anti-clock-wise with an angle =

366
30 and then with an additional angle = 80. Recalculate for a rotation angle = -
30. Comment the results.


Problem 10.3.8 10.3.9 The components of the plane stress tensor T

at a given point
A and corresponding to a rotated coordinate system Oxy are shown in Figures 10.3.8
and 10.3.9. Calculate and draw the components of the stress tensor corresponding to
the coordinate system Oxy.


Problem 10.3.10 10.3.11 The components of the plane stress tensor T

at point A
considering two coordinate systems, Oxy and Oxy, rotated from each other with an
angle , are shown in the following figures. Calculate the angle and the unknown

367
indicated stress components. Repeat the calculations graphically employing the
corresponding Mohrs circle.

Figure 10.3.10

Figure 10.3.11

Problem 10.3.12 Considering the following generalized plane stress tensors
T

calculate and draw: (a) the stress tensor components, (b) the principal stresses and
principal directions, (c) the maximum shear stresses and directions and (d) the

(T1)
x
= 20.68 MPa y = -34.47 MPa
xy
= -20.68 MPa;
(T2)
x
= 48 MPa y = -32 MPa
xy
= 16 MPa;
(T3)
x
= 12 MPa y = -8 MPa
xy
= -4 MPa;

368
(T4)
x
= 55.16 MPa y = -8.27 MPa
xy
= -27.58 MPa;
(T5)
x
=-27.58 MPa y = 82.7 MPa
xy
= 41.37 MPa;
(T6)
x
= 16.54 MPa y = 99.29 MPa
xy
= 99.28 MPa.

Problem 10.3.13 10.3.17 Considering the stress tensors calculated at point A during
the life service of a suspension car component as indicated in Figures 10.3.13 through
10.3.17 calculate and draw the followings: (a) the generalized stress plane tensor, (b)
(b) the principal stresses and principal directions, (c) the maximum shear stresses and
directions and (d) the corresponding Mohrs circle.

Figure 10.3.13


369


Problem 10.3.18 At a certain point A, shown in Figure 10.3.18, the normal stresses on
two mutually perpendicular x and y positive faces are 7 MPa (compression) and 3
MPa (tension). The maximum in-plane shear stress at this point is 10 MPa. Calculate:
(a) the magnitude of the shear stress acting on the x>0 and y>0 faces and (b) the
principal stresses and directions. Conduct the calculations graphically by constructing
the corresponding Mohrs circle.

Figure 10.3.18

Problem 10.3.19 The components of generalized plane stress tensor at a certain point
A located on the surface of an airplane wing are illustrated in Figure 10.3.19. The
maximum in-plane shear stress at this point is 89.63 MPa. Calculate: (a) the
magnitude of the shear stress on the x and y faces, (b) the principal stresses and

370
directions at this point. Conduct the calculations graphically by constructing the

Figure 10.3.19

Problem 10.3.20 The state of plane stress at a point A is characterized by the stress
components shown in Figure 10.3.20. The maximum in-plane shear stress is 78 MPa
and one of the two in-plane principal stresses is 22 MPa (tension). Calculate: (a) the
values of the two unknown components of the generalized plane tensor, (b) the other
principal stress, (c) the principal directions and (d) the maximum shear directions.
Conduct the calculations graphically by constructing the corresponding Mohrs circle.

Figure 10.3.20

Problem 10.3.21 For the plane generalized stress tensor, representing the uni-axial
state of stress illustrated in Figure 10.3.21, conduct the following tasks: (a) construct
Mohr's circle, (b) use the Mohr's circle to derive the equations for the normal and

371
shear stresses on the n-face and (c) use the Mohr's circle to determine the planes on
which maximum shear stress acts. Sketch a properly oriented maximum shear stress
element and indicate the normal and shear stresses acting on its faces.

Figure 10.3.21

Problem 10.3.22 For the plane generalized stress tensor, representing the pure shear
state of stress illustrated in Figure 10.3.22, conduct the following tasks: (a) construct
Mohr's circle, (b) use the Mohr's circle to derive the equations for the normal and
shear stresses on the n-face and (c) use the Mohr's circle to determine the planes on
which maximum shear stress acts. Sketch a properly oriented maximum shear stress
element and indicate the normal and shear stresses acting on its faces.

Figure 10.3.22

Problem 10.3.23 The cantilever beam shown in Figure 10.3.23 is subjected to a
vertical uniform distributed load. The beam cross-section is of rectangular shape and
constant along its entire length. Calculate and draw: (a) the generalized plane stress
tensor, (b) the principal stresses and directions, (c) the maximum shear stresses and

372
directions and (d) the corresponding Mohrs circle for all three points, A (x = 0, y
A
=
h/2), B (x = 0, y
B
= h/4) and C (x = 0, y
C
= 0) , as indicated in the figure.

Figure 10.3.23

Problem 10.3.24 The simply supported beam shown in Figure 10.3.24 is subjected to
a concentrated vertical load acting at the half-span. The beam cross-section is made of
a W8x40 and constant along its entire length. Calculate and draw the followings: (a)
the generalized plane stress tensor, (b) the principal stresses and directions, (c) the
maximum shear stresses and directions and (d) the corresponding Mohrs circle for
three points: A (x = 0.6 m, y
A
= h/2), B (x = 0.6 m, y
B
= h
w
/2) and C (x = 0.6 m, y
C
=
h
w
/4) , as indicated in the figure, where h and h
w
are the W shape and the web heights,
respectively.

Figure 10.3.24

Problem 10.3.25 The simply supported beam loaded shown in Figure 10.3.25 is made
of I30 steel shape. At the cross-section located at 20 in from the right-hand support,
calculate: (a) the generalized plane stress tensor, (b) the principal stresses and
directions, (c) the maximum shear stresses and directions and (d) the corresponding

373
Mohrs circle at each of the following locations: (1) top of the beam, (2) top of the
web and (3) the neutral axis.

Figure 10.3.25

Problem 10.3.26 The overhanging beam illustrated in Figure 10.3.26 is loaded with
concentrated force P acting at the tip of the cantilever.

Figure 10.3.26
Considering that the cross-section is a rectangular shape h x b and constant along its
entire length, find the expressions of the plane stress tensor components, the principal
stresses and direction and the maximum shear stress around point D. Assuming the
following numerical data: h = 150 mm, b = 25 mm and L = 1.5 m, calculate the
magnitude of the concentrated load P, if the maximum principal stress (tension) at
point D is 49 MPa and construct the corresponding Mohrs circle.

Problem 10.3.27 The simply supported beam shown in Figure 10.3.27 loaded with a 8
concentrated load P has a constant cross-section along its entire length. For the mid-
span cross-section calculate: (a) the generalized plane stress tensor, (b) the principal

374
stresses and directions, (c) the maximum shear stresses and directions and (d) the
corresponding Mohrs circle at each of the points A, B and C.

Figure 10.3.27

Problem 10.3.28 A rectangular wooden simply supported beam shown in Figure
10.3.28 is loaded with 36 kN concentrated force acting at 1.22 m distance from the
left-hand support. Considering that the grain of the wood makes an angle of 20 with
the longitudinal axis of the beam conduct the following tasks: (a) find the stress tensor
components at points A and B along the grain fiber, (b) calculate the principal stresses
and directions at points A and B, and (c) calculate the maximum shear stress at points
A and B and (d) construct the corresponding Mohrs circles.

Figure 10.3.28

375
REFERENCES
1. Craig, Roy R., Mechanics of Materials, Second Edition, John Willey &
Sons, New York, 2000.

2. Gere, James M., Mechanics of Materials, Fifth Edition, Brooks/Cole,
Pacific Grove, CA, 2001.

3. Higdon, A., Ohlsen, E.H., and Stiles, W.B., Mechanics of Materials, Third
Edition, John Willey & Sons, New York, 1962.

4. Popov, E.P., Introduction to Mechanics of Solids, Prentice-Hall Inc.,
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersy, 1968.

5. Mazilu P., Posea N. and Iordachescu E., Probleme de Rezistenta
Materialelor, Vol I, Editura Tehnica Bucuresti, 1969.

6. Hartog, J.P.D., Strength of Materials, Dover Publications Inc., New York,
1961.

Simulescumechanics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Simulescumechanics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Simulescumechanics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL UNIVERSITY OF CIVIL ENGINEERING

derived for the

in a given cross-section is independent of the shear stress induced

on both cross-sections is illustrated in Figure 7.1.2.b;

on the remaining vertical areas

0- moment about z axis passing through the L shape centroid

defined by nine distinct stress components:

degenerates into a tensor characterized by

, defined by three non-zero components,

is characterized by only two

) 901 . 10 * 2 sin( * 16 ) 901 . 10 * 2 cos( *

) 901 . 100 * 2 sin( * 16 ) 901 . 100 * 2 cos( *

at point A of a bracket are

You might also like